Home

VISUAL EXTEND 11.0

1. Forms can be docked 1 Use form settings Show printer prompt 1 Show printer dialog box for all form Enable 1 means 1 for all forms Ir Null display F Open forms with last filter settings active 1 Enabled v Number of entries shown in the drop down lists 1 Main form Number oflock retries Main toolbar CAppNavBar Table manager class Required field Failure properties Report behavior 90 Oblectassistedreporingtorvrre m ReportBehavior for PDF 1 use REPORTBEHAVIOR 80 for all forms aoi ER ER CR Custom Print Dialog 1 Use Custom print dialog Engine 9 0 X z z Show filter name 0 Use form settings Multiline Report 1 t for all forms Ix URL ofthe INI file with the Generate CneToMany apod Ue fm RUNG umo i ior 2 VFX95 URL of additional files to download Save setings for fure use 2 Activation Error Handling Edit OLE Drag amp Drop Grids Indexes Paths misc Number of changes accepted when using hardware parameters tolerance 0 12 Stored into a file and sent as an e mail after in Method to send registration number to the developer Hardware parameters file Server name for HTTP
2. 127 18 8 2 Methods of the Application eene eene nennen nennen 128 18 9 VFX PRIMARY KEY GENERATION 18 10 DATA MANIPULATION 4 1 1 8 181 ASKFORM o i rt ee 18 12 PROGRESS BAR x Li ntt e RR ERE tete ctis ee 18 13 DATE SELECTION ence IE S RE TE 18 13 1 cPickDate cla Saren harina 18 13 2 cDatetime class li e ii e iei n oh bd en a 131 18 14 REPORT SELECTION AREE E A T A 18 15 THE MICROSOFT AGENTS 18 16 THE VFX RESOURCE TABLE 1617 THE INCLUDE FLES Rn HR Ga level baa ere un eee eed dade Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 6 18 18 OEE DRAG amp DROP edet nine itti nt 133 18 19 HOOKS cite E B e doni 133 18 20 BUSINESS GR PH nta estet ar NATAS 134 18 20 1 isset al e Ree 135 18 21 VFX GDI GRAPH BUIDDER etri RUE I Er PPP ete Fes 136 18 22 CGDIGRAPH AND CGDIGRAPHCUSTOM eese nennen enne 144 18 23 TOOLBARS nassen 157 18 23 1 Use the Main Toolbar you like eese eren enitn 157 18 23 2 Adding a toolbar to a Form
3. HR ET ta EE 222 30 145 S3Hinwelse uuu S Sdn ape Nu Saat a da eo E US 222 SOT Beispieli eee o ars Hirn IH RE RO EEE 222 30 2 DUCUM 222 2020127 eS SVN os E ADDE BUDENSIS EE 222 223 30 2 3 R ckeabewerts e Vete den AT enit qiti 223 30 2 4 Hinweis 223 202552 SBeispiel id eve err e AE E S ere E DERE e are 223 30 3 30 3 1 30 3 2 30 3 3 BE PEN Una T 223 30 3 5 ade E a e e tete se 30 4 OCCURS O OCCURS2 SUA sso tren sah see a unn Un e NUM ES 30 4 2 Paramete nseri e 30 4 3 R ckeabeWerta este 304 4 Hinweisen na 224 30 4 5 Beispiel 1 30 6 Beispiel UAR dioe RR ten fave 224 30 5 PADLO PADRO PADEN Haiti ersehen ben care 225 30 5 1 30 5 2 30 5 3 0 6 SHInWOlSe ui Rep eU IRURE EGRE e EEG 225 30 95 95 Beispiel aeneo RHONE RERO ID RESTE RAE ER IUE 30 6 CHRTRANO esse SOLO Ty paa aom p ee 20 60 20 P ramelterasio oot dona RU D RR eee 30 6 3 R ckgabewert
4. OLE Drag amp Drop Grids Indexes Paths Misc Author xs Name of Postscript printer to be installed when necessary HP DeskJet 1200C PS Always install PS printer Name of Fax printer driver to be used when sending fax reports URL used when checking for internet connection existence http Avwww visualextend com Password to be used for encrypting config vix file Support URL Support e mail List separator chars Security tables list V Install ClickYes E Save settings for future use Edit OLE Drag amp Drop Grids Indexes Paths Misc Author Startup Application Behavior Application Behavior 2 Activation Error Handling i Author Uwe amp Venelina Company Address City State PostalCode Country Company web site URL Feedback email address E Save settings for future use The class cApplication is the base class of the Application object The properties and Methods of the Application objects are globally accessible for use in the entire application The class cApplication is programmatically instanced from the visual class cFoxAppl from the class library Appl vcx Settings keyed up using VFX Application Builder are saved in this class In case of need methods can be overwritten or changed he
5. ChidEdiPage C nickel ibw amp otjvoc kOneToMany ChidEsiPage C mickaerexiibw amp otvoc kOneToMamy ChidEsiPage C lopicktedbox ibw amp obivc kOneToMany ChidEsiPage cema __ itivictvex kOneToMamy ChidEsiPage C kOneToMamy ChidEstPage C jmiekeotor kOnsToMany ChidEdiPage C etedemail kOneToMany ChidEdiPage C tedhwerinRibwctiex ChidEdiPage rdocumentm ibw amp ctiwx kOneToMamy ChidEsiPage C ecombobox cOneToMany ChildEditPage ceditbox libwfxobj vcx lt OOF F000 F 20000 0 0 0 13 5 VFX Help Wizard In VFX has been integrated a new System for creation of CHM Help files The VFX Help Wizard automatically fills out unique in all controls of a project VFX Help Wizard DOR If you have made any changes to your current project you should setthe HelpContextlDs before editing the help system Set HelpContextlDs If vou have made changes to your help system you should generate the help project Generate Help Project After generating the help project open the help project hhp with the HTML Help Workshop and click on Save all project files and compile Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 104 When at application
6. Field Len Code And Description Control Source Parent parenttype Row Source Alias MyPick v gt The settings of the class cComboPicklist as well as content of tables Vfxpdef dbf and Vfxplist dbf can be edited with VFX Combo Pick List Builder For the cComboPicklist you have to choose the ControlSource and the Rowsource alias If in the form s data environment there is already same alias as the one chosen for Rowsource you are asked if that alias should be used or a new one has to be created If the Rowsource alias is not in the data environment of the form the builder creates a new cursor object for it and sets its properties accordingly Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 90 10 5 1 Pick list maintenance form t Pick List Descript List alue1 MyList ListValue2 MySecondList Second pick list value 1 Second pick list value 2 Descript Listvalue1 v Active Value This form is designated to give the end users of the application ability to maintain used pick list values For this purpose in every VFX 11 0 project is included the form VFXPlist scx User can navigate through the full list or to filter visible data records by list code It is possible to delete a record from the table but the proposed approach it to mark unused rows as non active in or
7. Points and Lines properties Line Caps For the case of plain line chart having Depth 0 shows rounded caps in each line intersection point Unique shape Determines if same shape will be used in all the intersections of all lines for plain line charts Unique Shape Determines the shape to be used in all the intersections of all lines for plain line charts having 0 The default value is zero that means that each line will have a different shape Shape Width Determines the width of shape Data Style Legends Axes Colors Background Scales Margins Quality Chart Type Area Properties 7 Side Legends 6 Area l 9 Draw 3D line in top 3 Top Right Report Name 7 Draw borders Values in shapes vixGDIGraph el C Show percentages Logo file name picture to be added in re _ left top comer of the graph Change color on mouse over BITMAPIDESKTOP PNG V Show ToolTips Depth 20 4 C shadow o Area properties Draw 3D line in top When true a cover line will be drawn on the top of the 3D Area chart Draw borders When true draws borders around each Area piece GDIGraph permits to fully configure the formatting of 8 kinds of legends This can be done on 3td page of the builder Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 140 La
8. rtung 55 Tabellen Ausgew hlt Datens tze CATEGORY A 2 821 CUSTOMER gt EMPLOYEE ORDERS Wartung Reparatur ORDITEMS um Komprimieren SHIPPERS Memos packen SUPPLIER x Neu Indizieren ORDITEMS Here tables can be packed or reindexed 2 2 8 About Dialog A standard About Dialog is included in all VFX applications The displayed values come from an Include file which was created when the project was generated 2 3 Creating a Form with the VFX Form Wizard With the help of the VFX Form Wizard a new form based of a VFX Form class can be created and included into the project The most often used form class is the class CDataFormPage Eorm Name form1 scx Caption Select the VFX class your new form will be based on CDataFormPage Or select your own form class Press button gt m 2 4 VFX Data Environment Builder At next step in every VFX Form Builder is edited the data environment The tables or views used by the form are inserted into the dataenvironment Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 18 In dataenvironment can be added tables views or existing CursorAdapter classes and can be created new CursorAdapter classes By clicking on Add button you can add existing tables or views in the dataenvironment The VFP Add Table or View dialog is open When a cursor in the
9. 18 24 58 2 18 25 CDOWNLOAD 18 25 1 Macro language commands esee eee eene nnne 161 18 25 2 Example eS 162 18 26 CCREATEPDF CLASS 162 18 27 CEMAIL CLASS 162 18 28 APPLICATION UPDATE 163 18 29 TOOLBOX FOR DEVELOPERS ccccccccceesessssnsnsccceeececcceecesesenssnsaaeeeeeeseeeceeeeeeeeensnsaaeeeees 163 18 30 FURTHER DEVELOPMENT WITH 163 18 31 ERROR HANDLING eene 18 32 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 18 33 FURTHER ENHANCEMENTS FOR 8 969 165 19 DEVELOPMENT TECHNIQUES eere eese eee cete ette seen 166 191 ADDING FORM IN THE OPEN DIALOG 102 2 0000 nennen nennen rennen 166 20 BUILDERS AND VFX FEATURES 5 85 168 20 1 CURSORADAPTER WIZARD 168 20 2 UPSTZINGWIZARD ett p t e SR Eee 168 20 3 CLIENT DATABASE UPDATE cccccccccccccessessssssnssccceceeccceecesseessnnseeseeeeseseeeeeesesesessnssaaaeeeeeeeeeeees 168 21 RIBBON 169 21 1 NEW METHOD OF CRIBBONTBRTABMENU CLASS
10. Search dialog use grid columns use all fields 1 use fields from grid in all forn isse ER RA E Startup Application Behavior Application Behavior 2 Activation Error Handling Edit OLE Drag 8 Drop Grids Indexes Paths Misc Author Recreate temporary index files after editing V Display a wait window message while deleting temporary index files F Disable clearing indexes when editing data Disable clearing indexes when inserting records Disable clearing indexes when deleting records Filtered index will be used instead of filtering 0 Use form setting Startup Application Behavior Application Behavior 2 Actuation Eror Handling Edt OLE Drag amp Drop Grids indexes Paths misc Autor Database folder Database name VFP DBC Metadata folder data Update Name of metadata table Datadict Default import folder Current export folder Path to the external report files frx V Save Export files folder per user E Save settings for future use Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 52 Startup Application Behavior Application Behavior 2 Activation Error Handling Edit
11. 172 21 2 LOADADDITIVETABMENUES 22 0000100000000000000000000000000000000000 173 21 3 21 4 SMALL ENHANCEMENTS 955 05 i istexit beso oes desee se ieri e udi dee RE EH 175 21 5 FORM BUILDER SETTINGS T T eae eo ca mann 177 21 6 SAVE AS ER X REUSABILEITY sree i teer rt o ea Ne n D e eg us de genet 178 21 7 MENU DESIGNER NEW FUNCTIONALITY ALLOWED 180 21 8 CLASS CEMAILXLS ATTACHMENT 180 22 rm 22 1 DATA HANDLING 1 12 02 1 4600000000000000000010000000 22 2 CONCEPT OF NEW APPLICATIONS sms I REASONS RU A LA AE 22 2 1 Choosing the underlying class and class library 22 2 2 Choosing ene e spe ein SURE una E 22 3 DATA ACCESS WITH CURSORADAPTER 0402212 0000000000000000000 22 3 1 The class CBaseDaiaActess sii ce n stehe Ite ire dote ceo eae ike TS 22 4 MANAGING DATA ACCESS USING THE FILE CONFIG VFX ccce nennen neis 184 22 5 SWITCHING BETWEEN DBC AND SQL SERVER esses eere nnne nnne nennen 186 22 6 FORMS BASED ON VIEWS S eo es darte 22 7 MUTO ENT qued cp 22 8 UPDATING THE USER S DATABASE 22 8 1 VFP Databases usage 22 8 2 SQL Server Databas
12. 2 mn only once Login IP addresses list 0 Not used Use Mutex to prevent application running more than once Name offile used to check if Application is already running FX pplsRunning tit Language English x ckground buffer memory si 608 Run backdoor program Racks een 5305 Backdoor program name Foreground buffer memory size 8388608 Set window state on startup 2 Maximized z Save settings for future use Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 49 Startup Application Behavior Application Behavior 2 E Disable form resize Resize the font when form is sized Y Allow User Customization F Use desktop color as background for the main window Use active desktop Use Microsoft Agents Enable product activation Use Firstinstall bt file V Hide registration files Prompt for table F Close report dialog when finished Update client database Check for database update Inform the user when database update is started Show progress bar when database update run Do not execute update if only revision is changed Map character expressions to varchar type in queries IO 23 23 2
13. 23 9 1 Step 1 Install DB2 23 9 2 anna te E 195 239 3 196 23 10 SPECIFICS WHEN WORKING WITH DB2 UDB 1 1 2 00000002 0 000000000000 197 24 APPLICATION PROTECTION USING ACTIVATION 00440 198 24 1 DEIST OFUSED TERMS As ee ib NN Se 24 2 RESO ER US OS 24 3 DEFINING ACTIVATION RULES seta han 24 4 GENERATING ACTIVATION KEY 24 5 CVFXACTIVATION CLASS 2 01 204 25 CREATING MULTILINGUAL APPLICATIONS USING 206 25 1 LOCALIZING AT DESIGN TME Sa aTe 206 25 2 RUN TIME LOCALIZATION d e EEG ESSEN SEEN NEN Sec EE ERE TTE EUR AER 207 4 15 90 ee 208 26 1 PRODUGTACTIVATION ee 208 26 2 DATA BACKUP AND 208 26 3 SQL SERVER 26 4 INTERNET E MAIL AND SUPPORT FUNCTIONS ccccccecescscesescecessecscessecscsevarscesvassessvavscessacees 210 27 REMOTE SUPPORT 20
14. Portuguese When runtime localization is used a global object named goLocalize is created at run time when application starts This object has child properties corresponding to every message row in the table Vfxmsg dbf For every record in Vfxmsg dbf table is created a child property of the object goLocalize The name of the child property is generated from Message_ID prefixed with c For instance if the Message_ID in the table Vfxmsg dbf is CAP_APPLICATION_TITLE the correspondent property of localization object will be named goLocalize cCAP_APPLICATION_TITLE At run time the localization object and its properties are always available You can use goLocalize object properties every time you need The last used language is kept on a per user basis in the resource table Vfxres dbf Next time when same user logs in the application the last chosen language will be automatically selected Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 208 26 VFX fll The file VFX fll contains several functions needed for product activation data backup as well as for accessing SQL Server and for Internet access The VFX fll must be deployed along with the application files to the customers The functions of the VFX fll are described in details 26 1 Product activation GetAppRights IcRightsBin This Hex2Bin This cActPattern Provides information about user rights from the product activation An example for the implem
15. Customers Orders CA User Groups Order Orders CA Products Print rtikel CA Auftrage CA EX ategorien und Artikel CA ategorien und Artikel umschaltbar DBC SOL A Preview 22 e mail Fax Save As Export To x Y x Exit In the Start Form the File Menu is shown on the left site in the right site are loaded Last opened items Recent Items When the mouse pass over a menu items which is marked to have submenus the submenu is loaded over Recent Items as shown in the picture Page Setup Print E EA artikel CA Auftrage CA EX A Preview ategorien und Artikel CA 22 e mail ategorien und Artikel amp Fax umschaltbar DBC SOL S BMP Export To Exit The Ribbon Bar can be resized If the contents of the page is more wide as the screen a mover pictures are shown in the right left or both sides of the page These movers moves the contents to left or to right so it can be visible Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 170 0 Su Patbeaxee omnmeHx eoccoo st Venelinars Fantastic Pizzas In x Home Edit View Tools Help Additive Menu Tab English v User List Users Status 2 Database System Locks isi Print Screen Manage Config vfx Backup Cor User Groups Login Audit r Manage PickLists Modify Report Cus User Rights System Errors To
16. Parent overid Input Mask 999999999 __ Parent parentcode Format Status Bar Parent ID C Read Only C Use DBC Definitions Overwrite Font Form Name Enter the name of the new Form VFX Form Builder assigns a default form name following the common naming conventions beginning with frm Of course you can give your form any name but we recommend that you follow the common naming conventions Caption Enter the caption for your form While you type the caption you ll see it displayed in the form builder s caption If your form has a variable caption depending how the Form will be called don t worry too much about this caption just use a more or less descriptive caption in that case Page Count Enter how many Edit Pages your form will have For some forms one edit page will be enough If you have more fields you might want to spread them over multiple pages Depending on the number of pages you select you will see in the tab dialog on the form builder a Dialog simulating these Pages If you setup two Edit Pages two tabs will appear if you select three you will see three and so on Page Title Enter the caption for the edit page you currently selected If you want to enter the caption for the second Page you click the second page tab and you can enter the caption for it VFX Form Builder will instantly reflect your entry on the tab captions of the correspo
17. 18 16 The VFX Resource table VFX applications use a VFX Resource Table to store all information about forms the user has opened since the last initialization This information is used to set the size of the Form the Grid layout as well as the current Sort Order VFX applications do not use the Visual FoxPro resource table Foxuser dbf but use the free VFX Resource Table Vfxres dbf instead Here are the settings stored on a per user basis in the VFX Resource Table Setting Description Remark Position and size of the form Any layout changes applied to grids Actual sort order within a Data manipulation form The user sees the forms always appearing exactly the same way he closed it The user sees the grid of any form exactly the way he left it This applies to column width as well as position and does not depend of the type of column this works for calculated fields too The last sort order will always be restored automatically regardless whether an index tag exists or not If it does not exist VFX will Personal Form Setting Note that this also applies to the picklists the user called Personal Grid Settings Note that this applies also to the picklists the user called and in the advanced one to many form with multiple child grids VFX creates unique named Index Files in the temporary Windows folder and deletes them when the user closes the create it automatically form Note
18. Click on nextto proceed At first run of the wizard as language for the created application by default will be suggested the language of the used Visual FoxPro version On every subsequent run will be proposed the last used language After the Finish button is pressed the files from the empty VFX Sample application will be copied into the newly created project folder and compiled afterwards 3 Options The following options are general settings for your application You can modify these settings later using the VFX Application Builder Ask to save when close 4 Toolbar style CAppNavBar Enable autoedit mode Language German Enter on the grid means edit AutoFit grids on first load Enable hooks Enable product activation Use DBCX compliant products Use Firstinstall tt file Copy Loader exe to new project Click on next to proceed emn 2 2 Functionality of the new Application The application created with the Application Wizard can be tested immediately For this purpose the main program Vfxmain prg can be started directly from the project manager Alternatively also an App or an Exe file can be create and tested However usually this is not necessary during the development The application starts with a Splashscreen As picture for the Splashscreen is used a png file which can be easily edited or excha
19. D pede erant dens 226 30 6 5 Beispiel 30 7 STRTRANG ur i HR ERU NOB e E RIO 30 7 1 30 7 2 Parameler sodes re ERE ERE CEN TON Ti e E seda 226 30 7 3 R ckgabewert s s rero E OY Pepe Cerere RE e eT 227 SOTA LHATAM ZR EDT 227 30 555 nee ea EOM Stein 227 30 8 STRFILTER 227 30 81 Iota ette EUR e Oe 227 30 8 2 R ckg bewert 4 as see eR CARERE UE ERN CILE MEC ERE e Cede HS TAN 227 BOLE SS Parameter i isse d er Paderb teste d GERI tenta 227 30 84 227 30 85 57 228 30 9 GEF WORDCOUNT O een Nee uns 228 Seem dies 228 30 92 iu nes EON erinnere 228 30 9 3 R CkgdbeWertis 4 228 RUE MEN Una T AEE 228 30 9 5 Beispielziuiiiioshu deno qe E eo ite seb tents 228 30 10 GETWORDNUMI eiecit etn 228 30 10 1 SVAN th teas ie ient a e HER eerte 30 10 2 Parameter BERR BRE Rs aan 30 10 3 Riickgabewert
20. Select a date June 2003 pi 1 2 3 4 5 8 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 C Today 17 02 2005 18 13 2 cDatetime class Additionally there is the class cDatetime can be used for entering Datetime data type values Date 0247205 122 46 51 2 This class contains cPickDate control for date input All functions of the cPickDate control as for example the calendars or the hotkeys are available You can switch to 24 hours format by using SET HOURS TO 24 This setting can be made global for all forms in the function formsetup in Applfunc prg The control source of the class cDatetime is set in the property cControlSource The control source must be of Datetime data type 18 14 Report selection When for form must be printed different reports the class cRSelection offers a suitable selection dialog The available reports are read from tables It can be made difference between reports which are visible for all users and reports which are visible for particular user only An example how it can be used is in the form Reports scx in the demo application VFX90Test 18 15 The Microsoft Agents The agents are nice characters which loosen up the use of VFX applications In VFX80Test the form Agent scx shows a simple example for the possible usage Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 132
21. 21 5 Form Builder Settings Some specific settings which cannot be saved in form s properties are saved in the file VFXProjectSettings txt The file is located in the project s folder An example content of the file FORM BUILDER VERTICALSPACING 8 MINLABELWIDTH 100 FORM BUILDER Currently in the file are saved the settings VERTICALSPACING vertical spacing between controls MINLABELWIDTH minimal width of labels The values in the file are automatically replaced with the values from the form builder when the builder is run In order for the new settings to be applied when running the builder on an existing form it is necessary to select the checkbox Reorder elements Otherwise only the values are saved in the file but the controls are not rearranged Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 178 21 6 Save as FRX reusability A new functionality is added for report processing After the ability to save the automaticaly generated reports Save report as template file now it s possible to manage the created report files to modify the frx file add a caption and description assign them to all users group of users or a particular user delete a report For this purpose a new page is added in Grid Report dialog Templates where are listed all report files visible to the current logged users and for the current form If the user is of Admin level the buttons Edit and Delete
22. 9 8 1 Databinding of the TreeView control eese 9 8 2 Layout settings of the TreeView Control 9 9 VFX CTREEVIEWONETOMANY nennen nien enne nennen 9 9 Databinding of the TreeView control eese 9 9 2 Layout Settings of the TreeView Control 9 10 ENHANCEMENTS IN 85 4 222 4 0200000100000000000000000000000000000 9 11 VEXSEGRID BUIEDER nn prre i RIT RIEN TR 10 VEX BUILDERS AND WIZARDS FOR PICK 8 80 10 1 VFX CCHILDGRID BUILDER au oe in bte eoe b i aa 80 10 2 MEX S CPICKEIBED BU IEDER rtr er e TREE Use ha vans 81 10 3 VEX CPICKALTERNATE eene 85 10 4 VFX CPICKTEXTBOX BUILDER 10 5 VFX COMBO PICK LIST BUILDER 10 5 1 Pick list maintenance form 10 5 2 The class CComboPlicklist esses nete i aeda 90 11 VFX BUILDERS AND WIZARDS FOR LOCALIZATION 11 1 VFX LANGSETUP BUILDER 11 2 VFX PARENT CHILD BUILDER 11 2 1 Preparing the Parent Form 11 2 2 Preparing the Child Form eene nnne nennen 11 2 3 Settings VFX Parent Child Builder 11 3 V
23. Axes Properties Axis Visible Determines if axes are drawn Show tics on legend axis Determines if the legend axis axis2 will show tic marks on each legend Used for Bars Lines Area or Point charts Scale back lines type Determines the background lines scale type none horizontal lines vertical lines both lines Scale back bars type Determines the background scale type none horizontal bars vertical bars both bars Tic length Determines the length in pixels of the tic marks used in the scales and in the legend axis Used For Bars Lines Area or Point charts Line width Width in pixels of the GDI pen used to draw the background scale Line style Determines the Dash style of the GDI pen used to draw the background scale Solid Dash Dot DashDot DashDotDot Line color Determines the RGB value for the line Background scale color Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 142 Bar color Determines the RGB value for the Background scale bar color Axis color Determines the RGB value for the Axys main color Line ZERO color Determines the RGB value for the color of the line of the zero scale Lines and Bars Alpha Determines the transparency level of the chart background bars and lines Axis Alpha Determines the transparency for the Y and X axys and the background lines Show line ZERO Determines if the background line for the zero scale will be shown
24. 9 Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before 30 10 4 Tinwelsez uade i OI IS 30 10 5 Beispiel iscing a e e ED E EDEN Ce RH 30 TT GETAEDEWORDS nati em ta ree dit ni ie s 30 11 1 dac Beo RUPEE 30 11 2 Parameter aa used aC Obi ee 30 11 3 R ckg beWert sete tte me eme 30 11 4 Una 30 11 5 LIAE 30 12 BROPER Y iier 2 eene hers ED E e TERES 30 12 1 SYNIOK do deua doses 30 12 2 ree 30 12 3 R ckgabewert 30 12 4 Hinweisen EI IB 230 30 12 5 Beispiel 30 13 30 13 1 Syntax 30 13 2 POT INGLE EE 30 13 3 R ckgabeWerta 23i Ri n td asta 30 13 4 Beispiel 30 14 ROMANTOARAB Y 4 nete eO eren E nee RORIS 30 14 1 SVM AM as 2205 Fi te 30 14 2 Ee 30 14 3 30 14 4 EN 31 DOCUMENTATION ssssorsossssssnssossonsnnsonssnssonsnnsnnssnnsnnsnnsnnssnssnnsnnsansnnssnnsnnsnnsnnssnnsnnsnnssnssnnsnnee 232 31 1 SUPPORTA MS ee RS 232 32 AKTUALISIERUNG VON VEX 2ussssonsonssnssonsnnsnnsnnssnssnnsnnsnnssnnsnnsnnssnssnnsnnsnnsnnssnnsnnsnnsnns
25. NOTE The include files and the menu files must be checked manually Don t expect a German version if the include files are in English 18 33 Further enhancements for developers The VFX Builder is called when a Pageframe is selected Support of views and Cursoradapter classes by displaying the Audit Trails Support of all VFX classes in Builders As a separator in all VFX properties comma or semicolon can be used alternatively Additional new fields cins_time and cedt_time to the keep the last processing time If readonly property is set to tabstop is set to F automatically cpickfield builder the properties cfieldlist and cfieldtitle can be keyed up directly in a textbox in the Builder system tables can be optionally included in a SQL Sever database New builder for Audit Trail triggers generation Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 166 19 Development Techniques 19 1 Adding a form in the Open Dialog VFX gives you a template for an Open Dialog Of course you can adapt this dialog to your needs or provide your own dialog In addition to the Open Dialog Vfxfopen scx existing in former VFX versions in VFX 8 0 is available a new Open Dialog in Windows XP style Vfxxpopen scx This new Open Dialog in activated by default If you wish you can switch to the old Open Dialog using the property goProgram IxpOpenStyle Open x Simple P
26. VFX Data Environment Builder Aliases Indexes Initial Selected Alias caorders v Name Cursor Source Alias Order Filter Parent Alias ELSE ORDERS cades CaORDERDRORDERDETAlLS caorderdetals m Clicking on Add button will add existing table or view to data environment The VFP Add table or view dialog is invoked for choosing a table or a view When the cursor is based on a table or an index is defined for CursorAdapter cursor In the column Order you can choose from index tags of the table or defined indexes for the CursorAdapter cursor By clicking the button Add CA a CursorAdapter object based on existing class can be added Such class can be for instance a class for table in your database created with VFX CursorAdapter Wizard In the Open dialog you have to select needed class library and class The button New CA creates a new object based on cAppDataAccess class and starts the VFP CursorAdapter builder for keying up its settings If the cursor in data environment is based on a table in Order column you can choose from existing index tags that the table has already created If this is a cursor based on CursorAdapter class on Indexes page you can define index expressions Indexes will be created at un time after the cursor is created in its AfterCursosFill event To fill the Order column in page Aliases you can choose a value among this list of created index
27. 1 FLOAT q r FLOAT p FLOAT p REAL REAL DOUBLE DOUBLE DOUBLE PRECISION LOGICAL BIT CHAR 1 FOR BIT 0 or 1 DATA CHAR BINARY n BINARY m CHAR n FOR BIT 1 lt m 8000 DATA 1 lt n 254 VARBINARY k VARBINARY m VARCHAR n FOR 1 lt lt 8000 BIT DATA 1 lt n lt 32672 1 lt k lt 255 GENERAL IMAGE BLOB n if n 2 GB NTEXT DBCLOB n 0 lt n 2 GB SMALLDATETIME TIMESTAPMP Jan 1 0001 to Dec 31 9999 DATETIME DATETIME TIMESTAPMP Jan 1 0001 to Dec 31 9999 TIMESTAMP CHAR 8 FOR BIT DATA DATE DATE MM DD YYYY year 0001 to 9999 month 1 to 12 day 1 to 31 TIME HH24 MI SS hour 0 to 24 minutes 0 to 60 seconds 0 to 60 NCHAR m GRAPHIC n 1 lt m lt 4000 1 lt n lt 127 NVARCHAR m VARGRAPHIC n 1 lt m 4000 1 lt lt 16336 LONG VARGRAPHIC n 1 lt lt 16336 SMALLMONEY NUMERIC 10 4 CURRENCY MONEY NUMERIC 19 4 CHAR 32 UNIQUEIDENTIFIER CHAR 13 FOR BIT DATA 23 9 DB 2 Support Tests run with MS SQL Server 2005 and IBM UDB DB2 installed on the same machine 23 91 Step 1 Install DB2 DB2 UDB Express edition Custom Installation Select all available features Next Check Install DB2 Universal Database Express Edition on this computer checkbox Next Install path C Program Files IBM SQLLIB default Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 195 Selected l
28. 17 3 THE VEX POWER GRID 5 5 Ute e aede EH Av i eui dad 17 4 FORM BASED ON THE CLASS CTABLEFORM eene eene erre 17 5 FORM BASED ON THE CLASS CONETOMANYFORM 17 6 PRINTING 2 2 8 a RD o die t de 17 7 SENDING E MAIL E eed ie E ER LEE He Pe hb e ve bae 17 8 SENDING RAR Asa ate aci adeo dee t rei inne e ee e eC 17 9 FILTERING 17 10 LAYOUT ITA DOCKABLE POR MN eu dieto aa are nha eae see 17 12 TOOLBOX FOR END USERS 400000000 0 MUS EE OAERTN 17 14 17 15 17 16 18 FEATURES FOR 8 en oeste enano etes eene sesta sense esee eas s eese 00000000 125 18 1 SYSTEM SETTINGS IN OPTIONS DIALOG ccccccceessccessssscececesssecceessceeccesssseecsesssseeeessesseeeeeees 125 18 2 ACTIVE DESKTOP sits walsh cata tc Blass data abel E nd castis 125 18 3 MORE FUNCTIONS 225 OUR 125 18 4 MOVER DIALOG 55 aia lis ee erri bec rv 125 18 5 OLE CLASSES 18 6 DEBUG MODE 18 7 DELAYED INSTANTIATION essen eed 127 18 8 IMPORTANT VEX 8 1 127 18 89 15
29. Anzeige ABCDEFAbcCGHJAbcQWE select dbo STRTRAN abcDEFabcGHJabcQWE abc xYz 2 3 2 Anzeige abcDEFxyzGHJxyzQWE select dbo STRTRAN ABCDEFAbcCGHJAbCQWE Aab xyZ 2 1 3 Anzeige ABCDEFAbcCGHJAbcQWE select dbo STRTRAN ABCDEFAbcGHJabcQWE abc xYZ 1 3 3 Anzeige XYZDEFXyzGHJxyzQWE 30 8 STRFILTER Entfernt alle Buchstaben aus einer Zeichenkette ausgenommen den spezifizierten Zeichen 30 8 1 Syntax STRFILTER G cExpressionSearched cSearchExpression 30 8 2 R ckgabewert Nvarchar 4000 30 8 3 Parameter G cExpressionSearched Spezifiziert die Zeichenfolge die durchsucht werden soll G cSearchExpression Spezifiziert die Buchstaben die in cExpressionSearched erhalten bleiben sollen 30 8 4 Hinweise STRFILTER entfernt alle Buchstaben von cExpressionSearched die nicht in 9 cSearchExpression enthalten sind Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 228 Siehe auch CHRTRAN 30 8 5 Beispiel select dbo STRFILTER asdfghh5hh1jk6f3b7mn8m3m0m6 0123456789 Anzeige 516378306 select dbo STRFILTER ABCDABCDABCD Anzeige ABABAB 30 9 GETWORDCOUNT Z hlt die Anzahl der W rter in einer Zeichenfolge 30 9 1 Syntax GETWORDCOUNT cString cDelimiters 30 9 2 Parameter cString Gibt die Zeichenfolge an deren W rter gez hlt werden sollen G cDelimiters Gibt ein oder mehrere Zeichen an durch die Zeichengruppen in cSt
30. Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 232 31 Documentation Beside the user manual there is lots of on line documentation for VFX To this belongs in particular the technical reference which is available as Windows help file In it for each class library for each class are described each method and each property In a Tutorial are described the solutions with VFX based on typical developers questions Directly from the technical reference can be started videos Avi files There are 10 videos with approx 45 minutes duration altogether In the videos is described and shown the development of forms for Fileserver and Client Server databases A great assistance in the training for the VFX beginner 31 1 Support Support for VFX can be found in the dFPUG forum http forum dfpug de There are both a German and an English section for VFX Alternatively these sections can also be read and edited as newsgroup news news dfpug de Further information to the product can be found in the Internet on the Visual Extend website http www visualextend de From here it is also possible to download the demo application the entire documentation and the current full VFX version An extensive collection of further VFX documents is available in the document portal dFPUG http portal dfpug de Current information can be received from the free dFPUG eNewsletter in the VFX section http newsletter dfpug de V
31. s property nUserLevel is used If this has value of 0 the combo box is used for all user levels Otherwise it is used for user levels lower than its value and for user levels above it XP open dialog is used What will be started is determined on goProgram Start and goProgram RunForm for vfxopen vfxxpopen The combo is started by calling its EnableCombo method It is filled with data from VFXFOPEN table To open this table Load VFXFopen is used The combo box has two columns Only the first column is visible and it stores the display names of the forms as entered in the Title field in vfxfopen table The list is ordered by the values in field TbrCboSort The second column stores the command to be executed when the item is selected This is done by calling the combo s method ItemExecute It executes the command of the currently selected item ItemExecute is called only when an item in the combo is selected with the mouse 21 4 Small Enhancements Vfxxpopen and Vfxopen Vfxxpopen and Vfxopen dialogs use the function Load VFXFopen to open vfxfopen table according to current user level Postscript printer driver If the property goProgram lAlwayslnstallPSPrinter default F is set to the printer whose name is in goProgram PSPrinterTolnstall is installed when a PDF is created even if other PS printers are available The printer is installed if it hasn t already been installed DE Builder The ckeckbox Send Updates contr
32. s run time the table Vfxhelp dbf is available help texts can be entered in this table For this purpose the form Vfxhelp scx will be opened The actual help text can be entered into an editbox and will be saved into table Vfxhelp dbf With the VFX Help wizard from the data in the table Vfxhelp dbf completely automatically can be generated HTM files as well as a help project It is just necessary to compile this project with the Help Workshop and the CHM help file with context sensitive help for the entire application is ready When at run time the table Vfxhelp dbf is not available the usual context sensitive help system will be activated The CHM help file will be opened and the HelpContextID of the active control will be passed as parameter 13 6 VFX Project Update Wizard Projects created with previous VFX versions or with previous versions of VEX 11 0 can automatically be actualized to the newest version VFX Update Project Your project was built using VFX 9 00 2505 Your current VFX installation is version 9 00 2603 Do you want to update your project d vFx projectsivfpizza 2YFPizza 2 pjx If you select Yes a backup of your project will be made into a zip archive first If you select No your project will not be updated The VFX Project Update Wizard can be run from VFX 11 0 Menu using Project Update Project The VFX Project Update Wizard compares version of the opened project with the currently installed
33. 3 Vertical Top Right 4 Vertical Bottom Right 5 Horiz Top Left 6 Horiz Top Center 7 Horiz Top Right 8 Horiz Bottom Left 9 Horiz Bottom Center 10 Horiz Bottom Right Values in shapes Determines if the source values will be drawn inside the shapes of the chart Show Percentages Used for full stacked charts determines if the default Shape Legend and Tooltip text will be shown as Percentage instead of values Change color on mouse over Determines if a shape color will be changed when the mouse is passed over it Show Tooltips If true tips are shown when user moves the mouse over the chart shapes Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 138 Shadow Determines if a shadow will be drawn instead of the 3D depth efect Works for Bars Pie and Doughnut chart types The size of the shadow is determined by the Depth Report Name Select frx file which to be used when GDIGraph is printed Default value is vfxGDIGraph Logo file name Select a picture if you want a logo to be print in top left corner of the graph Default value is empty no logo printed Pie and Doughnut properties Donut Ratio Determines the width of the doughnut related to its size 0 01 full slice 0 99 thin Detach Pixels Determines the quantity of pixels that slices will detach from the center of the doughnut or pie Anticlockwise Determines the direction that the slices will be dr
34. 73 Plakken Z Bewerken Ctri E Nieuw CtrieN Kopieer Record a Wissen Ctrl D Zoeken Ctrl F Meer Visual Extend sovellus Tiedosto Muuta N yt Suosikit Ty kalut Ikkuna Ohje Visual Extend Applicatie Bestand Bewerken beeld Favorieten Extra Venster Help Kumoa Talleta Ctr S Leikkaa CtrleX L Kopioi Ctrl C 5 Lita Z Muuta a Uusi Ctri N Kopioi tieto a Poista Ctrl D y Etsi Ctrl F Muu F6 Features you like and use Be more productive than ever before with Visual Extend for Visual FoxPro Belona Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 24 4 Features 4 1 VFX Class Libraries You will find the class library files in the subfolder VFX90NLIB For a detailed description of all class library files including their classes properties and methods please refer to the VFX technical reference online help file The technical reference is a Windows help file 4 2 VFX Wizards and Builders All VFX Wizards and Builders are located in the VFX90 BUILDER folder Builder File Description VFX Menu VFX Wizards and Builders VFX LangSetup Builder VFX Messagebox Builder VFX Message Editor VFX Menu Designer VFX AFP Wizard VFXMNU APP VFXBLDR APP LANGBLDR APP MSGBLDR APP MSGEDIT APP VMD APP VFXAFPWIZARD APP Adds a special menu point i
35. CTRL N Copy Record 2 Delete Ctrl D 3 CTRL D YW Eind Ctrl F F CTRL F Other F6 Apym F6 French Greek Visual Extend Application Visual Extend Application Fichier Editer Aper u Favoris Outils Fen tre Aide Apxsio Enefepyacia EkBeor Napafupo BorjBeia Q fg Annuler les modifications Ctrl Z amp gt CTRL Z a E Enregistrer Ctri S El 27 01 CTRL S d Couper CtrleX d Amokomm CTRL X Copier Ctrl C CTRL C Coller B ETIK A NOTI CTRL Y Editer A CTRL E Nouveau CtrieN N o CTRL N Duplication des donn es E Av ypagr 51 Supprimer Ctrl D 2 Arpa CTRL D y Trouver Ctrl F F Avatfma CTRL F Acitoupyeiec Autres Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 23 Italian Visual Extend Application Czech Aplikace Visual Extend Upravit Pohled Obliben N stroje Okno File Modifica Mostra Favoriti Strumenti Finestre Aiuto Soubor Ctrl Z X D B e DE 229 CTRL Z Ctri S Ulozit CTRL S af Taglia Ctri X N yjmout CTRL X Copia Ctrl C Kop rovat CTRL C A Incolla Ctrl V Vlo it CTRL V Modifi
36. Contains eventually error message in case an error occurred Return Value Number of available SQL Servers GetSQLDataBases cServer cDBString cUser cPass cErrors Retrieves all databases on a SQL Server cServer Name of the SQL Server from where databases will be retrieved cDBString A string containing all available databases in comma separate format cUser Username used to login to the SQL Server cPass Password used to login to the SQL Server cErrors String containing eventually error message in case an error occurred Return Value 0 Operation completed successfully 26 4 Internet E Mail and Support functions URLDownload2File vcUrl cFileName cFeedBackFunction cCancelDownload Downloads a file from internet An example for implementation this of this function can be found in the class cDownload in the method download cUrl URL address from where the file should be downloaded cFileName File name or Full path name Here will be saved the downloaded file cFeedBackFunction Name of a function or a method which will be called from URLDownload2File for progress FeedBack The function or method must accept two parameters cFeedBackFunction nCurrentAmount nFileSize nCurrentAmount Amount of bytes already downloaded nFileSize Size of the downloaded file Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 211 cCancelDownload Name of a variable or property t
37. Height Value Legend Start Sweep ChartIndex RECNO ObjType AlphaChannel Determines the transparency level 255 Opaque 0 Transparent Apart from the modern visual effect applying transparencies may be very important specially for some cases when one piece of chart is drawn over another such as in Area or 3D bars AreaDrawBorders When true draws borders around each Area piece Applicable only to Area chart types Area3DTop When true a cover line will be drawn on the top of the 3D Area chart as shown below AxisAlpha 255 Opaque 0 Transparent Determines the transparency for the Y and X axys and the background lines Useful when the background contain colors AxisColor The RGB value for the Axys main color BackColor Specifies the main RGB color for the current chart For the case of a Gradient background this willl be the starting color for the gradient The destination color will be defined in the BackColor2 property BackColor2 Specifies the secondary RGB color for the background of the current chart This is the ending color for the gradient The starting color is defined by the BackColor property In order to switch to a solid color you can pass a FALSE value F BackColorAlpha Determines the transparency level of the background of the chart 255 Opaque default 0 Transparent This is useful when you need to have a big image as background for the whole chart BackGradien
38. an Type Message Other Last Update to 1 2001 12 12 57 v View VFX Define 9 Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 102 Click on the button Make Include File to create an include file in the language selected in the Pageframe The Include files are saved in a folder with the name of the respective language under the Include folder of your project After the creation of your Include files you must only copy these into the VVCLUDE file of your project as described in the chapter concerning the multilingual applications Tip You can mix your own constants with the predefined constants in the table Vfxmsg dbf Write your constant before or after the VFX Header and or Footer 13 3 VFX Class Switcher The Class Switcher has two functions If no form is open when it is called the Class Switcher changes the classes of forms in a whole project For example the form class cDataFormPageBar will be replaced by cDataFormPage This Allows easy to provide all forms with navigation buttons and or remove them again As particularly helpful this tools handles the actualization of existing VFX 3 Projekte In VFX 3 each form had a frame a with button at the lower edge In VFX 11 0 you can use instead a real toolbar VFX Base Class Switcher Project Directory Startup D WFXSTESTN Original Form Base Class CDataF ormPage New Form Base Class CD
39. es IDI C Aal 1258 SubrTitle a X Axis Caption Last three years graph Axis 2 Y Axis i Shape Legend Rotation angle 0 Scale Legend Rotation center 0 V Hide Legend when data is NULL Side Legend Legend Types Title the title of the chart that stays always at the top of the chart canvas SubTitle subtitle text that is drawn immediately below the Title ScaleLegend the text that is drawn to show the scale values besides the axis ShapeLegend the text that is drawn inside the chart shapes or over the lines for lines or area charts XAxis the main X axis text AxisLegend2 the secondary axis legend and is related to the property FieldAxis2 YAxis the main Y axis text SideLegend the text that stays in the side legends See below the 8 objects in a chart ScaleLegend Title ShapeLegend SubTitle SideLegend JAN free war Pi apr H may YAxis As 4 Ans Ya XAxis Legend Properties Font Name Specifies the name of the font used to display text FontSize Specifies the font size for text displayed FontBold Specifies if the text is bold Fontltalic Specifies if the text is italic FontUnderline Specifies the text is underlined Alignment Specifies the alignment of the text left center right Visual Extend 9 0
40. it is better to work with views The VFX processes work exactly in same way If the Child data originate from a view it is not necessary to pass the filter expression 11 2 3 Settings in VFX Parent Child Builder A Child form can be started by setting few properties in the OnMore method of a Parent form The key of the Parent form will be passed to the Child form In the Child form are visible only the data which correspond to the key of the Parent data record The visible scope in the Child form can be limited alternatively with a filter or a view By adjusting some properties in the OnSetChildData method in the Parent form the simple Child form becomes a Linked Child form That means that if in the Parent form the record pointers one moves the content in the Child form is automatically updated according to the current Parent key It is possible several Linked Child forms to be controlled at the same time by a particular Parent form Both the Parent form and the Child form can be of any VFX Form types It is possible an 1 n m relationship is to be realized by using a OneToMany form as Linked Child form There is a powerful new builder in VFX 11 0 that helps creating code for managing parent child relation between forms For easy handling the relationship code is used the new class cChildManager To start the VFX Parent Child Builder should be opened the parent form While the parent form is active the VFX Parent Child Bu
41. l uft der Prozess mit den Rechten des Benutzerkontos IWAM See the screenshot below for details the name of test computer is WIN2000 so IWAM account is IWAM_WIN2000 Action BIA pokey fecal setting Effective setting Everyone Users Po Everyone Users Po 35 as of serai pe WINZO00 Administr WINZOOONAdministr oe Tree Security Settings Account Policies Local Poles Act as part of the operating system e Local Effective Assigned To Policy Setting Policy Setting WIN2000 Administrator Select Users or Groups 21x Look in WIN2000 WIN2000 WIN2000 WIN2000 WIN2000 WIN2000 If domain level policy se test2 wIN2000 Administrators WIN2000 Check Names Deg i amp amp Modify Firmware environment cT ype names separated by semicolons or choose from list Re Profile single process Re Profile system performance 3 Remove computer from dockir Re Replace a process level token Rg Restore files and directories Ra 5 down the system RE Synchronize directory service RE Take ownership of files or oth Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 219 29 Wizard This Wizard generates a ready to run active AFP web pages from an existing VFX 11 0 forms An actual version of AFP Active FoxPro Pages can be found on http
42. version When the project is created with an older VFX version the developer is asked whether the project should be actualized After clicking Yes the wizard starts Upon this action a backup ZIP file of your project will be created The ZIP file is created in the project folder and is named as the project file If an archive file with this name already exists or cannot be created the wizard cancels its execution Project Update Wizard renews VFX class libraries VFX system report files and the procedure file Vfxfunc prg The table Vfxmsg dbf in the project is merged with latest Vfxmsg dbf table All include files are newly generated The structure of VFX tables is actualized Newly added fields and content are automatically added Missing files are added to the project automatically For example these are new bitmaps files or free VFX system tables With this the VFX Update Project Wizard completes its work and saves a lot of time the developers Generally the updated projects will be capable of run immediately with the new version 11 0 VFX However the developer should check the project carefully and when necessary make manual adjustments Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 105 The most applications have for instance a specific menu Vfxmenu The Update Project Wizard does not know which menu elements the developer removed Because of this the wizard cannot add new menu elements However the m
43. Application Wizard the applications will be generated based on your language settings in the Application Wizard screen If your application has to be translated to another language other than the one you are currently working on you will have to switch the ID Language constant Please refer to the chapter Create multilingual Applications using VFX for further details 11 2 VFX Parent Child Builder Although there is a special VFX Builder for the creating 1 n forms sometimes it is better to manipulate Child data in its own form That is in particular the case when you want to use the child form not only through the main form but also for direct manipulation In addition if you have many fields on the Child form it can be difficult to edit them in a 1 n form A special power of is the use of the Linked Child technology Thereby two forms are logically connected one to other One form serves as a Parent form Any VFX Form class can serve as Parent form Also the Child form can be based on any VFX Form class When moving the record pointer in the Parent form the content in the Child form will be automatically updated and the data records that correspond to the current Parent are displayed If the Child form is based on a table a filter is used in order to limit the visible data scope When the Child form is based on a view a REQUERY is performed if needed in order to display the desired data set Thereby the und
44. FieldAxis2 The name of the field that contains the text to be drawn in the axys opposite to the scale FieldColor The field name of the cursor that contains the RGB values of the custom colors for the chart Note that the field from the source cursor must be of Numeric Type FieldDetachSlice The field name of the cursor that contains the logical values that tell if the slice of the Pie or Doughnut chart will be detached or not Works only for Pies or Doughnut charts Pie or doughnut slices can also be detached interactively by clicking on them FieldHideSlice The field name of the cursor that contains the logical values that tell if the slice of the Pie or Doughnut chart will be hidden or not Works only for Pies or Doughnut charts FieldLegend The field name of the cursor that contains the character values that contain the main legends of the Pie Doughnut or Single bar horizontal or vertical charts Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 151 FieldXAxis The name of the field that contains the text to be drawn in the axys opposite to the scale FontName Specifies the name of the font used to display text in all the Legend objects available GradientInvertColors Determines if the gradient start and destination colors will be inverted GradientLevel When working in Gradient Brush mode property BrushType 2 determines the destination gradient color increasing the original col
45. LJ Courier New Print O Print Portrait Preview Landscape e mail O Fax v Page number not on first page Save As Date v Time Before printing the user can eliminate undesired columns from the columns list The width of the columns corresponds to the width of the columns in the Grid Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 116 Grid Report Options Advanced Deselect All Select All Select Summarize Parent ID Description Date Checked Yalue Ins Date Ins Usr Edt Date Edt Usr S S S S S S S SI S 11 0 supports several possibilities to save the 9 0 report output in files Generated reports can now be saved in several new formats The supported formats are PDF HTML XML TIFF and BMP These file types can also be used to create an attachment and e mail the report In Grid report dialog when E mail or Save As option is chosen the type of generated file is selected from a Combobox among all available export formats Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 117 Grid Report Options Advanced Title Font Delayed Courier New v Times New Roma Details Title Font Details Font Times New Roma Courier New Print
46. LOB AE 7 4 USER 5 7 5 ERROR TRACKING 7 6 ERROR HANDLING SYSTEM LOCKS ER un ne teen me eU petere te eterne teet 4 8 OPTIONS uite ee ee eoe eben elite eire Ue pea CU e ob ee tad 1 9 gt ABOUT DIALOG ei beste a eie tibt ah Maile 8 VFX BUILDERS AND WIZARDS FOR PROJECTS 2u2s20000000enenenenenenennsnenenenenenenenenenenennsnnns 48 81 VEX APPLICATION BUILDER nn genial t eden etre tee 48 9 VFX BUILDERS AND WIZARDS FOR FORMS ucssssenessssenenesnensssenensnsenensnnensnsnnensnsnnensssnnnenee 54 91 VFX FORM WIZARD 9 2 VFX FORM BUILDER 9 3 VFX DATAENVIRONMENT BUILDER 54 9 4 VFX CDATAFORMPAGE 2 anne as deve a en abet eges nie 56 9 4 1 Edit Pages sec eee es 9 4 2 Grid BOIA REENE ree DOR T 9 4 3 Form Options 9 4 4 View R rameters 22 c e RE net eI enden 9 4 5 Linked Tables o e e eee mess ine 9 4 6 9 4 7 DRED OM M 9 5 VFX CTABLEFORM BUILDER 2 224 20 2 4 00 00000000000000000000 9 6 VFX CONETOMANY BUILDER E eet ne 9 7 VFX CONETOMANYPAGEFRAME BUILDER 9 8 VFX CTREEVIEWFORM
47. Phone 030 0074321 If for a form the property lAutoedit is set to true that is the default value all control members on the form are always active The user can select an element with the mouse or the keyboard and can immediately start editing data As soon as data are interactively changed the form switches automatically into Edit mode On the list Page in VFX forms is placed a Grid By default in all columns of the Grid can be searched incremental For this purpose just set the focus into the desired column With the first typed letter or digit the sorting sequence will be changed on this column If necessary a temporary index is created automatically The column header is marked by up or down arrow similar to the Windows Explorer By default the size of VFX forms can be changed by the user at run time Thereby the size of all controls changes proportionally Within Grids the size of the control is not changed by default When a form is increased more lines and columns become visible in the Grid All settings on forms will be saved on a per user basis If the user opens the form again the form will appear at the same position of the screen and with the same size as it was last closed In addition the settings of the Grids column width column sequence and sort order are saved Usually VFX forms have a private data session and can be opened several times without problems Through a property of the form Multiinstance multiple ins
48. Print Portrait O Preview O Landscape e mail OFax Page number not on first page Save As Date Time If the desired format is TIFF or BMP a group of subsequently numbered files is generated For every page in the report is created a separate file File names are generated using the file name chosen by the user and a numeric value representing page number 17 7 Sending E Mail file formats that can be exported as a report output can also be sent as an e mail attachment In E Mail details dialog can be entered recipients CC recipients BCC recipients list and a text for e mail body The visibility of BCC Textbox is controlled by goProgram lUseBCCReceipients When this property is set to T it is possible to enter BCC recipients list Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 118 gt E mail details Recipient Subject Delayed Message text Delayed v For every recipients list user can invoke the E mail contacts dialog to select a list of e mail addresses saved in the Outlook Address book The dialog is called from the ellipsis button next to every recipients list field E mail Contacts Displayname E mail Address LE Select Deselect All Invert selection After clicking OK all addresses selected in E mail contacts form are passed back into correspondent recipients li
49. Select this option when the Stonefield Database Toolkit will be used with the generated VFX application Copy Loader exe to new project Loader exe will be used for application update on customer side through internet Choose this option when you would like to customize the Loader project especially for your application Toolbar style Select which toolbar Style Class you want to use CAppNavBar includes the record navigation and other editing related buttons in the main toolbar CAppToolbar does not include buttons for record navigation and not all editing buttons Language Select the desired language for your new project On selection of a language for generated application VFX checks the current Unicode settings of the operation system When characters of chosen language cannot be displayed correctly with current settings a warning message is displayed VFX Application Wizard The chosen language is different than your default language You could not see all characters correct AutoFit grids on first load When this option is selected the value of the property nUseAutofit of the Application object is set to 1 This means that by initializing of grids the Autofit event is called Enable product activation Checking this option sets the Application Class property UseActivation to T which defines that the application will require product activation Use Firstinstall txt file Checking this option sets the Applic
50. The activation information will be stored on the user s PC into an INI file The name of the INI file is defined by the property cINIFileName of the class cVFXAcvtivation Appl vcx The default value is VFX ini The developer can choose whether the simple application protection will be used or additionally the file FirstInstall txt will be used that will be used at first start of the application The name of this file is defined in the property cFirstInstall of the class Appl vcx The default value is FirstInstall txt Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 200 If the file FirstInstall txt will be used it must be deployed along with the applications installation files The installation application must store this file in the Windows folder and the activation object will erase this file when the application is started for first time At this time the installation date will be stored into the INI file Later on every application start the INI file will be checked if the stored installation date is available When the date is missing and if the file FirstInstall txt is also missing the object assumes that the installation is not valid and the application will be terminated When the file FirstInstall txt is not used the INI file will be created in case it is missing The installation date can be specified in two ways Either the System date time will be used or creation date time of a
51. User Manual More productive than ever before Page 141 ForeColor Specifies the foreground color used to display text ForeColorAlpha Specifies the transparency alpha channel of the text 0 transparent 255 opaque BackColor Specifies the background color BackColorAlpha Specifies the transparency alpha channel of the background for the current object 0 transparent 255 opaque Caption Specifies the text that will be shown Can be set only for Title SubTitle XAxis and Y Axis For the other controls this is ignored because the text is determined during the chart creation Rotation angle Specifies the rotation of the text 0 360 The point of rotation is determined by the alignment property Rotation center Specifies the rotation of the text 0 360 The point of rotation is at the center of the string Hide legend when data is NULL Specifies if legend will be hidden when data is NULL At 4 page Axes properties can be set VFX GDI Graph Builder EJ Data Style Legends Axes Colors Background Scales Margins Quality V Axis Visible Ticlength 5555 Line color 0000000 ML u 128 lt 7 Show Tics on legend axis Line width 2 Bar color 192 192 192 0 NO Background lines Line style 1 Axis color 128 128 128 Axis Alpha 200 lt 0 Background bars Line ZERO color 255 000 000 V Show Line Zero Jemen
52. VFP Object List called with the right mouse while in a code window 4 4 Other Developer Tools In addition to the well known Builders existing in former VFX versions in VFX 11 0 are available new Power Builders for following Classes CTreeViewForm CTreeViewOneToMany CPickAlternate CPickAlterTextbox For further usage on disposal are new and enhanced wizards Define Activation Rules Sets System specific parameters which will be used for Product activation as well as possible User rights Create Activation Key Creates an Activation key based on a customers Installation key Customer List Managing customers data and customers activation key Manage Application Updates Managing online product actualization Metadata Wizard For creation and actualization SQL Server Databases at customer side Manage Config vfx Managing data access Cursor Adapter Wizard Automatically generates of CursorAdapter classes for all tables of a database Audit Trigger Wizard Creates triggers for auditing changes for selected tables Manage Vfxsys dbf Managing the table Vfxsys dbf with partial encrypted content VFX AFP Wizard Generates AFP Web pages from VFX Forms Update Project Wizard Actualizing existing VFX projects to the actual build or the actual version Project Documenting Generates technical documentation in HTML Format Project Toolbox Adds classes of the active project to Toolbox Parent Child
53. VFP Project to the VEX 11 0 Task Pane Rebuild Rebuilds all files in the project selected in the VFX 11 0 Task Pane After rebuild the Project will be opened for edition Properties Opens the VFX Project Properties for the project selected in the VFX 11 0 Task Pane Project Backup Creates a Zip file for selected Project Delete Deletes the project which is selected in the VEX 11 0 Task Pane Delete Removes the selected Project from 11 0 Task Pane There are two new features in the VEX 11 0 Task Pane With a single mouse click can be created a backup copy of a project in a ZIP file By clicking on dt icon the backup will be started If the project is open at this moment it will be closed when backup start Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 27 5 Installation 5 1 Hardware and Software Requirements Since VFX is an extension to the Microsoft Visual FoxPro 9 0 Development System you need a Hard and Software Environment under which you can run Visual FoxPro 9 0 Please refer to the Visual FoxPro Hardware and Software Requirements for further information 5 2 The VFX Installation Run the setup program called VFX90Setup exe and follow the instructions on the screen Make sure to install VFX 11 0 with the installation program we provide into a new folder Do not install VFX 11 0 in the same folder as earlier VFX versions After the installation of VFX you will have the following fo
54. VFX supports the VFP Toolbox for developers When a project is open VFX libraries used in this project are added to the toolbox 18 30 Further development with VFP The entire 8 0 project is based on normal source code At any time the created application can be developed further with even when on the developer s computer VFX is not installed Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 164 18 31 Error handling In VFX 11 0 is implemented an enhanced handling of run time errors Now the customer can send rum time log to the developer by e mail The customer is informed about the contents of the error report Sending the error report as an e mail to the developer is the fastest way to localize and remove problems in the application The E mail address of the developer is assigned to the property goProgram csupportemail The value of this property can be changed with the VFX Application Builder 18 32 Troubleshooting Guide Error cap application title not found The include files could not be found Make sure that the current directory is the directory of the project you are working with Tip Try this in the command window CD Shut down restart set directory to your application directory open project select rebuild all and run If you included your own include files make sure to recompile your source program before you rebuild your project Hint Select the option Properti
55. Yearly sales statistic cLabelField CategoryName cLegendTitles Average sale price Maximal sale price Minimal sale price In the property cLabelField should be entered the name of the fields containing text description In property cLegendTitles are listed texts which need to be used as a legend for data series The sequence of texts must be same as fields sequence in the cursor Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 136 Now calling the DrawGraph method the following graph is drawn Edit Business Graph Data Business Graph Commandi PRINT Choose Graph Type 2D LINE Draw Business Graph Yearly sales statistic 300 EE ERE ERR ERE ERR RUE USE 200 150 Average sale price Maximal sale price 100 50 Minimal sale price 0 Condiments Confections Dairy Products Grains Gereals 18 21 VFX GDI Graph Builder This builder helps developer to set properties of cGDIGraph and cGDIGraphCustom classes The builder is organized in 7 pages At first one Data properties can be set VFX GDI Graph Builder Data Style Legends axes Colors Background Scales Margins Quality Source Alias gdigraph Charts Count 3 03 2 Field Field Value Legend Shape Color Legend Field legend X Hide Slice Field Name hide_slice
56. action is allowed and 0 when the action is not allowed To define a rights in the wizard first must be marked the checkbox in the first column Then a name for the right should be entered At run time the application will create a property of the SecurityRights object with this name Because of this the names should conform to VFP rules for variables naming NOTE Application rights are specific for every different application The rights that are already defined cannot be used for another application When similar rights will be used they have to be defined again The application rights are saved in the table Vfxapprights dbf in the project folder 24 4 Generating an Activation key 11 0 applications can be protected against unauthorized usage with an Activation key This Activation key holds information for the application whether the user is allowed to perform a particular action For every action must be chosen correspondent user right Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 203 VEX Customers List Vfpizza FirstName Last Name e mail Installation Key Activation Key Company Street In the form Registered Customers can be added and deleted customers data For every user is kept the installation key and granted user rights so it is possible easy and fast to create and resend activation key when necessary Create activation key button invokes the well known VFX Create
57. appropriate delimiter depending on database engine type 20 3 Client database update Now the table Datadict holds structure information in SQL Server specific format In order to support DB 2 it will be necessary in Metadata wizard to add functionality to gather structure information in DB 2 specific format and in application to add functionality to apply DB 2 structure information toward DB 2 database Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 169 21 Ribbon Bar To use Ribbon bar is needed to set cFoxApp nMenuAndToolbar 2 and Rebuild the project The Ribbon Bar shows the Main Menu Main Tollbar and Opem Form in a view similar to Office 2007 toolbars BREeP AS Am SX BEI RRBA AXERBBSODO Venelinars Fantastic Pizzas m Home Edit View Tools Help Additive Menu Tab Z2 English Kunden Artikel Kunden CA Artikel CA Auftrage CA EX Auftrage Auftrage CA Kategorien und Artikel CA Kategorien Kategorien CA Kategorien und Artikel nur DBC umschaltbar DBC SQL The Open form is loaded as first Home page The Groups are shown as different containers The main Menus are shown as different pages The File menu is loaded in Start Form which is opened from big circle button Main button The main toolbar is loaded as quickbar on the left side of the Application caption x 00089909 9 Page Setup Recent Items Y
58. are provided along with Save report as template file 22 Products Assignment Caption Description File name All Products green The caption is in green color DYVFXTESTPROJECTSt Users ADMIN Products red caption is in red D AVFXTESTPROJECTSY Products violet Caption is violet D WFXTESTPROJECTSY Product orange Caption is in Orange DAVFXTESTPROJECTSY Product brown Caption is brown D WFXTESTPROJECTS Save report as template file The Click of Save report as template file generates a new frx file and show Open dialog to enter a file name for FRX If pressing CTRL V a default name will be paste in File name control Look in VFPizza100 occ m 2 DdArchive products report frx Os rmap My Recent pata Documents 9 Desktop PROGRAM RESISTERDLL REPORT C REPORTPROCESSING Caso text My Documents My Computer File name My Network Files of type Report After a file name is given a template dialog is open Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 179 Products PMargh All DaB8E2B 5 8 AXPR00900 Grid Report PSalam Options Advanced Templates Assignment Cag Product Users ADMIN Product Assignment Template dialog File name DAVFXTESTPROJECTS
59. autosave grid position and layout The user can select the desired record by e doubleclicking e pressing ENTER e selecting the OK command button If the user wants to edit the table which is behind this picklist he can click the command button Edit and the data manipulation form for this table will be called When the user need to add a new record he clicks the New button 10 3 VFX CPickAlternate Builder Similar to the cPickField control the cPickAlternate class can be used for validating user input against a table as well as to provide the call of a pick list dialog where the user can pick a value When using the class Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 86 cPickAlternate the primary key of the chosen PickList record will be stores into the correspondent field in the main table while the user will see the value of another field of the PickList table Use the cPickAlternate control rather than a Combobox Control whenever the choice will be made from a table with lots of records It is also suitable when if you want to give the user the ability to enter a value that does not correspondent to the primary key of the Picklist table The purpose of the class is to provide the end user with an easy to use interface that allows well known values to be entered instead of program generated primary keys The user fills this logical key value and it is used to navigate to the correspondent record in
60. be placed many Pages Thus the Pageframe must also be closed at the end The beginning code is in the record pageframe then comes the record page all elements contained in it like textboxes or labels and now the code must end with Page end and Pageframe end which contain closing code Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 221 In case of pageframe this is lt div id lt lt cname gt gt class pageframe style position relative width lt lt nwidth gt gt px height lt lt nheight gt gt px z index lt lt nlevel gt gt left lt lt nleft gt gt px top lt lt ntop gt gt px gt And in pageframe_end is also this lt div gt In this way will be processed with every object every class If a class is not filled the base class is automatically searched and is pulled up Thereby is organized a little object oriented hierarchy Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 222 30 Transact SQL by Igor Nikiforov Die folgenden User Defined Transact SQL Zeichenfolgenfunktionen wurden freundlicherweise von Igor Nikiforov zur Verfiigung gestellt und werden mit VFX geliefert 30 1 AT Gibt die numerische Anfangsposition zur ck an der ein Zeichenausdruck zum ersten Mal in einem anderen Zeichenausdruck vorkommt und zwar vom u ersten linken Zeichen aus gerechnet 30 1 1 Syntax AT cSearchExpression cExpressionSearched nOccurrence 30 1 2 P
61. brought by Gdi 0 solid 1 Dash 2 Dot 3 DashDot 4 DashDotDot ScaleBackLinesType Determines the background lines scale type where 0 none horizontal lines 2 vertical lines 3 both ScaleBackLinesWidth Width in pixels of the GDI pen used to draw the background scale ScaleDivider Specifies the value that the scales must be divided Useful when the values are very big and scales values could be reduced to provide an easier comprehension of the chart ScaleLineColor The RGB value for the line Background scale color ScaleLineZeroColor The RGB value for the color of the line of the zero scale SelectedShapeColor Determines the RGB color that the shape under the mouse will be drawn if the property ChangeColorOnMouse is TRUE Shadow Determines if a shadow will be drawn instead of the 3d depth efect Works for Bars Pie and Doughnut chart types The size of the shadow is determined by the Depth property ShapeMousePointer Specifies the shape of the mouse pointer when you move the mouse over a particular shape of the chart at run time Use this property to indicate changes in functionality as the mouse pointer passes over shapes of the chart The default value is 15 Hand ShapeLegendExpression Specifies an expression that replaces the default ShapeLegend text Allows full customization of the text to be drawn inside the chart shapes Add any VFP valid expression to determine the text As
62. by the correspondent column If there is no existing index for the column a temporary index will be created by VFX automatically When it is necessary to expand search for additional column press Ctrl key and meanwhile click on other column header The consecutive sorting order is displayed in the headers trough numbers in parentheses Customer EIER Data List Customer ID First Name Last Name Organization Name Address McClain Green Inc 16 Park Street hs hs hs A double click on the column header sorts the column The next double click toggles the sort order After clicking in a column can be started entering of a search string The sort order will be set on this column and entered string will be searched incremental The entered string will be displayed in the status bar Search Martin Using the VFX CGrid Builder you can define for which columns you want to have the Incremental Search capability enabled This allows your user simply to type characters numbers or even date while in any column and VFX automatically sorts data by this column and positions the record pointer on the first match During the Incremental Search the searched item is displayed in the status bar and corrections can easily be made using the Backspace key VFX shows the current sort order in the grid column header The developer can choose among the following types of visualization e visualization e Underlining the caption e Visualization
63. document IMPORTANT Do not work directly in this project It is NOT foreseen for direct use Use the VFX Application wizard in order to create a new project Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 28 5 3 Registration and activation of VFX 11 0 As previous VFX versions VFX 11 0 is secured with product activation The VFX 11 0 activation is accomplished through a Web service The advantage is that the activation key is sent directly to the developer s PC and manual operations for entering the key are avoided VFX 11 0 has a software copy protection After VFX 11 0 installation at first start of one of VFX builders or the VFX menu a register dialog is invoked Please fill in all required fields and click on the button Register Online Through the internet your personal data will be passed to a web service of VFX Internet Registration Server You will receive back from the web service an activation key which will be saved on the hard disk of your computer The activation key is valid for 30 days During this time period you can test full VFX functionally In case the activation is not possible through the web service you can order an activation key on the website http www visualextend com Then you will receive the activation key sent by e mail When you use VFX 11 0 with a 30 days trial key the remaining number of days will be shown in a dialog By clicking on Buy VFX button the V
64. including Autologon Feature User Security including Form Level Security View Edit Insert and Delete restrictions Database Tools for Packing Reindexing and Repairing of local Tables Complete run time Error Tracking System About Dialog User friendly Mover Dialogs for easy selection of multiple elements Automatic Synchronization with Windows System colors Favorites Menu XP Style open dialog Optional Active Desktop Single Click User Interface Auto Report feature for automatic creation of printed reports based on data in a grid Report Selection and manipulation interface Multi Data support including run time switch between different databases Automated Client Site Update for tables structure updates for VFP and SQL Server Databases Optional Audit Trail Feature for data manipulation tracking Optional Microsoft Agent assisted user interface Automatic Printscreen feature Possibility to create multilingual Applications 3 3 Key Features for developers Software Developers using Visual Extend will appreciate the following features Application Wizard for the automatic generation of new Applications in the language of your choice After just a few seconds your distribution ready Visual FoxPro Application is prepared Fully reentrance of all VFX Builders Form Builder OneToMany Form Builder Table Form Builder Grid Builder Child Grid Builder and PickTextbox Builder which makes it easy to make changes on already crea
65. menu items to the new method In onSelectItem method can be used cItemKey properties of menu items to identify the elements This is som xample code which adds a menu tab of the type V BK HEHEIEsSssxGB amp omeux upooo s Venelinars Fantastic Pizzas EEE Home Edit View Tools Help Additive Menu Tab English v 25 Message A Wait window W Message B Displays D in message box CTRL D Wait window X Message C Messages Wait Windows Appl vcx cAppRibbonTbrTabMenu Add a method LoadAdditiveTabMenues The code LoadAdditiveTabMenues An example for additive tab menues lcTabDescription lt Additive Menu Tab Adds a menu tab with Caption lcTabDescription HotKey loMenu goProgram oMenuBar cntTabMenu AddMenuItem lcTabDescription A lcKeyLabel ALT A Adds the control in aKeyExprs array This array is used from ProcessHotKey method and envoke the Click event of tab when lcKeyLabel ALT A is pressed This cntTabMenu AddItemToKeyExprsArray loMenu lcKeyLabel LoMenu cmdMenultem ToolTipText This is an example of User tab Index number of ne tab InTabIndex This cntTabMenu pgfPopups PageCount Adds the first popup group loPopupl goProgram oMenuBar cntTabMenu AddPopup Messages lnTabIndex Determine the number of columns in the first popup loPopupl nColumns 2 Deretmine the width of popup The columns in the popup has the sam
66. method already contains a template code which can be easily changed Here is created an array containing parameters passed to the called VFXMore form where in a dialog can be selected between the available functions For example can be started Child forms 18 4 Mover Dialog The VFX Mover dialog is an efficient control which you can use in your applications The VFX Mover dialog gets two arrays passed as parameters The first array contains elements available for selection These elements are displayed in the left list box The second array contains the selected elements The second array can be emptied with a call from the mover dialog The user can select any number of elements Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 126 Select the Child s Available Selected Child 54 Child 12 koko Child 56 Child 128 1 Child 66 Child 129 Child 67 Child 15 Child 78 Child 19aa Child 82 Child 28 Child 30 Child 32 v Here is an example code for the usage of the VFX Moverdialog controls in practice LOCAL laSource 1 1 loMover prepare the array of all available items SELECT keygrp_id keygrp_name FROM keygrp INTO ARRAY laSource create the mover object based on the VFX Class CMoverDialog LoMover CREATEOBJECT CMoverDialog set the caption LloMover Caption CAP KEYFIELDGEN set the property which defines which column from the array get s displayed loMover cntMover n
67. not required to deploy AutoComplete table with the developed application This table will be created by VFP automatically when necessary AutoComplete The value for AutoComplete property The AutoComplete function is available for textbox controls only Read only When a particular control will be used only for displaying information mark this checkbox When redesigning existing forms the new button CJ Move or Copy Fields is very useful It would help you a lot if a page has to be moved or list was built on the wrong page by accident or even if grid list is similar to edit field list or vice versa All the settings would not have to be keyed up again which is very important in case of mistakes or maintenance Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 59 In Fields list can be selected all desired fields In the dialog Move or Copy Fields should be selected destination page Type of the destination page is chosen From the Move Selected Fields To drop down list Destination page type can be Edit page Grid page or Report fields page After you select type of destination page the list In Page shows all existing pages of chosen type VFX CDataFormPage Builder Form Name Caption frmParentDocs ParentDocs Edit Pages Grid Page Form Options Vie Move or Copy Page Count Page Title Page Move Selected Fields To 2 Pagel Grid Page Reorder elements Right
68. of the control Bottom Margin Determines the bottom margin left without any drawing in the GDIGraph control It is a blank space in pixels left in the bottom side of the control Left Margin Determines the left margin left without any drawing in the GDIGraph control It is a blank space in pixels in the left side of the control Right Margin Determines the right margin left without any drawing in the GDIGraph control It is a blank space in pixels left in the right side of the control Show Scales Determines if the scale in the Axis will be shown Scale Value Scale Min Value Determines the lowest value that will be displayed on the vertical axis If automatically calculated this value will always be lower than all the values in the chart To set it to automatic MinScale calculation just set this property to the logical False F Scale Max Value Determines the highest value that will be displayed on the vertical axis If automatically calculated this value will always be higher than all the values in the chart To let GDIGraph calculate automatically the value for the highest scale pass the logical value F false Scale Divider Determines the value that the scales must be divided Useful when the values are very big and scales values could be reduced to provide an easier comprehension of the chart Horizontal bars per legend Determines which of the tick marks on the vertical axis show legends A
69. particular file will be used If the creation date time of a file will be used the name of this file should be stored in the property cRegFileName of the class cVFXActivation 24 3 Defining Activation Rules The VFX Define Activation Rules dialog is started from the VFX menu Activation Define Activation Rules VFX Define Activation Rules MAIN PJX Security Key Rights Existing pattern myApplication System Specific Value Expression Additional Data SEN Cara nummer vincam v Cancel When you start the Define Activation Rules Wizard for the first time for a particular project you are asked whether you want to create a new rule for this project VFX New Pattern Pattern Name myApplication On the Page Security key of the wizard is placed a Dropdown combo that you can use to change the rule for the current active project In the grid under it can be added as many rows as needed Using all rows in the Grid a key will be generated and stored into the property cActPattern of the class cVfxActivation Based on this key at the user side application determines which system specific values must be used to generate the Installation key The Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 201 Installation key ensures that the application will run only on the computer for which the Activation key is created In the first colum
70. possible afterwards to switch between a DBC and a SQL Server database very easily Let s assume we have developed an application that uses a DBC as a datasource By the development we have ensured data access everywhere in the application occurs only through CursorAdapter classes Now a customer would like to run this application with a SQL Server database For this purpose first it is needed to port the VFP database onto SQL Server We can do this using the VFP Upsizing wizard but also other tools such as xCase for example are suitable for this task For the access to the SQL server database can be provided a DSN However this also brings a security risk because the DSN can be manipulated It is more secure in the file Config vfx to be chosen a connecting string for the data access Thereby connection information is independent of other settings at operating system level and keeps all information about the data access saved within the application The SQL Server database is installed on the server of the customers The finished application is delivered with an empty Config vfx file In this way the Manage Config vfx dialog for keying up the datasources is automatically invoked by the application start at the customer s side The connection to the SQL Server installed by the customer can be defined with user s name and password and it can be edited within the application 22 6 Forms based on views While the development of VFX great attentio
71. right arrow of the last pad in menu bar Thus can be added a popup You can add new bar in the popup By clicking on the down arrow at the bottom of the popup A menu bar or menu pad can be deleted when element has the focus Use Menu option Delete or press Ctrl Del to delete current element Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 108 Some properties of the elements can be set visually right arrow check mark text right rs P rE IN mover rom mover icon key text Pad element Bar element Prompt text Prompt text could be set for each element directly in design panel when the focus is on the respective element In the settings panel Prompt text box is used only for information which is the active element in the design panel Key text The key text is used to show the user the Hot key or key combination for the element It should correspond to the Hot key or key combination chosen in the lower part of the VMD options panel and is displayed in the menu at run time to help users choosing relevant keys Check mark In order the menu element to behave as a Checkbox it is necessary to set the property AutoMark When in addition you mark the element by CheckMark property the element will appear initially marked when the menu is loaded For Menu element which behaves like a Checkbox you can write specific code that will be executed when the respective menu bar autom
72. searched only in the caption of the top level forms IResultOnError With this parameter is controlled the behavior of the script in case the form is not found within the given timeout period If the existence of that form is significant for further execution then when timeout occurs execution should be stopped In this case the value of IResultOnError has to be F If the execution of the script can continue regardless of the fact that window did not appeared the passed value should be T SearchedString String that will be searched within form s captions W nTimeOut IPartial lTopLevelForm IResultByError SearchedString Waits until the window than contains searched string in its title is closed nTimeOut Timeout in seconds When expected form does not close within it a timeout error is generated IPartial when the value of this parameter is T it is enough to find searched string as a part of a window s caption When the value of the parameter is F this sets that the window s caption must match exact searched string ITopLevelForm When the value of this parameter is T the string is searched only in the caption of the top level forms IResultOnError With this parameter is controlled the behavior of the script in case the form is not found within the given timeout period If the existence of that form is significant for further execution then when timeout occurs execution should be
73. that this applies also to the picklists the user called Position and state of the form toolbar If you have form specific toolbars the user sees them always at the same position and docking state they left If the user decides not to work with the form specific toolbar and close it the Toolbar will not appear again until the user reactivates it through the View Toolbars Menu Option Form Toolbar Hide You can reset this VFX Resource File by clicking the Clear Resource command button from the user list form described earlier This will delete all entries from the VFX Resource File 18 17 The Include Files Since include files play an important role in VFX Application Development let s take a look what types of Include Files VFX uses Include File Included by Language Content Description specific FoxPro h VFX H No Standard FoxPro Definitions FoxPro_Reporting h VFX H No Reporting constants for in VFP ReportListeners h VFX H No Constants for the VFP ReportListener class ReportListeners_Loc h VFX H Yes Localized texts for the VFP ReportListener class UserDef h VFX H No Language independent Constants used in your own Application UserMsg h VFX H Yes Language Specific Text for messages used in your own Application Optionally generated by the VFX message editor when type MESSAGE has been selected UserTxt h VFX H Yes Language Specific Text for the about dialog captions and Tooltiptext used in your o
74. the PickList table When the searched record is found the primary key value will be passed back to the cPickAlternate control and will be used to update the related data in the main table This class is based on cPickField class and inherits all of its properties and methods In addition to them it has a new property cControlSourcelnternalKey where you have to specify the name of the field in the main table where will be stored the foreign key value This foreign key correspondent to the primary key in the PickList table With the VFX CPickAlternate Builder you can easy set all necessary properties of the class VFX CPickAlternate Builder Pick Alternate Update Work on View Options Pick Dialog Caption Maintenence Form Pick Table Name Pick Table Index Tag Parent parcode CPickAlternate txtField Control ource CPickAlternate t tDesc ControlS ource Parentl parentcode Parentl descr Return Field Name Code Use STR for Num Fields Return Field Name Description trans parentCode descr L Return Field Name Internal Key Control Source Internal Key parentid Parent overid Format Input Mask Status Bar Test 1 Pick Table Name Here can be chosen the name of one of the tables from the Dataenvironment Pick Table Index Tag This is the name of the Index tag that will be used for search in the Picklist table This index key corresponds to the value ente
75. the RGB value of the starting color of the gradient background BackColor2 Numeric the RGB value of the ending color of the gradient background GradientMode Numeric 1 to 4 the gradient type to be applied to the buttons ReduceColorLevel Numeric automatically sets the destination color of the gradient backColor2 ranging from 0 no change to 100 white If left to F then no change is applied and the original value of BackColor2 is used UpdateTabColor Logical changes tab colors in page frames automatically even when Themes is set Default value is T Methods Draw Repaints a Form object Start Starts manually the gradient background when property AutoStart F Update tnGradMode Updates background Called automatically if some of the properties BackColorl BackColorl GradientMode ReduceColorLevel is changed Backgrounds can be set for the application and separately for a single forms or pages Form settings overwrites global settings New properties are added in cFoxApp to control the backgrounds of all forms and pages in the application Also available in Application Properties Wizard Properties nBackColorl RGB value of the starting color of the gradient background of all forms and form s pageframes Used if nGradientMode 0 nBackColor2 RGB value of the destination color of the gradient background of all forms and form s pageframes Used if nGradientMode 0 nGradientMode Gradient mode used for
76. the list 1 will become the first element then follows 2 etc The Ordering will be used on each page This field is used when the Open Dialog Vfxxpopen scx is used For this purpose the property goprogram Ixpopenstyle must be set to T This field contains a group caption The grouping takes place according to the entries in field ObjectID The GroupCap must be entered only for the first entry of a group Enter the title which appears in the list window Enter a description text which will be shown when the user selects this entry Enter the names of the called forms If you want to pass parameters to the form you can enter them here The user level which is required to run the form for example 1 Admin 2 Head user 3 Common user etc The user level which is required in order to be able to add new data records in the form The user level which is required in order to be able to edit the data records The user level which is required in order to be able to delete data records on this form This form can be added to the Favorites menu The Primary key used to manage the Favorites menu Description for entry in the Favorites menu Access right for AFP forms Example PAGEI Contacts Customers Address list ADRE 1 only administrators can run this form 1 only administrators can add new data records 1 only administrators can edit the data records 1 only administrators can delete data records T
77. to use during compositing 0 Default quality QualityTextRenderingHint Specifies the quality of text rendering 18 22 cGDIGraph and cGDIGraphCustom New classes for graphs Similar to cBuisenessGraph but much more flexible and nice looking Main advantages of new class Create good looking and modern charts in pure e Explore the power of colors using solid gradient and hatch brushes Transparencies 3D effects Animations detach any pie or doughnut slice on mouse click change colors on mouse over Tooltips Control mouse events allowing full mouse behavior customization NO ActiveX components Easy to setup Benefit from all the GdiPlusX drawing capabilities allowing developer to modify the charts the way they like using VFX GDI Graph Builder Easy to customize allowing users to modify the charts the way they like cGDIGraph custom class provided Easy to print save as PDF send as e mail copy to clipboard Different chart types Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 145 3D Pie Chart using Gradient custom colors Slice is detached percent drawn in shapes 3D Doughnut Chart using Gradient custom colors Tooltip displayed color is changed on Mouse over Full Stacked Bars Charts Cylynder bars Points Chart Different shapes is used values shown in shapes Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More product
78. tree structure When a field name is used the developer can allow the end user to edit the description text directly into the TreeView control This also depends of the AllowNodeRename property If AllowNodeRename is set to T the user can edit labels in the TreeView control and this will automatically update the corresponding data field in the main table AllowNodeRename This property defines if the user is allowed to edit description text in the TreeView control Editing the description in the TreeView control is allowed only when the Node Text is based on single table field The content of the corresponding data field will be automatically be updated according new description entered in the TreeView control 9 9 2 Layout Settings of the TreeView Control These settings are correspondent to the TreeView ActiveX control Style 0 tvwStyleText Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 78 1 tvwStylePictureText 2 tvwStylePlusMinusText tvwStylePlusMinusPictureText 4 tvwStyleLinesText 5 tvwStyleLinesPictureText 6 tvwStyleLinesPlusMinusText 7 tvwStyleLinesPlusMinusPictureText Appearance 0 ccFlat 1 cc3D Border Style 0 ccNone 1 ccFixedSingle Indentation This property sets the width of the indentation of nodes in the TreeView control 9 10 Enhancements in OneToMany Forms There are several improvements in cOneToMany and cTreeviewOneToMany form classes comparing with forme
79. user is not currently logged in Users Status Logged User IP Address Last Login 02 1 4 05 03 18 08 192 168 190 1 02 1 7105 01 59 25 At Depending of where VFX system tables reside this feature uses different approach to identify if user is really active now or for some reasons his connection had broken and login attempt is to re enter the system but not to login simultaneously twice When DBF tables are used the record for the user is locked all the time while he is logged in the system In case of broken connection or another emergency exit record lock is automatically released and when user attempt to login next time this action is not threat as multiple login When VFX tables reside in a SQL Server database the system process Id is used to identify logged user The active SPID is kept in vfxusr table On a login attempt is checked if the user is already logged in and if that process is still active In case of active process and if multiple login is disabled by the developer user is not allowed to log in the application 7 4 User Groups Along with former possibilities to define user rights VFX 11 0 offers a new way to manage user access to application s modules using User Groups A particular user can be member of one or more user groups For user groups can be defined access rights When the user is member of more than group rights which every one of these groups permits are combined and the user are grant
80. using different colors Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 114 e Visualization through and down arrow similar to the Windows Explorer 17 4 Form based on the class cTableForm In the forms based on the class cTableForm the search grid and other controls are placed next to each other or one under another in a container A typical cTableForm based form is the Administration of the user rights User Rights Viewlevel Insertlevel Copylevel Editlevel Deletelevel Printlevel Parent child Item item OneToMany oneto OneToMany 2 oneto2 Parent Tree parenttree One to Tree onetotree Parent Documents parentdocs Business Graph BUSINESSGR Parent2 parent2 Delayed delayed Audit Trail audit Parent parent 17 5 Form based on the class cOneToManyForm y Paget List ETE 1 Ins Date 10 15 199 Description Parent 10r maybe there should be an Ins Usr ADd Date 0671112003 EdtDate 12 06 200 V Checked Edt Usr Child ID Description Value Item ID Description 54 Child 54 3 Item 3 56 Child 55 3 Item 3 66 Child 55 999 999 67 Child 67 999 999 78 Child 78 8 Item 8 The operations on the master table are identical to the standard data manipulation form The toolbar and the Menu Edit apply to the master table Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productiv
81. v 2007 207 M Detach Slice Field Name detach E y Color Field Name color v Data properties Source Alias Select name of the alias containing fields which will be used to create the chart All cursors from DE are listed Axis2 Field Name Select field name which contains the text to be drawn in the axys opposite to the scale Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 137 Legend Field Name Select field name which contains the character values to be used as main legends of the Pie Doughnut or Single bar horizontal or vertical charts Hide Slice Field Name Select field name which contains the logical values that tell if the slice of the Pie or Doughnut chart will be hidden or not Detach Slice Field Name Select field name that contains the logical values that tell if the slice of the Pie or Doughnut chart will be detached or not Color Field Name Select field name of the cursor that contains the values of the custom colors for the chart Charts Count The number of Value sources ChartsCount will receive the quantity of columns of data in your cursor Changed when a row is add or delete in the grid At least one row is needed The grid allows to set data which will be used to create Fields collection of GDIGraph object All properties of Fields collection can be set FieldValue Legend ShowValuesOnShape Shape Color At second
82. valid 7 5 Error tracking VFX tracks all runtime errors automatically The error log file in which all the runtime errors will be stored is the free table Vfxlog dbf cdx The data manipulation form based on the class CDataFormPage will be prepared automatically from the VFX Application Wizard Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 45 y System Errors List Type Error Variable 203 is not found Delete All The administrator can clear this list by selecting the command button called Delete NOTE For additional information please refer to the VFX Technical Documentation 7 6 Error handling In VFX 11 0 is implemented an extended error handling In addition to creating an error log it is now possible for end user to send an error report e mail to the developer When in the error message dialog user selects Abort the error report dialog is invoked informing the user what is included in generated report Sending an error report to the developer is the fastest way to localize and eliminate problems in the application The e mail is sent to the e mail address set in the property of goProgram cSupportEmail The value of this property can be set using VFX Application Builder 7 7 System Locks In heavily used multi user applications a message like Record is in use by another user might simply not be enough VFX offers a System Locks table for such
83. which fields need to be summarized You can predefine this selection here in Report fields page For every field should be entered width input mask and a header text If former VFX behavior should be kept and use in reports same fields which are included in the search grid just mark the Use Grid Fields for Report checkbox OK Click this command button if you want to generate your form This will take some seconds and the result is a Form on which you have the desired amount of edit pages with the selected fields on each page If you selected more fields than would fit on a page two columns will be created The form build process can be run more than once this feature is called reentrance Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 67 NOTE The reentrance feature is only available at 100 for forms created with the VFX 8 0 form builder For a maximum of reentrance guarantee it s best to use the Form Builder whenever you want to add a new field to your form Another great advantage of the reentrance is the fact that you can reapply changes you made within the database container i e captions format or input mask options by just calling the form builder again and selecting the checkbox Use DBC Definitions Start your application locate in Open dialog your newly created form and start it with a mouse click Test the form and evaluate where it can be enhanced To become more famili
84. with only few input fields Here is a sample of a form based on the class cTableForm Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 68 User Profile Customer ID First Name la First Name Robert Last Name McClain city Ney York Country USA 9 6 VEX COneToMany Builder The One To Many form is an evolution of the standard VFX data manipulation form This means that you can have on one single form a full featured standard data manipulation form functionality together with a grid showing the child records for the currently selected parent record VFX allows you also to have multiple children to one Parent in a tab dialog If you have many input Fields for a child table you can also have a multi page tab dialog for the child data This allows you to cover a lot of scenarios without the need of real programming you need to understand if you create one to many forms is the database design and through which Fields the Parent and Child Tables are linked Let s look at a simple example As described earlier in this document you have to setup the database container of your application Define your tables fields and indexes as well as the field captions This allows the VFX builders to use this information so you don t have to retype the same captions again In order to create a one to many form you must be familiar with the basics of database design and es
85. www afpages de At the moment the Wizard supports only forms which work with DBF tables CursorAdapters classes will be supported in a future version The Wizard works with forms based on one of the VFX form classes cDataFormPage or cTableForm Further form classes VFX will be supported in a later version At the first start of the Wizards the used Metadata table Vfxafpmeta dbf is created in folder C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data dFPUG Visual ExtendM 1 0 The default suggested output path for the generated AFP pages is obtained from the Registry HKLM SOFTWARE Microsoft InetStp Select the folder of the root of your web at o borders M neo eee Choose here the local web path in which the files should be saved On every run of the Wizards it is automatically checked if additional required files exist When needed these are automatically created The folders are vfxafpstyle for stylesheets vfxafpimage for the pictures and vfxafpjs for the Javascript which is currently used in the Grids Now the Wizard appears t VFX AFP Wizard Inputfile C VFXAFPTESTIFORMICUSTOMER SCX Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 220 Pick up the VFX form and click on Build Note The latest used form will be selected automatically The login dialog is invoked exactly like as you had start the application The AFP pages a
86. you have a field called Test in the Vfxsys dbf table In that case will be created a property named Test which will pick up the value from the field Test from table Vfxsys dbf In case of changing value of this property by closing of Options dialog this value will be saved back into the field Test in Vfxsys dbf Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 47 In this way it is easy to store and retrieve application specific settings Try it out 7 9 About Dialog VFX Application Wizard creates an about dialog which inherits the class cAboutDialog Select the about dialog under the menu option Help About Visual Extend Application Version Copyright dFPUG c o ISYS GmbH Trademark Information This productis licensed to JEIO1 JEI Varna View the end user license agreement j System Info To customize this About Dialog VFX offers you the possibility to make the changes in the Include File Usertxt h define CAP_APPLICATION_TITLE VFX 11 00 Build 0000 Test Application define CAP_LBLCOPYRIGHTINFORMATION Copyright dFPUG c o ISYS GmbH define CAP_LBLTHISPRODUCTISLICENSEDTO This product is licensed to define CAP_LBLTRADEMARKINFORMATION Trademark Information define CAP_LBLVERSION Version define CAP_LBLYOURAPPLICATIONNAME VFX Test Application NOTE When you make changes in this include file you must open and save or compile the form vfxabout scx before starting your
87. you like a ready Template code can be generated in the form from the VFX Form builder Depending on the application only few values of this method need to be adapted from the developer Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 128 Main Other Customer Form1 Organization Customer Keep open In the OnMore method at run time will be shown a Dialog where the user can select the Child form that will be called Onpostinsert This method is called immediately after adding a new data record before the user to receive the opportunity for data manipulation Here can also be filled default values in the fields This method also gives you possibility to assign primary key values Onrecordmove Each time when the record pointer is moved this method is called Here can be shown or updated values which do not originate from the database 18 8 2 Methods of the Application object OnPreStart In this method can be written code that will be executed when the Start method is called OnPostStart In this method can be written code that will be executed after the call of Start method 18 9 VFX primary key generation It is possible you not want to show the primary key of some tables to the users But for a correct database design you want to use a primary key For this and similar situations VFX offers a function which makes possible generation of primary keys and oper
88. 0 4 1 Syntax OCCURS cSearchExpression cExpressionSearched OCCURS2 cSearchExpression cExpressionSearched 30 4 2 Parameter cSearchExpression Gibt einen Zeichenausdruck an den OCCURS in cExpressionSearched sucht cExpressionSearched Gibt den Zeichenausdruck an in dem OCCURS nach cSearchExpression sucht 30 4 3 R ckgabewert Smallint 30 4 4 Hinweise OCCURS gibt 0 Null zur ck wenn cSearchExpression nicht in cExpressionSearched gefunden wird OCCURS einschlie lich Deckungen select dbo OCCURS ABCA ABCABCABCA Anzeige 3 1 Auftreten ABCA BCABCA 2 Auftreten ABC ABCA BCA 3 Auftreten OCCURS2 ausschlie lich der Deckungen select dbo OCCURS2 ABCA ABCABCABCA Anzeige 2 1 Auftreten ABCA BCABCA 2 Auftreten ABCABC ABCA Siehe auch ATO RATO OCCURS2 30 4 5 Beispiel 1 declare gcString nvarchar 4000 select gcString Blut ist ein ganz besondrer Saft Faust I Vers 1740 Mephistopheles select dbo OCCURS a gcString Anzeige 3 select dbo OCCURSC gcString Anzeige 1 30 4 6 Beispiel 2 Z hlt das Auftreten verschiedener Buchstaben aus der Zeichenkette gcCaracters der Zeichenkette gcString Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 225 declare gcString nvarchar 4000 gcCaracters nvarchar 256 i smallint counter smallint select i 1 counter 0 select gcStrin
89. 2014 40 21 001 4 4 4 00 0 0100 000160001000100 0 0 000010 000041010000 04800 0000 0 000 0444 213 27 1 HOW DOES THE REMOTE 1 2224 12022 200001000000000000000000000000000000 04 213 27 2 PREREQUISITIES 27 3 SUBDOMAIN REGISTRATION u a ann ann nn 213 27 4 THE REMOTE SUPPORT APPLICATION 214 27 5 THE REMOTE CONTROL FROM THE POINT SUPPORTERS eene nnns 214 28 COM SERVER H 216 28 1 DIE COM SERVER KLASSE pnr RUE Pe eee rtt eR 216 28 112 Methoden s S e RE REI iie AUR 216 28 2 SECURTLY Ae pe REN et sb e I MORTE NU at 217 20 2 TEXeCUle NEN RUN UI OR EU UD ABSIONOIMNRqUEEE 217 26 2 3 Impersonation hostiam ee rra ead tte i Tee et een aen 217 29 VEX AFP WIZARD ssssossossssssnssnssnssnssnnssnssnssnnsnnsnnssnnsnnsnnsnnssnssnnsnnsnnssnnsnnsnnsnnsnnssnssnnssnsnnssnnee 219 29 1 VEXAFPMET A DBE DESCRIPTION a P RE ash siemens 220 nnn 222 Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 8 30 1 e LS 222 SOTO UR CRURA DOR EPI 222 30 12 Parameter a usos diameter ut 222 30 1 3
90. 3 9 9 3 53 53 53 E31 S OLE Drag amp Drop Grids Indexes Paths Misc Author Copy data into a backup folder before a client site data update Highly recommended Save settings for future use Use themes Show NTLogon Field XPOpenDialog total slideout time Save login history for Users Keep IP addresses of currently logged users Interval for XP Dialog auto hide Save form layout resolution dependent Application timeout min Allow updates Show debug menu in IDE mode Application termination message timeout sec Ask before close application Interval of timer for refreshing cursors Use Speedbar Use application timeout Format of Config vix 0 XML default Cul OREO Enable child insert 0 use form setting Enable command console Auto hide XP open dialog Show if filter is active in form s caption 0 Use form settings Use VirFilter table Automatically call PickDialog 0 Use control settings Fill edt_date for new records Use GUID fields After picking move focus to the next field 0 Use control settings Form can be opened multiple times 0 use form setting Startup Application Behavior Application Behavior 2 activation
91. 3 Options The following options are general settings for your application You can modify these settings later using the VFX Application Builder Ask to save when close V Toolbar style CAppNavBar Enable autoedit mode V Language German Enter on the grid means edit AutoFit grids on first load Enable hooks Enable product activation Use DBCX compliant products Use Firstinstall tf file _ v en Loader exe to new project Click on nextto proceed lt Back Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 33 Ask to save when close Checking this option sets the Application Class property nAsktoSave to 1 which defines how VFX behaves when a user closes a form or moves to another record after having made changes to the current record Enable autoedit mode Checking this option sets the Application Class property nAutoEditmode to 1 which defines that the user can start anytime to make changes without the need to change to the edit mode before any editing can occur Enter on the grid means edit Checking this option sets the Application Class property nEnterIsEditInGrid to 1 which defines that the Enter key while in the data grid changes to the Edit mode Enable hooks Checking this option sets the Application Class property nEnableHook to 1 which defines that the hooks should be activated Use DBCX compliant products
92. 3 Step 3 Using the IBM MTK migration tool kit v 1 4 5 NOT wizard to transfer aDB from SQL2005 to DB2 Express Edition http www 306 ibm com software data db2 migration mtk 1 Project management dialog Proj name lt enter MTK project name gt Source db type Microsoft SQL Server Target db type DB2 UDB 8 2 for linux UNIX Windows 2 Specify source page Press Extract JDBC ODBC DSN alias lt enter name of ODBC DSN for SQL2005 server gt UserID lt userid for the SQL2005 server gt Password lt password for the SQL2005 server gt Press OK Extract dialog Check the DB from SQL2005 to be extracted lt Enter script file name gt Press Extract 3 Convert page Press Convert 4 Generate Data Transfer Scripts page Press Generate Scripts 5 to target page DB2 database name enter name for the db in DB2 less or equal to 8 chars db2 Select Use a local database option and mark Re create checkbox Enter User ID and Password for the Db2 server sa ibm SA 0123456789 Mark Extract and store data on this system checkbox Mark Load data to target database using generated scripts checkbox Press Deploy And here is the connection string to connect to DB 2 database DRIVER IBM DB2 ODBC DRIVER UID sa ibm PWD SA_0123456789 DBALIAS A_DB2 Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 197 23 10 Specifics when working with DB2 UDB GetSQLServers and GetSQLDatabases func
93. 3 52 VFX100TEST PJX Vix100test C UWE VFX100DEMOS VFX100TEST 10 11 2008 11 39 26 VFPIZZA PJX Vfpizza C UWE VFX100DEMOS VFPIZZA100 10 11 2008 11 37 50 VSS PJX Vss C UWE DFPUG 200811FRANKFURT V VFX1 VSS 09 21 2008 12 14 26 Visual Extend 11 0 pi Visual Extend Visual FoxPro Framework VisualExtend de Newsgroup Articles Listing Forum eNewsletter Options Visual Extend dFPUG ISYS GmbH Frankfurter Str 21 b D 61476 Kronberg Germany vix dfpug de In the 8 0 Task Pane is placed a useful tool the Application Manager Information about all projects is stored in a table Through the Application Manager can be opened a project The path is set automatically into the project folder In addition through VFX Application Manager can be performed Rebuild all By this the project will be completely compiled Changes in Include files are taken into account 2 1 3 VFX Application Wizard A new application will be created with the VFX Application Wizard Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 14 1 With this wizard you create a new VFX project Master VFX home folder C VFX VFX110 Usually you don t need to modify this path New Project Enter the name ofthe new projectfile VFX Application 1 Enter the name ofthe EE _ new projects folder C uwe VFX Application1 Database name DATABASE DBC
94. 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 38 7 1 7 Help Menu Debug Contents gt Search for help Remote Control Application Update About The help menu lets you search the help index of the help file 7 1 8 Standard Office Like Toolbar VFX Applications have a standard toolbar on which you can easily put your own application specific toolbar buttons This way the users will have user friendly way to access the functionality that your application offers The VFX toolbar is displayed in Hot Tracking Layout kariz SAeaX SEB tl English New Record Ctrl N Inserts a new data record Copy Record Currently selected data row will be copied into a new data row Open Ctrl O Opens the Open Dialog at the left side of the screen Save Record Ctrl S Saves changes in the active form E Mail Sends an E Mail containing the report from the active form as attachment Print Ctrl P Prints a report or a list from the active form Print Preview Shows print preview for a report or a list from the active form Fax Sends a fax from the report output of the active form Cut Ctrl X Removes the selection and puts it into the clipboard Copy Ctrl C Copies the selection into the clipboard Paste Ctrl V Inserts the content of the Clipboard Undo Ctrl Z Reverts the changes made in the active form More Function F6 Opens the window with M
95. 9 Hide controls when table is empty 1 Enabled v Date format BRITISH Autoedit mode 2 Force to f unl Dont hide list page while editing 0 means use form property Idonthidelistpage Allow save empty records 0 Use form settings Save without transaction 0 Use form setting Use memo form 0 Use control setting 7 231 E S Useris allowed to send BCC E Mail Move the focus to the next object on Enter key for cCheckBox Refresh all pages before the form valid event on Save Allow to delete child data even if the deletion of parent records is not allowed Startup Application Behavior Application Behavior 2 Activation Error Handling Edt OLE Drag amp Drop Grids Indexes Paths Misc Author Name of the field in any table to be automatically used to store the user who inserted this record the user who last modified this record the date when this record has been inserted the last edit date the time when this record has been inserted the last edit time the date when this record has been modified the time when this record has been modified check sum value for the record the deletion status ofthe record the readonly status ofthe record Specifies the source table name for Auto Complete data INS USR EDT USR INS DATE EDT DA
96. 99 by default is established between the customer s PC and the supporter s PC VFX uses exclusive IP connections established over the Internet For IP connections within a LANs the remote control program Radmin can be easily configured by hand In order to use remote control the customer s computer must be connected to Internet The IP address must be accessible through Internet The port 4899 which is used by Radmin should not be blocked by a firewall The advantage of Radmin is that no installation on the customer s PC is required Only two files are used on the customer computer for running Radmin R_Server exe Admdll dll This file R_Server exe can be placed in any folder To initiate the remote control the customer s computer has to establish an internet connection Usually when dial up connection is used a dynamic IP address is assigned to the customer s computer Hence this IP address is not known to the supporter For this the VFX application registers the actual IP address of the customer s PC as a subdomain of DynDNS Thus the Supporter can connect to the customer s PC via the Internet using the subdomain name 27 2 Prerequisities The developer should prepare the VFX application for remote control Therefore for the support of the developed application must be registered a subdomain in DynDNS The registration is free of charge The encrypted registration information is stored in the VFX application in the table V
97. ATION OF VFX 11 0 2 00040400001 28 5 4 SETUP THE VISUAL FOXPRO ENVIRONMENT FOR 1 4 4200 20 40000 00 28 6 GENERATE A NEW APPLICATION USING THE VFX APPLICATION WIZARD 30 OBIBCIIVES usto REA Tul ierit 30 6 22 PREPARATION een nn D DA Lee ce EESTI 30 6 3 THE VFX APPLICATION WIZARD 30 6 45 GENERATE THE PROJECT Rennens DR TR ROUEN TRA ERR 34 7 DISCUSSION OF THE GENERATED VFX APPLICATION ecce ee eee eee eene eee 0000000 35 7 1 OFFICE COMPATIBLE USER INTERFACE 35 7 1 1 Elle Menu uer do out re se tete EG E He oe E D 35 7 1 2 Edit Menus sss usse audae EE eR 36 7 1 3 View Meni E 36 7 1 4 Favorites Menu ssec ivi tt petiolo eerte TDi 37 Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 4 Zelia Tools Menu s te SS ao BRE I SUR OR DESI 7 1 6 Windows Menu m Reate 7 1 7 Help MEnil aote te en aussi AEE ette 7 1 8 Standard Office Like Toolbar cesses 7 1 9 Final words about Office Compatibility 3 2 DATABASE TOOLS N rn I M ONE GERE OG REIR TESI 73 USER LIST EB anna Oey Nagel sete eevee 7 3 1 Currently
98. Builder Managing relations between Parent and Child forms VMD Visual Extend Menu Designer Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 26 4 5 VFX 11 0 Task Pane The VFX Application Manager is integrated into the Task Pane Task Pane Manager VFX 11 0 Felle vrx11 0 A VFX Community fa start 98 Community 5 Environment Manager Solution Samples 2 Refresh Options 2 Help Visual Extend 11 0 tpe a tad Tx Project Description Folder Modified VFX100TRADERS PJX V amp i00traders C UWE VFX100DEMOS VFX100TRADERS 10 11 2008 11 43 52 VFX100TEST PJX Vix100test C UWE VFX100DEMOS VFX100TEST 10 11 2008 11 39 26 VFPIZZA PIX Vfpizza C UWE VFX100DEMOS VFPIZZA100 10 11 2008 11 37 50 VSS PJX Vss C UWE DFPUG 200811FRANKFURT V VFX1 VSS 09 21 2008 12 14 26 d Visual Extend 11 0 Home Visual Extend Visual FoxPro Framework VisualExtend de T Newsgroup 4 Articles Listing Forum eNewsletter Options Visual Extend dFPUG c o ISYS GmbH Frankfurter Str 21 b D 61476 Kronberg Germany vfx dfpug de The following functions are available through buttons on the toolbar New Project Starts the Application Wizard Open Project Opens VFP Project und sets current path to the project folder Modify Project Opens the project selected in the VFX 11 0 Task Pane and sets current path to the project folder Add Project Adds an existing
99. ColToView 2 enable multiple selections LloMover cntMover lstSource MultiSelect T pass the array of all available items here you can also pass a second parameter if you want to define which elements from the array must appear as already selected LoMover cntMover SetData laSource show the mover dialog Show Result The Public Array _gaMoverList contains the selected items use it and release this Public Array after you have done After the creation of the object loMover you have the complete control over it and you can change all desired properties and methods NOTE In order to obtain a detailed technical description of the VFX Class Libraries including all properties and methods please read in the VFX technical reference 18 5 OLE Classes It is possible to use OLE automation for Word Excel Outlook and PowerPoint from VFX applications The most important functions are available in classes 18 6 Debug Mode Through setting a constant the application can be started in Debug mode In Debug mode is available an additional menu with which assistance the debugger can be started at any time In addition the debuggers can be started by one right click with the mouse on a form Also the data environment window is opened VFX uses a constant in VFX h include file which defines whether your application runs in debug mode or not By default the following code is placed in the Vf
100. FX Cursor Adapter Wizard APPLICATION 8 PJX Class Library applicationsilibiappl vck Parent Class Name cappdataaccess Destination Class Library cluwelwh applicationsilibiappl vck Replace existing classes Use connection settings in wizard only Click on next to proceed If the option Generate SQL Connection String is selected on second step it is also required to choose database from the list of databases which reside on the selected SQL Server On this step are to be chosen underlying CursorAdapter class and destination library The default values are Class Library Appl vcx Parent Class Name CAppDataAccess Destination Class Library Appl vcx It is also possible to set whether classes that already exist in destination class library should be overwritten by checking Replace existing classes option Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 183 22 2 2 Choosing Tables VEX Cursor Adapter Wizard VFX APPLICATION 8 P JX Tables Fields Table Name Class Name 77 Field Name Iv O CUSTOMER ID E MN ae COMPANY NAME CONTACT NAME CONTACT_TITLE bbRESS M REGION POSTAL_CODE M COUNTRY PHONE rx o AMT DISCOUNT gt lt Click on finish to proceed Last step for building CursorAdapter clas
101. FX DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT BUILDER 12 VEX BUILDERS AND WIZARDS FOR DATA HANDLING ussssoesessessesnssnenssnesnrsnsnnsnesnenee 99 Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 5 12 1 VEX CURSORADAPTER WIZARD oed pori e EB E deus 99 I2 H1 Choosing the Datasource ee ere GOD Rer 99 13 VFX BUILDERS AND WIZARDS FOR PRODUCT ACTIVATION 100 13 1 VFX MESSAGEBOX BUILDER 13 2 VFX MESSAGE EDITOR 13 3 VEX CLASS SWITCHER an mar 13 4 13 5 VEX HELP 2 13 6 PROJECT UPDATE WIZARD 14 VFX BUILDERS AND WIZARDS FOR DOCUMENTATION 14 1 PDM PROJECT DOCUMENTING cccceeccccesesseceeccesceeccsensseececesseeeecesueecccseessseseesesseeeeesssaes 106 15 OTHER VFX BUILDERS AND WIZARD ccccsssccscscsssscccccsscscccesssssccescssssccecesscscceessese 107 15 1 VEXC MENUDESIGNER 5 teet cede b ERE FEED REN ERR ux 107 16 VEX TASK PANE 110 17 USAGE AND FEATURES FOR END USERS 2 2ser2200000002000000000000002000000000000000000000000 00000000 111 17 1 CDATAFORMPAGE FORM USER INTERFACE 00020200000 nennen nennen nennen nnne 17 2 GRADIENT BACKGROUNDS FOR VFX FORMS AND PAGE FRAMES cene
102. Field Update Work on View Options Update Source Fields company name address city region postal code country Target Table Name orders Update T arget Fields ship to name ship to address ship to city ship to region ship to postal code ship to country Update Source Fields Here you can enter fields from the Picklist table which values will be stored back into the edited table When you enter more than one value you must separate them with semicolon Target Table Name Choose the target table Usually this is the table that is processed in the form Update Target Fields Choose the fields for updating When you enter more than one value you must separate them with semicolon On the page Work on View are available the following options VFX CPickField Builder Pick Field Update Work on View Options Validation Mode Use Select Command 9 Use View parent C Use SQL Pass Through Pick Dialog Class VFXPICK Work on View If the datasource that you are picking from is a view mark this option Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 84 Use Select Command Alternatively you can use a select command or a view for validation of the user input When you use a select command you must ensure through a where clause that at most one value will be selected Example select customer_id from lv_cu
103. H ck ck ok ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ko AH AH ko ko A A ok Disable CPickField that are Fix Fields for this form PickFieldList endif endif endif this SetQueryArg lInitOk eval this class init tcArg KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ckck ck ckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK Insert your extra initialization code here return lInitOk The template code could look in such a way if you adapted it to your needs lparameters tcArg local lInitOk if empty tcArg if getArgCount tcArg lt gt 0 this cCalledBy upper getArg tcArg 1 this cFixFieldValue strtran getArg tcArg 2 this Caption getArg tcArg 3 this cFixFieldName strtran getArg tcArg 4 this cFilterExpr upper getArg tcArg 5 this lPutInLastFile f Ckckckck ckckckckckckckckckck ck KK ck ck ckckck KKK HH HH HH HH HH ckckckckckckckckck ck HH ck ck HH AH HH KH HK HK HH ck A KH ck K Set who has called you if this cCalledBy PARENT KKK KKK KK ck ck ck KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK ck ck KKK HH ck ck HH HH HH AH RK A ok Disable CPickField that are Fix Fields for this form ThisForm pgfPageFrame Pagel cntParentid 1FixField t endif endif endif this SetQueryArg lInitOk eval this class init tcArg KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK ck ck ck KKK KKK KKK KKK ck ck ck ck ck ck KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK Insert your extra initialization code
104. Hat cReplacementExpression weniger Zeichen als cSearchExpression werden die brigen Zeichen aus cSearchExpression in cSearchedExpression gel scht Im umgekehrten Fall werden die bersch ssigen Zeichen in cReplacementExpression ignoriert CHRTRAN Q bersetzt mit Hilfe der bersetzungsausdr cke cSearchExpression und G cReplacementExpression den Zeichenausdruck cSearchedExpression und gibt die sich ergebende Zeichenfolge zur ck Siehe auch STRFILTER 30 6 5 Beispiel select dbo CHRTRAN ABCDEF XYZ Anzeige XBYDZF select dbo CHRTRAN ABCDEF XYZQRST Anzeige XBYDZF 30 72 STRTRAN Durchsucht einen Zeichenausdruck nach dem Auftreten eines zweiten Zeichenausdrucks und ersetzt diesen jeweils durch einen dritten Zeichenausdruck 30 7 1 Syntax STRTRAN cSearched cExpressionSought cReplacement nStartOccurrence nNumberOfOccurrences nFlags 30 7 2 Parameter cSearched Gibt den Zeichenausdruck an der durchsucht wird cExpressionSought Gibt den Zeichenausdruck an nach dem in cSearched gesucht wird Bei der Suche wird die Gro und Kleinschreibung ber cksichtigt cReplacement Gibt den Zeichenausdruck an der cSearchFor bei jedem Auftreten in cSearched ersetzt Wenn Sie cReplacement nicht angeben wird cExpressionSought bei jedem Auftreten durch eine leere Zeichenfolge ersetzt nStartOccurrence Gibt an bei welchem Auftreten von cExpressionSought die Erset
105. Hooks are saved in the Vfxhook prg Using Hooks can be enabled in VFX Application Builder by setting the property nEnableHook 1 NEnableHook is a property of the application object In this example the FontColor of all controls that are disabled is set to Black function EventHookHandler tcEvent toObject toForm local lContinue lContinue T DO CASE CASE UPPER tcEvent INIT IF PEMSTATUS toObject disabledforecolor 5 toObject disabledforecolor eval left rgbscheme 1 2 rgbscheme 1 2 3 1 IF PEMSTATUS toObject disabledbackcolor 5 toObject disabledbackcolor eval rgb substr rgbscheme 1 2 at rgbscheme 1 2 3 1 ENDIF ENDIF ENDCASE return lContinue endfunc 18 20 Business Graph Statistical reports are an endless digits list quite hard to read and analyze The best way to demonstrate calculated results is to create colorful graphical presentation The new class cBusinessGraph gives to the VFX developer the great chance better to represent and print application data as a graph just in few minutes To draw the graph MSChart ActiveX control is used and series data is read from a table or cursor The data to be shown can be obtained from any cursor Every column in the cursor is considered to be one series in the graph It is supposed one of fields in the cursor to hold label texts If you do not specify field which contains labels all fields in th
106. ID 1 only Administrators can access AFP Forms Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 168 20 Builders and VFX features considerations 20 1 CursorAdapter wizard SQLTABLES function used to obtain list of database tables Returns a cursor with all available tables in the database However later user can access only tables which belong to his schema 20 2 Upsizing wizard Upsizing wizard should be enlarged to convert VFP database objects to DB 2 A possible difficulties may arise when in VFP database are created two indexes on the same field in a table using different VFP expressions like LOWER LEFT kdstrasse 7 UPPER kdstrasse goma dbc mag dbf Gothaer project When these two indexes are upsized to MS SQL Server the functions are removed as far as SQL Server does not support index expressions In that case in SQL Server database are created two identical indexes with different names This is not possible in DB2 UDB In such case in DB2 database only the first index will be created FillDatadictForConnection function uses SOLTABLES to creates a cursor with info about database and tables However when executin the function toward DB2 database table names are retrieved but the column Table_Cat contains only NULL values Instead of Database name A workaround can be retrieving database name from the connection string ReadSQLTables function uses bracketed identifiers It must be changed to
107. IWFPIZZA1 OOVREPORTIPRODUCTS_LIMEG OA User Groups Mira Group O Users Caption Description Save report as template file In this dialog a Caption and Description can be added also an assignment can be provided After pressing Ok button a new row is added in Templates page grid The button Edit opens again the Template Dialog but this time the file name cannot be changed and if the User is allowed to Modify report a button Start VfxModifyReport exe is shown Products n Grid Report Options Advanced Templates remises Alle Alle Alle s Alle IEEE Assignment Products BenutzerADMIN Products Product Li File name Assignment O User Groups 3 Group O Users Caption Product Lime Green Description Caption is in Lime green Start VFXModifyReport exe Save report as template file The click of button Start VFXModifyReport opens the report in Report Designer window and allow to modify the design of report Also Caption Description and Assignement can be edited The button Delete allow user to delete a report The frx and frt file are also deleted The report whi
108. Insert method of the child grid you have to replace the child table field which makes up the link to the master table typically with a code like this REPLACE lt ChildLinkField gt WITH lt Parent ParentField gt IN lt ChildTable gt The Child Grid Builder has the user interface shown below On the first tab called Grid you can customize the child grid as described earlier VFX CChildGrid Builder pm Grid Options Inplace Editing Ins Cane Parent Child orders order_line_items v Fields Selected ed Grid Class cchildgrid m v products product name order_line_items quantity _ order_line_items unit_price Header Artikel __ Calculated Field 2 Control Type combobox Control Source products product_name Output Mask C Read Only On the second tab called Options you can edit the code for OnPostInsert method so that it replaces the foreign key field in the child table with the value of the parent field Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 81 VFX CChildGrid Builder Grid ptions CChildGrid OnPostlnsert wait window CChildGrid OnPostlnsert is empty CChildGrid OnPostlnsert _VFX_Builder 09 09 03 08 56 10 PM replace order id with orders order_id in order line items The reason why the VFX Builder can not automatically generate this OnPo
109. LDER VFXCODE DBF That makes it very easy if you want the builders to use your custom code Warning making changes to this code table requires advanced knowledge of VFX NOTE Make sure to use the VFX Form Builder as long as possible for adding and removing of any controls defined through the selected fields This allows you to profit the most from the high productivity the builders provide 4 3 VFX Developer Productivity Tools To make your VFX Development life even easier VFX includes some very useful power tools Tool File Description VFX Task Pane VFXTASKPANE XML The VFX Task Pane allows easy switching from one project to another The table which stores the actual references to your projects is called VFXAPP DBF CDX FPT This table is located in the folder C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data dFPUGWisual Extend 110 VFX Class Switcher lt in VFXBLDR called Change the class of all of your forms within the current folder lib from the VFX Menu gt and current folder form Allows easy switching from version without navigation buttons on the form i e CDataFormPage to the one with navigation buttons like i e CDataFormPage You can use the class switcher also to switch the class of a selected form control VFX Object Name Picker lt in VFXBLDR called Puts the complete reference of the currently selected control into from the VFX Menu gt the clipboard Sometimes very usefully since more visual than the
110. Label Aligng 174888 I Column To Labels Grid Page Pagel Page2 Fields List Parent parentid 2 ESSI E Parent checked Parent overid E3 Parent parentcode parent value _ Parent url Create a Copy bt support AutaComple C Read Only C Use DBC Definitions v Overwrite Font When it is necessary not to move selected controls but just to create a copy of them using all currently set properties you should mark the Create a Copy check box In this case controls remain on their original place and a copy of each control is created on the destination page Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 60 9 4 2 Grid Page VFX CDataFormPage Builder Form Name Caption frmParentDocs ParentDocs Edit Pages Grid Page Form Options View parameters Linked Tables Required Fields Report y Grid Page Title Grid Class Grid Page Picture List lad Grid Page BackColor LJ Control Type textbox parent descr Header Parent ID _ parent date Control Source parent parentid parent checked Patent pare parent value Output Mask 999999999 parentins date Read Only eher Incremental Search parent edt_date parent edt_usr parent overid parent parentcode
111. ME NOT NULL CREATE TABLE employee empid INT GENERATED ALWAYS AS IDENTITY name VARCHAR 40 NOT NULL job VARCHAR 15 NOT NULL hire_date TIMESTAMP NOT NULL department INT Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 192 NULL NULL basic_salary DECIMAL 8 2 commission DECIMAL 8 2 NULL commission DECIMAL 8 2 commission DECIMAL 8 2 NULL DB2 UDB only allows a single column in a table to be defined as IDENTITY If unique sequences are required for additional columns sequence objects can be used Unlike IDENTITY columns sequence objects are separate database objects and are not defined in the table definition The IDENTITY_VAL_LOCAL function can be used to retrieve the last generated identity value Note that this function returns the last value used in the same unit of work 23 2 10 Referential constraints SQL Server referential constraints have two possible actions CASCADE and NO ACTION default VFP referential constraints have three possible actions CASCADE RESTRICT and IGNORE default DB2 UDB referential constraint definitions have four possible actions NO ACTION the default RESTRICT CASCADE and SET NULL When converting to DB2 UDB no change in syntax is required 23 3 Indexes Visual FoxPro supports the following types of index files structural compound index cdx nonstructural compound index cdx files and standalone index idx f
112. NULL values In where clause for VFP SQL Server and DB2 UDB the syntax lt field name gt IS NULL or lt field name gt IS NOT NULL is used in same way 23 2 6 Unqualified columns SQL Server and VFP permit the use of an unqualified column wildcard alongside other elements in the SELECT clause list DB2 UDB adheres to the SQL standard which states that a SELECT element that contains an unqualified column wildcard cannot contain anything else DB2 UDB requires these elements to be qualified a sequence of t1 t2 where t1 t2 are the tables in the FROM clause For example the following query is validi in and SQL Server but not in DB2 UDB SELECT e FROM employee e jobs j WHERE e job id j job id Because an unqualified column wildcard appears in the SELECT list alongside other elements the query would be invalid in DB2 UDB To convert this query the wildcard column would need to be qualified like the following modified query demonstrates SELECT e j FROM employee e jobs j WHERE e job_id j job_id 23 2 7 SELECT INTO The VFP s SELECT INTO TABLE and SQL Server s SELECT INTO statement is completely different than DB2 UDB s SELECT INTO statement SQL Server s SELECT INTO statement is equivalent to a CREATE TABLE statement followed by an INSERT statement in DB2 UDB Thus the following query in SQL Server SELECT INTO t2 FROM tl is equivalent to the following statements i
113. ShapeMouseEnter nButton nShift nXCoord nYCoord tnValue tcLegend tnCoordIndex Event that occurs when a user moves the mouse over an object The values from the parameters nButton nShift nXCoord and nYCoord are exactly the same passed when any other kind of Mouse event occurs Additional parameters added by GDIGraph that will allow you to obtain an extra level of control on your chart when a user passes the mouse over a shape or portion of the chart tn Value Numeric the value that corresponds to the shape If the mouse is not over a shape the returned value is logical FALSE F tcLegend Character the text of the legend associated to the current shape tnCoordIndex Numeric the index number of the current chart When any mouse event is fired 6 properties are populated in order to inform about the current chart and the shape that was clicked Using these properties you can obtain all the information that you need about the current shape CurrIndex CurrLegend CurrValue CurrRecord CurrColumn CurrObjType ShapeMouseLeave nButton nShift nXCoord nYCoord tnValue tcLegend tnCoordIndex Event that occurs when mouse cursor exits an object ShapeMouseMove nButton nShift nXCoord nYCoord tnValue tcLegend tnCoordIndex Event that occurs when a user moves the mouse into an object ShapeToolTip nButton nShift nXCoord nYCoord tnValue tcLegend tnCoordIndex tcObjType Event that occurs immediately before
114. TE INS TIME EDT TIME sync date sync time ckval vixacomp dbf Save settings for future use Oledrag grid 0 usegridsetings v Enable OLE drag from OLE drop operation switches Initialize OLE drag in any pages of pageframes the form into editmode control Disabled Default Disabled Default Disabled Default Enabled Enabled Enabled Pass to Container Pass to Container Pass to Container sonar Aoptcaton naar can eat oct Drao Op ce names ras se E Save settings for future use Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 51 Startup Application Behavior Application Behavior 2 Activation Error Handling Edit OLE Drag amp Drop Grids indexes Paths Misc Author Show grid order type 2 Color Color for the column header displaying ascending order 255 255 000 Color for the column header displaying descending order 255 000 000 Show grid lines 2 no in all forms X Grid Highlight Style 1 use grid settings AutoFit grids on firstload 0 Use Grid settings Pressing the enter key on a grid switches the form into edit mode 2 False for all forms
115. The extensive Application Development Framework that VI S U AL EXIEND 1 1 0 makes Microsoft Visual FoxPro td Development easy English Developer Manual dFPUG c o ISYS GmbH Uwe Habermann Venelina Jordanova Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 2 Copyright Visual Extend is a product from dFPUG c o ISYS GmbH Any reuse of VFX related material needs the written permission of dFPUG ISYS GmbH also VFX related publications must have the copyright notice of dFPUG c o ISYS GmbH Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 3 n 2 1 INTRODUCTION eR 10 1 1 BASED ON VISUAL 9 0 2040 002000 0 0 0 6 10 1 2 THE COMBINATION THAT MAKES IT ALL IN 10 1 3 EVEN MORE PRODUCTIVE WITH NEW BUILDERS IN VISUAL EXTEND 11 0 eee 11 25 QUICK OVERVIEW RD 13 2 1 INTRODUCTION 2 1 1 SITE TTE 2 1 2 VEX Task Pah iss ada hse e esr 2 1 3 VFX Application Wizard 22 FUNCTIONALITY OF THE NEW APPLICATION 4 4 8 000 14 2 2 1 Usage 2 2 2 Standard toolbar 2 2 3 Open Dialog 2 2 4 Forms 2 29 User s 8 2 2 6 Error track
116. This is a character string that holds concrete assigned rights for a particular PC The activation key will be created by the developer based on the Installation key The Activation key is useless for any other PCs Installation date This is the date when the application was started first time on a PC 24 2 How it works When the application protection using Activation key is activated on start of the application the object goProgram SecurityRights is created with child properties named according user rights that the developer has defined Every of these property could have three different values The application is not activated In this case the developer can decide what action should be executed For example for the user could be denied access to several functions as long as application is not activated 0 The application is activated but the user does not have right to perform this action 1 The application is activated and the user has right to perform that action When application protection using Activation key is enabled the activation key along with data of the first start of the application is stored in an INI file The developer can choose the name of this INI file so that every application uses its own INI file The default name is VFX ini The INI file will be stored in the Windows folder The Activation key is encrypted using the activation rule The protection can be improved further by including character const
117. XPICK 10 5 VFX Combo Pick List Builder The class is designated for easy creation and maintenance of pick lists Using this class it is possible to define many pick lists without need to create pick table for every particular list The class cComboPicklist uses two VFX system tables Vfxpdef dbf and Vfxplist dbf The table Vfxpdef dbf holds definition for pick lists It contains one row for every defined pick list For picklist definition can be written code that will be executed when user makes a selection This is a common code and executes regardless of specific list item that is selected In Vfxplist dbf table you can write more specific code that will be executed only if that item is selected Pick items are defined in Vfxplist dbf table Field Picklist is the identifier of the picklist definition and is foreign key to Vfxpdef dbf table The fields Code and Descript are values used for creating the list Depending on picklist definition only Code column or both Code and Descript columns are displayed in the list Fields Value and Proccode are designated for developer s purposes In Proccode field you can write a specific code that will be executed when that particular item is selected For every instance of cComboPicklist class you can define if adding new records in the pick table is allowed and the user level required for user to be allowed to add new values Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Pa
118. able name of the parent table or view Then you have a page frame with the pages Edit Pages Parent Grid Page Form Options and Children which are explained here On the page named Edit Pages you see the same user interface like in the VFX CDataFormPage builder described earlier in this documentation Here you define the pages for editing the parent table Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 70 On the page named Grid Page you see the same user interface like in the VFX CDataFormPage builder described earlier in this documentation Here you define the Grid Page of the parent table VFX COneToMany Builder Form Name Caption Master Table frmOrders Orders caorders v Edit Pages Grid Page Form Option Children View parame Linked Tabl Required Report Grid Page Title Grid Class Use Grid Page List cgrid ka Grid Page Picture Grid Page BackColor Fields Selected 25 caorders orderid _ caorders orderdate Header Orderid caorders customerid E caorders shiptoname Control Source caorders orderid 2 Output Mask 999999999 _ caorders paid Read Only Incremental Search Control Type textbox v Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 71 On the page named Form Options you see the same user interface lik
119. activation key form and after setting user s rights and clicking OK button in that form Installation key User rights value and Activation key are saved back in Customers list When the user sends his Installation key an Activation key should be generated This Activation key informs the application whether the user may perform a certain action For every action should be defined corresponding right When the button Create Activation Key is clicked is invoked a Dialog with the user rights defined for the active project Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 204 Create Activation Key VFX9OTEST PJX Customer Name Description User has this right 2RumReprs O v Hema Installation Key Cancel The Installation key of the user is entered in the lower part of the dialog The Installation key can be inserted using the clipboard or can be read from a file When user rights that will be active are marked the Activation key will be generated by clicking on the button OK Generated Activation key will be stored in the file lt Projectname gt xak in the project folder The Activation key or the file must be sent to the user to be used for application activation When to the user are given rights correspondent to the example above to perform all data processing actions but not to run reports the rights loaded at run time
120. ad and printed from The End user license agreement text is kept in the table in a data row with Type EULA and Filename EULA_ lcLangID where lcLangID is the abbreviation string for the particular language In this way it is possible to provide an End user license agreement text for every language 17 16 Further end user features in VFX 11 0 Support of the incremental search even when the field contains NULL Localized Hotkeys for the class cpickdate and a multiline tool tip text New classes e mail with e mail client call hyperlink with Internet Explorer call numerical text box with calculator call TAPI file selector with open file dialog Conform to visible F for Grid Columns for the search dialog and the print dialog Progress bar by the actualization of the customer database Script for download and install Adobe Acrobat reader for PDF documents Keyboard support in the XP opening dialog Drag and drop support in Mover dialog Position on last viewed record when form is reopened Support of the HighLightStyle property in Grids Improved memo fields visualization in Grids When all entries in favorites menu are deleted the corresponding menu bar is also removed Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 125 18 Features for Developers 18 1 System settings in Options Dialog In the Options Dialog the fields of the table Vfxsys dbf can be edited The programmer can also add to this table f
121. and auditing purposes e Inthe System object you can define and manage the download scripts for Ghostscript Acrobat Reader OutlookYesNo as well as Update Backup DUN and DynDNS via a definitions mask e Place a DocumentManagement container on an empty tab and define the document linkage to the current record with the Document Management Builder thus all document links are in one central table Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 12 e Place a cBusinessGraph container onto an empty tab and hold on this Builder is regrettably just not finished yet lt bg gt e PlaceacComboPicklist on your edit page and use the ComboPickList Builder to define and state the selectable values And e Edit the values in the respective maintenance form and use the definition in the next form again by choosing from the Combobox overview e Or use a cTextCalculator class a cTexteMail cTextHyperlink cLinkTextbox or cTextTAPI class you won t even need a Builder for this We underlined ONLY the new or substantially extended builders and system functions from the VFX menu Therefore we say Visual Extend 11 0 More productive than ever And we suppose that you can agree with us on this statement straight away Now have fun with our manual of the newest version Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 13 2 Quick Overview 2 1 Introduction For many
122. ane Manager VFX 10 0 f vFx 10 0 a Start 9 Community Visual Extend 10 0 tinea tad x Project Description Folder Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 31 The VFX Application Wizard appears 1 With this wizard you create a new VFX project Master VFX home folder C WFX VFX110 Usually you don t need to modify this path New Project Enterthe name ofthe new project file VFX Application 1 Enter the name ofthe new projects folder C uwelVFX Application1 Database name DATABASE DBC Click on nextto proceed The settings that are made in the VFX Application Wizard are saved for usage in subsequent projects Enter the following information before you start to build your new application Master VFX home folder Locate or type the VFX home directory where all VFX support files are located Usually the default value is correct and you do not need to make any changes Enter the name of the new project file Enter the Name for your new project file Don t include any path and file extensions just type the name of your Project Enter the name of the new project s folder Locate or type the directory for your new project If the directory does not exist the VFX Application Wizard will create it for you The standard path in which new projects are created is My Documents VFX Projects If another path is chosen for generate
123. anguages English Next DB2 Information Center Select the location from which you will access the DB2 Information Center Select On IBM Website option Next U sa ibm P SA_0123456789 Check Use same user and password for remaining DB2 services Next Administration contact list location Select Create a contact list on this system option Next DB2 Instances DB2 Name db2c DB2 Port 50000 Default Next Select the metadata you want to prepare Select Prepare the warehouse control database option Next Next When a health monitor threshold is breached an email or pager notification will be sent to the administrator Specify a contact for health monitor notification Select Defer the task until after installation option Next Used when synchronizing DB2 servers with a DB2 Control Server Request satellite information Check Defer the task until after installation checkbox Next Enable operating system security for DB2 objects Check Enable operating system security checkbox Next Install gt Setup is complete 23 9 2 Step 2 Upsize to MS SQL 2005 through WHEN UPSIZING MAKE SURE NO TIMESTAMP COLUMNS ARE ADDED Create ODBC DSN for SQL2005 server in ControlPanel gt AdministrativeTools gt DataSources This DSN is used later by IBM MTK to migrate SQL DB to DB 2 Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 196 23 9
124. ants keys from the Windows Registry and by the creation date of an arbitrary file This combination can be different for every particular application so that every application can have its own unique activation rules In addition to this setting the developer can also choose the type of protection Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 199 By default the protection creates the INI file at when the application is started for first time The current system date at this moment will be stored in the INI file This date is then available for later use as the value of the property goProgram InstallationDate The weakness of this type of protection is that the user can delete the created file and the INI file will be created again the next start of the application with a new date To avoid such user s action the developer can choose to use an additional protection level It is base on usage of a special deployed along with the application installation files By default this file is named FirstInstall txt Its can also be set using cFirstInstal property of the class cActivation Appl vcx The file FirstInstall txt will be stored into Windows folder When the developer chooses protection with the file FirstInstall txt the application behavior will be following When the application is started first it will check for the INI file If the file exists the date of first start of the applicati
125. app otherwise the changes in the include file might not go through and you still see the old text Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 48 8 VFX Builders and Wizards for Projects The VFX Builders help the developers in creating and editing forms grids and pick fields Defining a form can be time consuming especially if you have many forms with many Fields to be displayed Putting 20 Fields on a form forces you to put 40 objects the Textbox or any other control plus normally a Label If you use a Foundation Class Library you have to customize your Toolbar or drag the desired control from the class library and drop it on the form With the Visual Extend Form Builders this task has become very quick and simple Another great benefit of the VFX Form Builders is that they are fully reentrant This means that you can use them to populate changes you made in your database container automatically by just reapplying the builder and check the Use DBC Definition option Also adding pages to the pageframe or changing the grid columns is very easy with the reentrance feature of the VFX Form Builders Please refer to the Chapter Form User Interface later in this document to get an idea about the User Interface of the standard data manipulation forms created using VFX First of all you need to setup the database container for your application Create your tables fields and index keys NOTE If you p
126. ar with the VFX Form Builder generate some simple forms and try to increase the complexity by generating forms that call other forms as well as forms that will be called from other forms Once you are familiar with the standard VFX data manipulation form you might want to take the step to the development of One To Many data manipulation form Apply Does the same as OK but does not quit the form builder dialog Cancel Cancels the VFX Form Builder process Any selections and entries will be lost 9 5 VFX CTableForm Builder VFX CTableForm Builder Form Name Caption frmProducts Products Edit Grid Form Options View parameters Linked Tables and Fields Required Fields Report C Right Label Alignment 7 Add colon to labels Reorder elements Fields List 2 caproducts productid A __ caproducts categorvid caproducts productcode Caption Productcode caproducts productname caproducts picturefile __ caproducts productprice Input Mask Control Type ctextbox Format Status Bar AutoCompS ource AutoComplete 0 Does not support C Read Only v C Use DBC Definitions Overwrite Font Another type of form is the cTableForm With this form the List Grid and the controls are placed one next to other or among themselves Therefore it is suitable in particular for forms
127. arameter cSearchExpression Gibt den Zeichenausdruck an nach dem AT in cExpressionSearched sucht cExpressionSearched Gibt den Zeichenausdruck an in dem mit cSearchExpression gesucht wird Sowohl cSearchExpression als auch cExpressionSearched k nnen von beliebiger Gr e sein nOccurrence Gibt an nach dem wie vielten Vorkommen ersten zweiten dritten usw von cSearchExpression in cExpressionSearched gesucht werden soll Standardm ig sucht nach dem ersten Vorkommen von cSearchExpression nOccurrence 1 Durch Angabe von nOccurrence k nnen Sie weitere Vorkommen von cSearchExpression in cExpressionSearched suchen Wenn nOccurrence gr er ist als die Anzahl der Vorkommen von cSearchExpression in cExpressionSearched gibt den Wert 0 zur ck 30 1 3 R ckgabewert Smallint 30 1 4 Hinweise sucht im zweiten Zeichenausdruck nach dem ersten Vorkommen des ersten Zeichenausdrucks Ist die Suche erfolgreich gibt eine ganze Zahl zur ck die die Position des ersten Zeichens des gefundenen Zeichenausdrucks angibt Ist die Suche nicht erfolgreich gibt AT den Wert 0 zur ck Die mit ausgef hrte Suche ber cksichtigt Gro und Kleinschreibung Wenn Sie einen Suchvorgang ausf hren m chten bei dem die Gro Kleinschreibung nicht ber cksichtigt wird verwenden Sie die ATCO Funktion hnlich zu der bekannten Oracle Funktion INSTR Siehe auch RAT 30 1 5 Beispiel d
128. arent Child Item OneToMany OneToMany 2 Parent Tree One to Tree Parent Documents Business Graph More Parent2 Delayed Audit Trail Outlook Report Selection Ixpopenstyle T the new Open Dialog in the Windows XP style will be used F the old Open Dialog Vfxfopen scx will be used The Group Headings in the new Open Dialog are read from the new table field Vfxopen groupcap The state of the particular groups expanded or collapsed is stored for each user Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 167 The File Open Dialog uses the table Vfxfopen dbf For each form the VFX Form Builder adds automatically a data record in the table Vfxfopen dbf Here is the structure of the table Vfxfopen dbf VFXFOpen Field ObjectID ObjectNo GroupCap Title Descr Form Parameter Viewlevel NewLevel EditLevel Eraselevel Favorites PrimaryKey FavorDescr InetLevel Description This field is used when the Open Dialog Vfxfopen scx is used For this the property goprogram Ixpopenstyle must be set to F Usually the VFX Open Dialog has two pages Tip You can set the Pagecount property of the page frame to any value in order to change the number of the pages in the form Vfxopen scx If you want your form to appear on the page 1 of the page frame enter in this field For the following pages enter PAGE2 PAGE etc Enter a number for the order sequence in
129. as Linked Child Form If the form you are currently creating will have child forms which should be dynamically linked to this parent form check this option This will automatically generate the form method OnSetChilddata which will be called automatically for every child form available Autosynch Child Form This sets the form property lAutosynchChildform which defines whether you want the linked child forms synchronize automatically whenever the parent record changes or only when the user activates the child form If this option is not marked the Child form will be refreshed when the user activates it Put in Last File Menu This sets the form property PutinLastFile which defines whether you want to put the form caption in the recently used file list in the File menu Put in Window Menu This sets the form property PutinWindowmenu which defines whether you want to put the form while running in the Windows menu See also the application class property nWinMnuCount and the application class method RefreshWindowMenu Can Edit This sets the form property CanEdit which defines whether the user can edit records the current form or not Can Insert This sets the form property ICanInsert which defines whether the user can insert records in the current form or not Can Copy This sets the form property CanCopy which defines whether the user can copy records in the current form or not Can Delete This sets the form property CanDelete
130. ass should be selected in such a way that the reference to the form and the page of the pageframe are easily seen Now the controls stored as a class can be deleted from the page frame The function addpagedelay is used to load the container of the form at run time The call must be included into the Activate Event of the current page and looks in this way AddPageDelay thisform this x Name of the class gt It is recommended first to develop and test a form without Delayed Instantiation If the form is nearly finished it can be reorganized to use Delayed Instantiation Pay attention that references to particular controls must be changed Before the conversion to Delayed Instantiation it could refer to a text box for example like this Thisform pgfPageframe Pagel txtMytextbox After the conversion to Delayed Instantiation the reference looks in this way Thisform pgfPageframe Pagel x txtMytextbox The x here is the name of the container in which are the controls of the page 18 8 Important VFX Methods 18 8 1 Form methods Valid VFX offers a Valid method on Form level This method is always called when the data of the form are to be saved Here should be performed all validations If this method returns the value F the saving procedure will not continue and the form remains in edit mode The data is saved by returning of T OnMore With the assistance of this method it is in particular possible to call Child forms If
131. ataF ormPageB ar When while opening the VFX Class Switcher a form is opened for edition you can change the base classes of the particular objects For example it is possible a Textbox to be changed to a Spinner VFX Base Class Switcher Original Control Base Class ctextbox New Control Base Class reo nn 13 4 VFX Project Properties In VFX can be used own instances of the VFX classes In the VFX Project Properties dialog can be registered classes for the particular control types which can be used As default here stand the known classes from the class library Vfxobj vcx The VFX developer can change these defaults and register own classes which are stored Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 103 preferably in the class library Appl vcx These classes can be used from the VFX Builders when creating new forms VFX Project Properties Builder Builder Page Field Type cOneToMany w ChildEdiPage c v Builder Page Type Class Class Library Default Is AutoComplete kOneToMany chidEdiPsge wcombebox ibw amp ebiw kOneToMany ChidEdiPage edibok jibw amp obivoc kOneToMany ChidEdiPage kOneToMany ChigEdiPage ibw amp obiwoc kOneToMany ChidEdiPage C eistes jibw amp abivoc kOneToMany ChiEdiPage C epickaftsmakdibwhobiver
132. ates in a multi user environment exactly the same way as in an client server environment The modular design of the VFX class hierarchy gives you the possibility to make modifications after inserting a new data record Apart from many other functions VFX provides a method with the name OnPostInsert which is invoked in the moment when a new data record is added Normally VFX provides methods for all important events which are executed automatically before during and after the event In this case when a new data record is added the following methods are available OnPrelInsert e Onlnsert Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 129 OnbPostlnsert In addition there is a property that specifies whether the user can add new data records This property is named NOTE For further information please read the VFX Technical Reference In order to generate a primary key you could insert the following code into the OnPostInsert method of your form The code calls the function GetNew d The parameter specifies the table for which the key is generated DODEFAULT REPLACE comp_id WITH GetNewId CUSTOMER IN customer The last generated key value is stored in the table Vfxsysid dbf 18 10 Data manipulation tracking The Data manipulation tracking Audit Trail logs changes made to the data VFX uses trigger to determine changes in the data The tri
133. ates the include files for the different languages in the folder UNCLUDE LanguageDir whereas LanguageDir represents the folder name for the language you plan to translate As mentioned above the VFX specific language includes have already been translated into various languages and you don t have to translate a single word from them Y To build your application for another language define the ID LANGUAGE constant in the VFXDEF H include file and copy the include files from the VNCLUDE LanguageDir back into the current VVCLUDE folder of your project Y Rebuild all and test your translated application You will receive a separate EXE File for every Language Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 207 25 2 Run time Localization With VFX 11 0 it is possible not only to develop localized applications but also to allow end user to change application language at run time Runtime localization feature is controlled by the property goProgram IRuntimeLocalization When the value of this property is set to T the working language for the application can be chosen in the Login dialog Additionally at run time the language can be changed using the language selection combobox in the main application toolbar The property goProgram lRuntimeLocalization can be set using the VFX Application builder Welcome 1 7 4 Enter your Name and Password NEDKO User name Password
134. atically changes its state to marked ActionOnMark and when it gets unmarked ActionOnUnmark The code is edited in Standard Visual FoxPro editing window The code that is entered into ActionOnMark or ActionOnUnmark can be executed by your choice before or after the code that is executed in ActionOnSelect To set this behavior choose the desired option Before ActionOnSelect or After ActionOnSelect from the correspondent option group Icon Each bar in a menu can be assigned an icon This icon could be selected from a Visual FoxPro integrated system resources or another graphical file can be used For selecting picture is used the dialog Get picture from It is invoked by clicking on the black border square for the particular menu bar element In this dialog you can choose between a graphical file and an icon from the VFX system resources Get a picture from OFile 1 System Resource a Macros Class Browser Component Gallery Er Object Browser IntelliSense Manager Beautify Z Task List E Document View Coverage Profiler Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 109 If for a menu bar element an icon is assigned and at the same time the element is set behave as checkbox the icon itself serves as check mark When the menu bar is checked the icon is displayed sunken and when menu bar is unchecked the icon appears normal Position of the particu
135. ation Class property ActivationType to T which defines that the product activation will require the file Firstinstall txt This will improve your application protection Advanced This button opens the VFX Application Builder which offers a huge number of further setting of the application object In the lower part of this dialog is shown a help text area with explanations for the selected property Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 34 On the page 4 Author you can enter your personal data to document new project A VEX Application Wizard ex 4 Author The following information are stored in the project info Author Venelina Jordanova Uwe Habermann Company V amp U Ltd http www VandU eu Address D r Anastasia Zhelyazkova 33 ap 69 City Varna State Country Bulgaria Postal Code 9010 Click on finish to generate your project Cancel Back Next gt This Information will be written into the new generated project 6 4 Generate the project Select Finish and the VFX Application Wizard will create a new project according the parameters you selected During this process the sample application from the VFX Install folder will be copied into the new project folder Also include files correspondent to the chosen language will be copied Finally will the entire project be compiled so the include files will be included in
136. ation from the parent to the child in the data environment otherwise your form may not run as you expect Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 69 The VFX One To Many Form Builder has an intuitive user interface t VFX COneToMany Builder Form Name Caption Master Table frmOrders Orders caorders v Edit Pages Grid Page Form Option Children View parame Linked Table Required Report Page Count Page Title Reorder elements C Justified Tab 1 Pagel Right Label Alignment Add colon to labels Page Picture Page BackColor 1 Pagel ed n 2 Control Type ctextbox caorders orderid Fields List caorders orderdate Caption Orderid caorders customerid caorders shiptoname caorders shiptoaddress Input Mask 999999999 caorders totalsum ein caorders paid atus Bar Format a Read Only First you select the following options Form Name Enter the name of the new Form VFX Form Builder assigns default form name following the common naming conventions beginning with frm Of course you can give your form any name but we recommend that you follow the common naming conventions Caption Enter the caption for your form While you type the caption you ll see it displayed in the form builder s caption Master Table T
137. awn in Pie or Doughnut charts Show percentage as values Determines if percentages will be shown on each slice instead of values Detach slices on click Allows the detachment of pie or doughnut slices on mouse click over the shapes Detach on legend click Allows the detachment of pie or doughnut slices on mouse click over the legend shapes Enhanced drawing Enables the enhancing drawing mode when all edges are drawn separately providing a better effect when transparencies are applied to the chart Det Steps Determines number of steps that a slice of a pie or doughnut will take till full detachment Angle Recalculates the needed angles adjusting for a better visualisation when the pie has an important difference between width and height Distance The distance in percentage used to determine the center point for the gradient brush assigning the point where the destination color will reach its maximum intensity Legend Distance The distance in percentage starting from the center of the pie or doughnut where the shape legends will be drawn 0 01 Center of the pie 1 External border of the pie Force Circle Forces the Pie or doughnut shapes to be circular with the same width and height independent from the width or height of the GDIGraph container ff VFX GDI Graph Builder E Data Style Legends Axes Colors Background Scales Margins Quality Chart Type Bars Prop
138. ble to create an index on a single column or composite index on list of columns 23 4 Data access 23 5 ActiveX Data Object ADO Generally if the OLE DB or ODBC interfaces are used fewer application code changes are required than if a native driver is used Converting from Microsoft OLE DB to IBM OLE DB requires some change but converting from Microsoft ODBC to IBM ODBC is relatively straightforward and few changes are required 23 6 Establishing connection The IBM OLE DB Provider for DB2 allows DB2 UDB to act as a resource manager for the OLE DB provider Example 10 5 shows a comparison of a typical connection string between the SQL Server OLE DB driver and the DB2 UDB OLE DB driver 23 6 1 Example for OLE DB connection strings Microsoft OLE DB for SQL Server Provider SQLOLEDB Data Source myServerName Initial Catalog myDbName User ID myUserName Password myPwd Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 193 IBM OLE DB for DB2 UDB Provider IBMDADB2 Data Source REDBOOK UID userid PWD password 23 6 2 Example for ODBC connection strings SQL Server DRIVER SQL Server SERVER myServerName uid myUserName pwd myPwd DATABASE myDbName IBM DB2 ODBC driver IBM DB2 ODBC DRIVER Database myDbName hostname myServerName port myPortNum protocol TCPIP uid myUserName pwd myPwd No significant differences in Views Defaults 23 7 Dif
139. by the start of the application the file Config vfx does not contain any entries or is corrupted the dialog Manage Config vfx is invoked and the user should define the datasource entries Later users with administrator s rights can edit the file Config vfx using the menu Tools Manage Config vfx y Manage config vfx ClientName Connection Type Connection string Uid UserName Password a myDataSource DBConnection Connection String DSN Database v I lt Add Row Delete Row Add Column Delete column For every particular client you can define different DataSource type and specify corresponding VFP native database or ODBC connection to the database The file Config vfx can contain multiple records When there are more than one record in it a Client selection dialog is invoked It is possible to use a connection defined in a VFP database For this choose DBConnection as connection type At run time the connection name is assigned to cDBCConn property of goProgram object In the file Config vfx is defined the name of database to be used for different clients At run time the connection information is retrieved from the database specified for the currently selected client and this connection is further used to connect to remote data To use ODBC connection can be used a connection string or an existing DSN If a Connection String option is chosen for DataSource type the ellipsis button can be used to invoke a dialog t
140. ca Otri E Upravit CTRL E Nuovo Ctrl N Novy CTRL N Copia Record E Kopirovat z znam 12 Cancella Ctrl D 2 Smazat CTRL D Trova Ctrl F CTRL F Altra Ostatni Russian Visual Extend Dutch 312 Ctrl Z ie a 9 is De Ctri S _ Ctrl X Ctrl C Ctrl V Ctr E E 2 Ctrl D r Ctrl F F6 Portuguese Finnish Aplica o Visual Extend Arquivo Editar Visualizar Favoritos Ferramentas Janela Ajuda De x Dest Ctrl Z QJ C3 ie pna Salvar Ctr S ELLO Recortar CtrleX Copiar Ctrl C ira colar Ctrl V Editar Ctri E Novo Ctri N E Copiar Registro Excluir Ctrl D y Pesquisar Ctrl F Outros FB helps you to create your Visual FoxPro Applications in a higher quality in much less time and therefore dramatically increases your development productivity And all this without loosing any of the Visual FoxPro Gv aa Ctrl Z Opslaan Ctrl S X Knippen Ctrl X 171 Kopieren Ctrl C
141. cases In the table will be saved exactly which user which data record and since when has been locked You can use the Functions XLock and XUnlock described in the Technical Reference under Functions The System Locks table in which all the system locks will be stored using standard VFX Function calls is the free table Vfxlock dbf cdx The data manipulation form based on the class CDataFormPage will be prepared automatically from the VFX Application Wizard Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 46 System Locks List The administrator can clear this list by clicking on the command button called Delete All NOTE For additional information please refer to the VFX Technical Documentation 7 8 Options VFX offers a table called Vfxsys dbf which stores application specific settings y System Parameters The above form is just an example of an application specific System Options Dialog VFX Application Wizard creates a form Vfxsys scx which is ready to use This form inherits the class CSystemDialog All you have to do is to create desired fields in the Vfxsys dbf table and to place the corresponding controls on the above dialog with the Control Source Property pointing to a property of the object goSystem VFX creates for every field in the Vfxsys dbf table a property of the object goSystem and handles automatically the save amp restore of these values Assume
142. ch is printed is the current selected from Template grid If no reports available in Template grid or no one is selected a generated report is printed If the user is no with Admin level and no templates are found the page Templates is removed For template dialog is added a new class in vfxFormBase vcx cTemplateDialogVfxBase which inherits cFilterUserSelection class from vfxForm vcx Also a new class is added in vfxForm vcx cTemplateDialog which inherits cTemplateDialogVfxBase And a new scx file is added to the project vfxTemplateDialog scx The records are saved in a table vfxReports dbf which is also new New methods in cRepGen class LoadReportTemplates Loads report templates data Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 180 21 7 Menu designer new functionality Allowed FOR On Each menu item including separator can be set Allowed For expression which determine if the menu entry will be defined or no This functionality replace RemoveUnusedMenuBars function which is no more used The Allowed For expression is checked in all menu types Standart VFP DBi menu and Ribbon All SkipFor expressions must use goProgram onSkipMenu instead of onSkipMenu function which is no more used New methods onSkipMenu Determine if a menu entry must be skipped or no isMenultemAllowed Determine if a menu entry will be defined or no 21 8 Class cEmailXLSAttachment This is a class based on cCommandButto
143. ck Event that occurs when a user presses and releases the mouse button over the GDIGraph object When Click and DbIClick events are fired 6 properties are populated in order to inform about the current chart and the shape that was clicked CurrIndex CurrLegend CurrValue CurrRecord CurrColumn CurrObjType DrawChart Draws and updates the current chart image DrawChart is the last method to be called after you setup all the chart properties DrawReport tnWidth tnHeight Returns the FULLPATHO of physical copy of an image from the current chart drawn using the EMF encoder This is most recommended for reporting purposes because the EMF image format is vectorial allowing a perfect resizement of the chart image in the report designer surface try resizing to 50096 or even in a PDF output tnWidth tnHeight Optional send the dimensions of the EMF to be created Useful for the case when you need to redraw the chart in a different size from the original GDIGraph obejct GetChartProperties tnType tIWrapper Returns the properties and values used to create the current chart It can then be pasted into a program to re create the chart or saved as is for later execution tnType 1 Returns all properties 2 Returns the Non default properties 3 Returns properties since last call to SaveChartProperties method tIWrapper to include code around it WITH ENDWITH GetScaleLegend tnScaleNumber tnValue Returns lege
144. condition VFX takes care to keep data consistent It is not required related tables to have same primary key name as the parent table however it is good design to keep them same This key is automatically filled in insert operations after inserting new record in parent table Related records are deleted when delete operation is performed on parent table On Linked tables page you have to select parent table and its primary key field In the Parameter List you can add fields from related table which maintain referential integrity In the parameter list are listed alias and related field It is allowed to choose only one related field per table When a second field from a table that is already in the list is chosen it overwrites the field that is already placed in the list Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 65 9 4 6 Required Fields VFX CDataFormPage Builder Form Name Caption frmParent Parent Edit Pages Grid Page Form Options View parameters Linked Tables Required Fields Report Required Fields List Parent Descr Init Properties forecolor RGB 255 0 0 Parent Parentid Failure Properties backcolor AGB 255 255 0 C Use DBC Definitions Overwrite Font The new form s properties cRequiredFields cRequiredFieldInitProps cRequiredFieldFailureProps and cRequiredFieldFailureForm are designated to avoid NULL or empty values being saved in
145. cription about the usage of form specific toolbars please refer to the separate VFX Technical Documentation 7 1 9 Final words about Office Compatibility Depending on the type of your application the level of Office Compatibility might differ from what is suggested here Look at the VFX menu as one alternative which will cover most but definitively not all possible applications with their special needs It s definitively worth investing some time to prepare the right decision about the menu and toolbar user interface you plan to use in your application 7 2 Database Tools By selecting the Menu Option Tools Database you will see the following dialog Database Tools Table Selected Records JADDRESS ITEM PARENT PARENTDOCS PARENTTABLE TEST VFXACOMP CHILD gt CHILDTABLE gt 1 Maintain Repair C C Memo C Reindex Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 40 In this dialog you see a list of tables used in your application In a user friendly VFX Mover Dialog you can select the tables you want to process You can select from the following options e Pack e Pack Memo e Reindex Select OK to run the desired database maintenance action for the selected tables NOTE If you like the above Mover Dialog you will be happy to hear there is a VFX Mover Class which allows you to easily integrate Mover Dialogs
146. ct Name Picker 3 2 Specifics of Applications created using Visual Extend Applications which have been developed using Visual FoxPro together with the Application Development Framework Visual Extend will have the following characteristics Ready for Office Compatible Certification Standard Toolbar and including optional individual Toolbars for any Form Using XP Themes in all controls Hot Tracking for buttons in Toolbar Icons in Menus Navigation Search New Copy Edit Delete optional on Form or on Main Toolbar Multi instance of Forms Recently used form list in File Menu actually open forms in Window Menu Incremental Search including Autosort in all VFX Grids Alternate Sort by Doubleclicking on any Column Header in any VFX Grid Indicate actual sort in column header optionally using colors Auto Save and Restore of Size and Position of any Form Auto Save of all Grid Layout Changes including the Current Sort Picklist Control with Auto validation and optional Data Fetching Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 21 Picklist Form with Incremental Search Auto sort Alternate Sort by Doubleclicking on any Column Header as well as Maintenance and Insert features Auto save and Restore of Size and Position of Picklist Forms including any Picklist Grid Layout Changes Powerful Picklist Object within Childgrid User Access Management including Password Encryption Auto use of Network Logon Names
147. d can be added as many rows as needed Rows in the Grid can also be reordered using the arrow buttons in the right part of the wizard Reordering the rows in the grid changes the Activation rule When you save defined activation rules this pattern is saved for later use in the property cActPattern of the class cVFXActivation Appl vcx IMPORTANT The values of the property cActPattern must NOT be deleted Without this value it is not possible to create Activation key On the page Rights can be defined up to 32 different user rights In this way can be controlled the access to 32 modules in the application For example can be defined rights that allow the user to start a form RunDataForms print reports RunReports Modify data EditData Visualize data ViewData etc At run time of the application the respective rights can be checked and correspondent actions can be performed Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 202 t VFX Define Activation Rules MAIN PJX Security Key Rights Description p Ar cR RR Lg iReports Lg Js geom Cancel user rights are available for use at run time as properties of the global object goProgram SecurityRights so they can be accessed from any part of the application While the application is still not activated all user rights have the value 1 When the application is activated a user right has value 1 when the
148. d project all subsequent projects are stored under this path too By default is generated a project folder named VFX APPLICATION followed by a sequential number Database Name Enter the Name for your new Database Container DBC Type the name of your Database Container without any path and file extensions When your application will access a remote data source and will use only CursorAdapter for data access you can leave this field empty Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 32 On the page named 2 About enter the following 2 About Enter the title of your application and the data which will be displayed in the About dialog of your application Application title Visual Extend Application Version Version Copyright Copyright dFPUG c o ISYS GmbH Click on next to proceed Application title Enter the Caption for your Main Application Window This caption will set the constant CAP APPLICATION TITLE in the include file USERTXT H for you Version Enter the Version Number used in the about dialog of your Application This will set the constant CAP LBLVERSION in the include file USERTXT H for you Copyright Enter the Copyright Information used in the about dialog of your Application This will set the constant CAP LBLCOPYRIGHTINFORMATION in the include file USERTXT H for you On the page named 3 Options you can set following options
149. d version update for modules e Support of remote administration new And then there is our new Web Service for your simplified registration of Visual Extend plus the requesting of replacement keys and but we will not treat the entire manual in the introduction Let us only consider one subject of prominent importance to Visual Extend in a little more detail the subject of Builders 1 3 Even more productive with new Builders in Visual Extend 11 0 Provided you are already working with Visual Extend you will find out in almost every item of the following list of functions how it will facilitate your daily work If you are not yet using Visual Extend you will at least realize how big the current update really is Please read e All properties of the application object can be called on in the extended options of the Application Wizard and later they can be changed as well in the Application Builder e Inthe Project Properties you can define the selectable classes for all Builders and you can also define them as default and as AutoComplete in one go Project Toolbox offers you all project specific classes in an overview and for direct drag amp drop or see right mouse button for direct instantiating e The Project Documenting Wizard gives you an interface to a special VFX version of PDM for the documentation of your application e Project Update Wizard permits the semi automatic instead of the manual updating of existing pro
150. dItemToKeyExprsArray loItem CTRL D Left loItem Alignment 0 Used as KEY ID of the menu item loItem cItemKey MSG4 loItem ToolTipText Displays D in message box CTRL D BINDEVENT loItem Execute goProgram oMenuBar onItemExecute Adds the second popup group 2 goProgram oMenuBar cntTabMenu AddPopup Wait Windows lnTabIndex loPopup2 nColumns 1 loPopup2 Width 200 Adds the first item loItem loPopup2 AddPopupItem Wait window W NORM W This cntTabMenu AddItemToKeyExprsArray loItem CTRL W Right LoItem Alignment 1 Used as KEY ID of the menu item loItem cItemKey WWI1 loItem ToolTipText Displays Wait window W CTRL W BINDEVENT loItem Execute goProgram oMenuBar onItemExecute Adds the second item loItem loPopup2 AddPopupItem Wait window X NORM X This cntTabMenu AddItemToKeyExprsArray loItem CTRL X Right loItem Alignment 1 Used as KEY ID of the menu item LoItem cItemKey WW2 LoItem ToolTipText Displays Wait window X CTRL X BINDEVENT loItem Execute goProgram oMenuBar onItemExecute Code in onSelectItem Appl vcx cAppRibbonTbrTabMenu DODEFAULT PRIVATE paUserSource AEVENTS paUserSource 0 lcItemKey paUserSource l cItemKey DO CASE CASE lcItemKey MSG1 MESSAGEBOX 1 Stop 0 16 This Caption CASE lcItemKey MSG2 MESSAGEBOX 2 Question 0 32 This Cap
151. database In the listbox Required Fields List can be added any desired fields from the Field Assistant Window At initiating of form control source of all controls will be checked against required fields list All controls with a controlsource corresponding to the list will be treated as required fields Form Builder stores the list of required fields in property cRequiredFields of the form In Init Properties textbox can be entered a semicolon separated list of properties and corresponding values for every property in following format PropertyName cExpression PropertyName cExpression At initiating time for all required fields this settings will be applied In case of sample screenshot above for all controls which have required fields as control source Forecolor property will be set to red when controls are initiated If more than one properties need to be set separate the list with semicolon character For example if you d like to show required fields initially with bold font in red fore color and light yellow background you need to write following expression in Init Properties textbox FontBold T ForeColor RGB 255 0 0 BackColor RGB 255 255 196 This is very good way to show the end users which fields must be filled The value of textbox Init Properties will be stored into cRequiredFieldInitProps property of the form Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 66 When data is sav
152. dataenvironment is based on a table in the column Order can be chosen an index tag of the table For a simple form for editing data from a table it is enough to add this table into the dataenvironment Afterwards using VFX Form Builder to the form can be added controls The VFX Form Builder reads the data environment and allows controls generation based on the fields of the tables At run time dataenvironment will be checked to determine whether a Tableupdate and or a Tablerevert must be performed for tables 2 5 VFX Form Builder With this builder are generated the necessary controls for the form Thereby can be selected base VFX class for each control as well as some properties can be set Along with creation of a form in the table Vfxfopen dbf automatically will be inserted a row so that the form can be started using the Open Dialog BE VEX CDataFormPage Builder 7 Form Name Caption Field Assistant frmCustomers Kunden Table Edit Pages Grid Page Form Options View Parameters Linked Tables Required Fields Report customers 5 Page Count Page Title Page Picture Page BackColor Fields Always Top V bearbeiten uu um customerid customemame Reorder elements Z Right Label Alignment Justified Tab Add colon to labels Edit page 1 address i contactperson bearbeiten phone Fields List Control Type ctextbox Y EI customers custo
153. ded After adding the data record the OnPostInsert method is called Here can be entered data into the new data record for example with the command Replace If the OnPostInsert method returns F a Tablerevert is invoked and thereby the new data record will be immediately deleted again An elegant way to intervene in the sequence of functions of methods without having to change the classes is the use of Hooks An Eventhook is inserted in most of VFX methods If the Eventhooks is activated in each Eventhook the function Eventhook Handler is called As parameters to this function will be passed the name of the calling method a reference on the current object and a reference on the current form Then through a Case construction can be implemented individual code Thereby can be affected the sequence of VFX of functions execution in each practically place The concept of the Hooks was extended in 11 0 So far it was possible trough a Hook to implement your own code block within a VFX method Via the return value of the Hooks you could control whether the still following VFX code in the method should be executed further or not The return value which the VFX method supplied thereby could not be affected and was hard predefined in VFX Now with the extended Hooks in VFX 11 0 the return value of the method of the Hook can be additionally controlled Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 134
154. der to avoid orphan records in the database 10 5 2 The class CComboPicklist This class is designated for easy creation and maintenance of pick lists Using this class it is possible to define many pick lists without need to create pick table for every particular list The class cComboPicklist uses two VFX system tables Vfxpdef dbf and Vfxplist dbf The table Vfxpdef dbf holds definition for pick lists It contains one row for every defined pick list For picklist definition can be written code that will be executed when user makes a selection This is a common code and executes regardless of specific list item that is selected In Vfxplist dbf table you can write more specific code that will be executed only if that item is selected Pick items are defined in Vfxplist dbf table Field Picklist is the identifier of the picklist definition and is foreign key to Vfxpdef dbf table The fields Code and Descript are values used for creating the list Depending on picklist definition only Code column or both Code and Descript columns are displayed in the list Fields Value and Proccode are designated for developer s purposes In Proccode field you can write a specific code that will be executed when that particular item is selected For every instance of cComboPicklist class you can define if adding new records in the pick table is allowed and the user level required for user to be allowed to add new values Properties nParentID ID key valu
155. different data sources by switching between defined data sources The file Config vfx can contain multiple connections definitions When multiple connection definitions are saved on application start the end user sees a selection dialog This feature is equal with the ability to specify many databases in the system table Vfxpath dbf well know from the former VFX versions 22 2 Concept of new applications When with VFX 11 0 is started a new application development the new data access concept should be seriously taken into consideration If the data access of the newly developed VFX 11 0 application is exclusively based on the class cBaseDataAccess thanks to its portability it is possible later to switch between different data sources without any problems Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 182 In this way the application development can start with using a DBC as datasource With VFX CursorAdapter Wizard are be created CursorAdapter classes correspondent to every table in the database These CursorAdapter classes will be used then as a datasources in all forms This data source will not become data source for the compiled application It is used for building Cursor Adapter classes only When application runs the actual DataSource will be read from Config vfx file In this way you can set different data source for the particular end users 22 2 1 Choosing the underlying class and class library V
156. e 120 17 9 Filtering The visible data scope in a form can be narrowed by setting a filter expression For this purpose VFX provides a ready to use dialog You can include as many fields as you need linked with and or or logical clause It is possible to combine many different search criteria The search criteria will be saved per user and form And are available to be used on the following application executions In Search dialog the user can enter only valid values For every chosen data type in the Operator column are available only operators which can be applied to this data type It is possible to enter values from same data type Search Operator i In the column Value are placed many controls The property CurrentControl of this column is changed depending of the data type of the field chosen in the column Field When a fields of Character data type is chosen in the column Value is shown a textbox control where can be entered any characters Additionally is available an operator Contains In this case the filter expression is created with operator The rightmost column in the grid is used in this case to specify if string comparison will be case sensitive When a Numeric fields is selected in column Field in the column Value is shown a textbox that will allow the user to enter digits only When a field of Date or Datetime data type is selected the Inputmask of the column Value will b
157. e Domain name can be changed arbitrarily often and with different methods Detailed descriptions to all methods can be found on the website www dyndns org The VFX application calls an URL to register the actual IP address of the customer s PC The URL has the following format http username password members dyndns org nic update hostname myCompan y dnsalias com When this URL is entered in the Internet Explorer an HTML page with the word Good is loaded Because the Internet browser sends the own IP address to the server it is not required to pass the IP address separately The Internet server must know to which address the answer must send back Dyndns uses automatically this IP address for the registration of the Subdomain 27 4 The remote support application Radmin The remote control application Radmin can be downloaded by the website www radmin com The documentation is available on this website also Radmin is a shareware application and can be registered at a reasonable price At the moment the full version which is necessary for the Supporter workplace costs 35 US A license for a customer costs 15 US Customer licenses can be acquired only in bundles from 50 licenses Like VFX Radmin is also protected using an activation key If the customer wants to use the remote support Radmin can be used immediately If after the 30 day trial period an attempt to establish a connection is made the Supporter is called on to transfer a
158. e VFP Menu Designer that does not support all menu properties You can create multilingual menus by marking the check box in the Create New Menu dialog or later by clicking correspondent button in the toolbar or choosing the option in the menu t VFX Menu Designer vfxmenu vmx D 3 a _ cmo pol fees en 1 1 O Pesan soekma eoe lt Element FILE Parentname Font Arial Prompt text A am Prompt constant Cl Bold v Enabled StatusBar text Creates opens prints data or quits this program C italic v Visible StatusBar constant O Underline Key label ALT F C Strikethrough C MRU f Color Scheme Key text ALT F ytet Markchar m Kevtext constant SkipFor Cl Use System Colors A menu contained in a VFX project can be opened with the VMD directly from the VFP Project Manager Alternatively menus can be opened also from the VMD using the Open button in the toolbar or using the appropriate menu option In the Opening Dialog you can chose between the menu types mnx and vmx If a menu which was not edited with the VMD is opened it is automatically converted into the vmx format The open menu can be edited visually Man can add and delete elements and edit properties for the particular elements New menu pads can be added by clicking on the
159. e cursor are used as series data Fields containing series data should be of numerical data type Additionally you have to provide series titles which are displayed as legend text Properties cAliasName Alias of the cursor contained data series cGraphTitle Title for the graph cLabelField Name of the field which will be used to set data labels in the graph cLegendTitles A comma separated list containing series titles IShowLegend When the value of this property is set to 7 a legend will be displayed in the graph nGraphType Graph type 3DBAR 1 2DBAR 2 3DLINE 3 2DLINE 4 3D AREA 5 2D AREA 6 3DSTEP 7 2D STEP 8 3D COMBINATION 14 2D PIE 16 2DXY Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 135 Methods DrawGraph Draws the graph using provided data and control s settings All series data labels and titles are set accordingly control settings All data points and legend are actualized OnPrint Prints a copy of the graph using the hardcopy report Hardcopy frx 18 20 1 Example Let s assume part of the application creates the cursor shown below It is required to use it for creating a business graph j Yearlysales Categoryname Averageprice The class cBusinessGraph can be placed in any form For the example data shown above should be set the following properties of the object cAliasName YearlySales cGraphTitle
160. e from Vfxpdef dbf table Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 91 Methods Addnewcode this method is executed when the end user adds a new value in the pick list table If it is needed to perform additional processing the code should be placed in this method For cComboPicklist class it is possible to define two different code snippets In Vfxpdef table ProcCode memo field and in Vfxplist table in ProcCode memo field The code Vfxpdef ProcCode table is common for the cComboPicklist and is executed every time when the selected item of the Combobox is changed The code in Vfxplist ProcCode table is specific for the particular list item and is executed only when this item is selected from the list For every entry in Vfxplist dbf table you can define if this is an active entry or not Using this approach you do not need to delete entries which will not be used in the future and thus to cause orphan records in your database When the field will not be used anymore just set the values in its Active field to F Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 92 11 VFX Builders and Wizards for Localization 11 1 VFX LangSetup Builder The VFX LangSetup Builder automates the creation of the needed code within the Langsetup method You will need this if you have to supply your application in more than one language The goal of this builder is to extract all potentia
161. e in the VFX Form Builder described earlier in this documentation Here you define the Options for the OneToMany Form VFX COneToMany Builder Form Name Caption Master Table frmOrders Orders caorders v Edit Pages Grid Page Form Option Children View parame Linked Table Required Report Report Name Child Form Can Edit Save Restore Positions C Has More Functions Can Insert C Add SpeedBar Control C Has Linked Child Form Can Copy Auto Sync Child Form Can Delete Put In Last File Menu Multi Instance Put In Window Menu Close with ESC Key Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 72 On the page named Children you define how your child grid s or pages containing child data will look like VFX COneToMany Builder Form Name Caption Master Table frmOrders Orders caorders v Edit Pages Grid Page Form Option Children parame Linked Table Required Report Page Count Page Title Child Table 1 caorderdetails v Inplace Editing Ins Cane Page Picture Page BackColor C Edit Page C Reorder elements C Add colon to labels Pagel Fields Selected EF caorderdetails productid caproducts productname Control Type cpicktextbox caorderdetails quantity Header Productid __ caorderdetails price Grid Class echildgr
162. e main table where the cPickAlternate class will store the key value This field contains the foreign key to the Picklist table 10 4 VFX CPickTextBox Builder Visual Extend offers a Builder which helps you to create full featured Picklist Controls To call the VFX CPickTextBox Builder select the column in the child grid which should become a picklist control and select the option VFX Power Builders from the VFX Menu Window Help AFP Project gt Power Builders Form Activation Data Class Switcher Get Object Name of selected item Help Wizard The VFX CPickTextBox Builder offers a similar user interface like the normal VFX CPickField Builder and is also fully reentrant VFX CPickTextBox Builder TextBox Field Update Options Pick Dialog Caption Maintenence Form select an item ITEM Pick Table Name Pick Table Index Tag f nm Item v primary Return Field Name Code Use STR for Num Fields strlitemid Format Input Mask Status Bar Text 999999999 Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 88 VFX CPickTextBox Builder TextBox Field Update Options Update Source Fields Target Table Name Parent Update T arget Fields VFX CPickTextBox Builder TextBox Field Update Options Work on View C Is a Key Field Pick Dialog Class VF
163. e set accordingly When a field of Logical data type is chosen in the Combobox in the column Value can be chosen between True and False In this case use does not enter a value manually In such case it is not possible for end user to enter non valid value Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 121 17 10 Layout The layout of the application created with VFX 11 0 is improved with new XP style icons New icons are developed for toolbar and menu entries Customize Toolbar C Large icons Show ScreenTips on toolbars Show shortcut keys in ScreenTips Application behaviour Form close with escape ClAskto save v Auto Edit C Enter in grid means edit mode v Auto Skip v Auto Pick Save window settings Users are able to change their personalized layout setting under the menu option Tools Customize It is possible to switch between large or small toolbar icon size They can set whether tool tip texts for toolbar buttons will be displayed When Show screen tips option is marked additionally can be specified if hot keys will be displayed in tool tip texts For example the hotkey combination for the button New is CTRL N OS s New for layout of VFX forms is the ability to select a bitmap as background for a page in the pageframe in all data forms The picture can be set in VEX Form Builders In VFX Form Builders it is also possible instead of setting background picture fo
164. e than ever before Page 115 The Child data rows are edited directly in the Grid Only if you are in Edit or Insert mode of the master table you can write into the child grid insert new child records or delete the currently selected child record All operations on the child records are handled using the optimistic table buffering If you select undo changes the changes made to all child records of the current master record are also reverted If you select save changes all changes applied to the master record and to all child records of the current master will be saved A click on the empty area of the child grid adds a new child record When the child data is based on a view or on a CursorAdapter incremental search can be performed for the child data One of the most interesting features of VFX is the special Picklist control which you can easily add to any of your Child Grids using the VFX CPickTextBoxt Builder The Picklists can be accessed in edit or insert mode By a double click in the CpickTextBox or by pressing the function key 9 the Picklist will be shown 17 6 Printing By default in all forms can be printed a list without need to have report prepared for this purpose At run time VFX application creates a temporary report based on the appearance on the search page Grid Report Advanced Title Font Delayed Courier New v Times New Roma Details Title Font Details Font Times New Roma v 8 Bl
165. e than ever before Page 30 6 Generate a New Application using the VFX Application Wizard 6 1 Objective If you want to start a new project you could set up the whole directory structure manually copy all the needed support files like the class library some standard forms some configuration files bitmaps and so on That is where the VFX Application Wizard pays off it does the whole set up of a new project automatically in the language of your choice It also sets the most important application class properties and defines the most important include file constants to reduce to minimum your manual work 6 2 Preparation Close all forms and make sure you do not have open any class libraries of the VFX project The best is to quit Visual FoxPro and restart it before you run the application Wizard 6 3 The VFX Application Wizard Select the option Project Application Wizard in the VFX 11 0 Menu Window Help AFX gt Poem l Application Wizard Run Application Builder Project Properti Power Builders ie ee i roject ToolBox LangSetup Builder ich Project Documenting Eorm gt Update Project Activation gt Language Management Data gt Project Backup VEX Class Switcher Installation Wizard Get Object Name of selected item Help Wizard Update Activation Wizard VFX Help Or start the Application Wizard from the VFX Task Pane by clicking on the icon link fim Task P
166. e the parent form and Form2 could be the child form and in Form2 you would see only those records which match a certain criteria which might be the link to the parent table in Form If for example you have a Form in which you want to provide the ability to process the orders of a customer check this checkbox and have VFX Form Builder automatically have set up the form as a child form This will automatically put the needed lines of code in the nit Event of the form All you have to do is review this init code and adapt it to your specific needs For further details please refer to the topic VFX Parent Child Builder later in this document NOTE Although if you have a form which will act as both a Child Form as well as a Normal Form you should set it up as a Child Form marking Is Child Form There is no need to setup two Forms for i e Orders With one form you can perfectly handle the scenario All Orders as well as Orders for a particular Customer Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 62 Has More Functions If the form you are currently creating will call other forms or actions you have to check this checkbox This will automatically generate the needed code in the OnMore method of your form You simply have to review the OnMore code and adapt it to your specific needs Normally you will have a couple of actions which will be presented in a form and the user selects the desired option H
167. e usage 22 9 INDEX FIERS PL 23 DB2 APPLICATION PROGRAMMING CONSIDERATIONS 23 1 DATA TYPES CONVERSION 8 22 2 0 2 0 000000000 000002020 23 2 SQL LANGUAGE SYNTAX AND SEMANTICS ccscscssssssssesesscscsescssscsesesscsesescsceusucscscscsescseseeeeees Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 7 23 2 T Colum and table dliases 2 322 tte dd alle bea fedt agita 23 22 50 FUNCTIONS ce EET ERE paier 23 2 9 J Sitings ptOCESSIRB zur snae EE de a d 23 2 4 Datetime processing functions 23 2 5 NULL Values As Be ei is coasts EE RR 23 2 6 Unqualified columns eee 23 27 SSELE GE INTO iere nn sate Reigen TIED ERR E 23 2 6 ANSI JONS n e RE ORE DESI rn pere IHR E TREE NP ANE 23 2 0 Autoincrement sse e tete ge 23 2 10 Referential constraints 23 3 INDEXES 23 4 DATA ACCESS 23 5 ACTIVEX DATA OBJECT ADO nn sans 23 6 ESTABLISHING CONNECTION 22 2 400000010000000000000 0000555 nenne ener ns ener nnne rnnt 23 6 1 Example for OLE DB connection strings 23 6 2 Example for ODBC connection strings 23 7 DIFFERENCES NOT CONSIDERED IN THIS DOCUMENT 193 23 8 VFP SQL SERVER AND DB2 UDB DATA TYPES 2 2 193 23 9 DB 2 SUPPORT m
168. e values will be drawn inside the shapes of the chart ShowValueZero Forces display of the line for Y 0 even if it does not fall between the minimum and maximum values SingleData ReadOnly tells if the current chart is based on single data eg Pie Doughnut Single Bars SourceAlias The name of the alias that contains the needed fields that will create the chart TicLength For Bars Lines Area or Point charts determines the length in pixels of the tic marks used in the scales and in the legend axis Fields The Fields collection object is used to group a set of properties related to a specific column It contains the following properties Color Field Value Legend Shape ShowValuesOnShape The color property for the first column of the Fields collection Fields 1 Color represents the RGB value of the color from the first column chart This is the main color that will be used to create the gradient colors chart when the property ColorType 3 This collection is created on Init of cGDIGraph using following properties cColorContent Comma separated List of Numeric values the RGB value of the color to be used in the nan current n column cFieldValueContent Comma separated List of field names from the data cursor defined in the SourceAlias property that contains the numeric values that will create the chart for n column This is the most important property to be set in any kind of charts cLegendCo
169. e width The two columns will have width 150 LoPopupl Width 300 Adds the first item LoItem loPopupl AddPopupItem Message A NORM A This cntTabMenu AddItemToKeyExprsArray loItem CTRL A loItem cPicture email bmp loItem cDisabledPicture emaildis bmp loItem cSkipForExp TYPE Screen ActiveForm Left loItem Alignment 0 Used as KEY ID of the menu item loItem cItemKey MSGi LoItem ToolTipText Displays in message box CTRL A BINDEVENT loItem Execute goProgram oMenuBar onItemExecute Adds the second item loItem loPopupl AddPopupItem Message B NORM B Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 174 This cntTabMenu AddItemToKeyExprsArray loItem CTRL B Left loItem Alignment 0 Used as KEY ID of the menu item loItem cItemKey MSG2 loItem ToolTipText Displays in message box CTRL B BINDEVENT loItem Execute goProgram oMenuBar onItemExecute Adds the Third item loItem loPopupl AddPopupItem Message C NORM C This cntTabMenu AddItemToKeyExprsArray loItem CTRL C Left loItem Alignment 0 Used as KEY ID of the menu item loltem cItemKey MSG3 loItem ToolTipText Displays in message box CTRL C BINDEVENT loItem Execute goProgram oMenuBar onItemExecute Adds the Fourth item loItem loPopupl AddPopupItem Message D NORM D This cntTabMenu Ad
170. e window with the caption AFPL Ghostscript Setup Log is opened This window shows the installation process and the script execution must wait until this process finishes C 30 T T T Ghostscript Waits until the window with the caption Ghostscript appears This window shows the message that the Setup were finished successful Closes the last window With this the Ghostscript installation is completed 18 26 CCreatePDF class This class is creates report files in PDF format It receives as parameters the alias name of the used cursor name of the resultant PDF file that will be created name of report file to be used for the report creation as well as an optional expression that will be used as FOR clause to filter out report data To be able to create a file in PDF format it is necessary GhostScript and a Postscript Printer driver to be installed on the computer The class checks if GhostScript is already installed Otherwise GhostScript will be automatically downloaded from the Internet and installed The cDownload class is used to perform download from the Internet In the memo field VFXSys Install GS is a placed a script which will be used Ghostscript downloading and installation Refer to the description of the class cDownload for more details If there is no Postscript printer driver installed on the computer the class installs the standard Windows printer driver according to the value stored in the goProgram PSPrint
171. eBitPerPixelGridFit N SingleBitPerPixel Each character is drawn using its glyph bitmap Hinting is not used Each character is drawn using its antialiased glyph bitmap with hinting 3 AntiAliasGridFit Much better quality due to antialiasing but at a higher performance cost Each character is drawn using its antialiased glyph bitmap without 4 AntiAlias hinting Better quality due to antialiasing Stem width differences may be noticeable because hinting is turned off Each character is drawn using its glyph ClearType bitmap with hinting 5 ClearTypeGridFit The highest quality setting Used to take advantage of ClearType font features Scale The increment between tick marks on the vertical axis If zero this increment is calculated automatically and will hopefully create legends that ScaleAutoFormat Automatically sets the ScaleLegend Format property ScaleBackAlpha Determines the transparency level of the chart background bars and lines 0 Transparent 255 Opaque Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 154 ScaleBackBarsType Determines the background scale type where 0 none 1 horizontal bars 2 vertical bars 3 both ScaleBackColor The RGB value for the Background scale bar color ScaleBackLinesDash The Dash style of the GDI pen used to draw the background scale The accepted values range from 0 to 4 following the standard dash styles
172. earch and other VFX Power Grid Features do not work Make sure you called the Grid Builder as described in the User Manual Incremental Search says Feature not available You must set the buffering mode to 3 otherwise no IDX files can be generated You probably have it set to 5 OneToMany Form does not refresh the childtables when I move the record in the parent Make sure that you set the OneToMany Relation correctly in the form s Data Environment All you have to do is to drag the relation from the parent primary key to the child s foreign key Don t set any other properties Tip Make sure that you did NOT set the OneToMany property of your OneToMany relation in the form s Data Environment to true Setting this property to true mimics the SET SKIP TO command and therefore is NOT at all what we want My picklist does not work with numeric fields Make sure to set the CPickfield class property cReturnExpr to TRANSFORM Field rather than Field The rest will work as with character fields Changes in PRG s do not go through Issue CLEAR PROGRAM and retry Or better yet set the edit option to Compile before saving Project Rebuild failed If you have some library elements in another language than the desired or have general concerns that the project did not recompile correctly start the rebuild all option from the VFX application manager described above Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 165
173. eclare gcString nvarchar 4000 gcFindString nvarchar 4000 select gcString NJohann Wolfgang von Goethe 1749 1832 gcFindString von select dbo AT gcFindString gcString default Anzeige 17 set gcFindString select dbo AT gcFindString gcString default Anzeige 0 case sensitive 30 2 ATC Gibt die numerische Anfangsposition des ersten Auftretens eines Zeichenausdrucks innerhalb eines anderen Zeichenausdrucks zur ck ohne die Gro Kleinschreibung dieser beiden Ausdr cke zu ber cksichtigen 30 2 1 Syntax ATC cSearchExpression cExpressionSearched nOccurrence Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 223 30 2 2 Parameter cSearchExpression Gibt den Zeichenausdruck an nach dem in cExpressionSearched sucht Der Ausdruck kann von beliebiger Gr e sein cExpressionSearched Gibt den Zeichenausdruck an in dem mit cSearchExpression gesucht wird Der Ausdruck kann von beliebiger Gr e sein nOccurrence Gibt an nach dem wie vielten Vorkommen ersten zweiten dritten usw von cSearchExpression in cExpressionSearched gesucht werden soll Standardm ig sucht ATCO nach dem ersten Vorkommen von cSearchExpression nOccurrence 1 Durch Angabe von nOccurrence k nnen Sie weitere Vorkommen von cSearchExpression in cExpressionSearched suchen 30 2 3 R ckgabewert Smallint 30 2 4 Hinweise sucht im zweiten Zeichenausdruck nac
174. ed values entered in all the required fields are checked for valid input If a missing value is encountered the properties of corresponding control will be changed according expression entered in Failure Properties textbox This expression is constructed in same way as the expression for Init Properties The value of Failure Properties textbox is saved in property cRequiredFieldFailureProps of the form As long as not all required fields is given a value data entered in the form will not be saved 9 4 7 Report VFX CDataFormPage Builder Form Name Caption frmParentDocs ParentDocs Edit Pages Grid Page Form Options View parameters Linked Tables Required Fields Report Report Fields List Use Grid Fields For Report Parent Date Parent Descr t er ee Caption OverParentcode Parent Parentcode Width 178 in pixels Caption Parentl Parentcode Input Mask lt Selected C Summarize v C Use DBC Definitions Overwrite Font Often it is necessary to include in printed report some fields that are not needed in the grid field list In other cases you may need to include in grid page fields which do not need to be printed Report page allows you to select fields that will be listed in on Advanced page of Grid report dialog On Advanced page of Grid report dialog user can additionally specify which fields should be included in the report and
175. ed rights of all user groups that he is member of Users with administrator rights userlevel 1 can define user groups and specify access rights to every user group for every form in the application User rights are defined for all forms included in Vfxfopen table Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 43 User Groups Groups List Description Test Group Members Rights Insert Copy Egi Delete Print Parent Documents Visit our Website OneToManyPageFrame ParentChildEdit IS jJ IST IST IST IST IST jJ IST IST ST IST JE IST ST IST At run time is created a global object goUserRights This object contains child objects for every form of the application Names of these objects correspond to the form name Every child object has properties corresponding to user rights for the particular form deletepermit editpermit newpermit printpermit and viewpermit At run time the properties of the object goUserRights and its members will look in this way Name Value goUserRights Object frminvoices Object deletepermit editpermit newpermit printpermit viewpermit frmorders deletepermit editpermit newpermit printpermit viewpermit D m bject aaa 404444 2 rere ere or eer If a particular user is not a member of any user group access rights are defined by the user s security level as in for
176. eise Siehe auch lower upper 30 12 5 Beispiel select dbo PROPER N JOHANN CARL FRIEDRICH Anzeige Johann Carl Friedrich Gau 30 13 Wandelt einen numerischen Ausdruck von 1 bis 3999 in r mische Ziffern um 30 13 1 Syntax ARABTOROMAN tNum 30 13 2 Parameter tNum Zahl 30 13 3 R ckgabewert Varchar 15 30 13 4 Beispiel select dbo ARABTOROMAN 1777 Anzeige MDCCLXXVII 30 14 Wandelt r mische Ziffern von I bis MMMCMXCIX in einen numerischen Ausdruck um 30 14 1 Syntax ROMANTOARAB tcRomanNumber 30 14 2 Parameter tcRomanNumber varchar 15 r mische Ziffern 30 14 3 R ckgabewert Smallint 30 14 4 Beispiel select dbo ROMANTOARAB MDCCCLV Anzeige 1855 Mehr als 5000 Entwickler haben bereits meine Funktionen gedownloadet Ich hoffe dass sie auch f r Sie n tzlich sind Um mehr Informationen ber die Zeichenketten UDFs in Transact SQL zu erhalten besuchen Sie bitte Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 231 User Defined string functions Transact SQL 7 0 2000 2005 http www universalthread com wconnect we dll 2 54 33 27115 User Defined string functions Transact SQL MS SQL Server 2005 Common Language Runtime CLR VB Net C Net C Net with source code http www universalthread com wconnect wc d11 2 54 33 29527 und http nikiforov developpez com allemand
177. elopment Framework Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 22 German Spanish Visual Extend Applikation t Mi aplicaci n Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras Fenster Hilfe Archivo Editar Ver Favoritos Herramientas Ventana Ayuda 3 R ckg ngig Strg Z B w D Deshacer Ctrl Z D B is 1 Speichern Strg S ki Grabar Ces d Ausschneiden Strg X Cortar CtrleX Kopieren Strg C Copiar Ctrl C Einf gen Strat A Pegar Ctrl V Bearbeiten Strg E Editar Ctri E Neuer Datensatz Strg N Nuevo CtrleN E Kopiere Datensatz Duplicar Registro a L sche Datensatz Strg D 2 Borrar Strg F y Buscar Ctrl F Weitere Funktionen English Bulgarian Visual Extend Application Visual Extend File Edit View Favorites Tools Window Help 29 Undo Ctrl Z amp B D CTRL Z 2 g e Gries CTRL S Cut Ctrl X d CTRL X Copy Ctrl c CTRL C i Baste Ctrl V CTRL Y 2 Edit Ctri E CTRL E D New Ctri N
178. enhanced for better performance while loading For every user when the form is closed in the resource table Vfxres dbfis saved current state of all TreeView nodes expanded or collapsed On next opening of the form all nodes of the TreeView control are shown in the state in which they were when the form was closed It is possible now the grid report in forms based on cTreeviewForm and cTreeviewOneToMany form classes to be printed as a treeview structure A context menu with New Rename and Delete options is added to the Treeview control 17 14 Document management with the class cDocumentManagement The new class CDocumentManagement is designated to maintain all kind of documents i e Word Excel PowerPoint related to application data The CDocumentManagement class is a container that manages child records related to current record of main table It allows the end user to open related documents and also to send them as attachment in an e mail The class can easy be added to the existing forms Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 124 ParentDocs ADV REC DOC 1 CAMY DOCUMENTS Advertisement SBC585 PDF ch PdfFile BH ACCOUNT DOC DOCUMENTS Accounting standards Folder Description 17 15 About Dialog A link label is placed in the About dialog for displaying the End user license agreement EULA This link invokes a dialog form where the EULA can be re
179. entation of this function can be found in the class cVFXActivate in the method CheckActState Return Value 0 Operation completed successfully 1 Invalid activation key length 2 Invalid activation key structure 3 Encryption error GetFileCreationDateTime cFileName Returns the creation date time of a file An example for the implementation of this function can be found in the class cVFXActivate in the method nit cFileName Name of the checked file Return Value A date time value as string GetSysInfo This Hex2bin This cActPattern This function creates the installation key An example for the implementation of this function can be found in the class cVFXActivate in the method CheckActState 26 2 Data backup and archiving CreateZipArchive tcPath tcFileMask tcArchiveFullPathName tcFeedBackFunction tnCompressionLevel tlRecurseSubfolders tcPassword Creates a Zip archive file An example for the implementation of this function can be found in the class cArchive in the method CreateArchive tcPath Path to the folder to be archived tcFileMask Names of the files to be archived tcArchiveFullPathName Full pathname for the created Zip archive tcFeedBackFunction Name of a function or a method which will be called from CreateZipArchive for progress feedback tcFeedBackFunction cCurrentOperatedFile nState nAllFilesSize nZIPedFilesSize nArchiveCurrentSize This function or method wil
180. enu can be fast extended with new menu element by comparing with the menu from the VFX 11 0 installation Check the new Vfxmain prg and make by hand necessary changes according your application In former VFX versions were used public variables for all fields from tables Vfxsys dbf and Vfxuser dbf In VFX 11 0 properties of an object are used instead Example Old gu_myFeld New goUser myFeld Old gs_myFeld New goSystem myFeld You can find all usages of gu_ and gs_ with the VFP 9 Code Reference Tool and easy and fast change all occurrences Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 106 14 VFX Builders and Wizards for Documentation 14 1 PDM Project Documenting With VFX is delivered a special for VFX developers Project and Database Documenting Tool PDM The PDM can be started from VFX 11 0 menu option Project Project Documenting It creates fully automatically a complete technical documentation The documentation is created in HTML format and contains many cross references Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 107 15 Other VFX Builders and Wizards 15 1 VFX Menu Designer VFX Menu Designer VMD is a tool for quick development of menus The VMD is a visual designer where while development the menu is shown in same way as it will look like later at run time The VMD makes menu development simpler and allows you to set all menu properties contrariwise of th
181. eorder elements CET Parameter Name Parameter Caption Overid Format Input Mask 999999999 Status Bar C Use DBC Definitions Overwrite Font On page View Parameters can be defined controls for entering view parameters Similar to cAskViewArg form class end users can fill in values at run time The button Requery in the standard toolbar is used to refresh the view This approach avoids invoking of another forms for parameters input Input controls for view parameters are placed at upper part of the form above the data pageframe They are always visible and user can change arguments and invoke data reloading For these controls a parameter name is specified instead of ControlSource property Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 64 9 4 5 Linked Tables VFX CDataFormPage Builder Form Name Caption mParentDocs ParentDocs L Edit Pages Grid Page Form Options View parameters Required Fields Parameter List Master Table Parent ID Filed Parentid C Use DBC Definitions v Overwrite Font VFX 11 0 forms allow you to define additional list of tables which are 1 1 related to the main table This feature gives the developers good support for more complex database design without need to write additional code to maintenance referential integrity Having described the relational
182. er a value besides he can only choose from the picklist Is Key Field Check this option if you want to define this pickfield as a key field which is only accessible when entering a new record and then no more like the textbox class ckeyfield This sets the cPickField property IKeyField to T OK The selected options will be used and put in the selected picklist object Apply Does the same as OK but does not quit the CPickField Builder dialog Cancel Cancels the VFX CPickField Builder process Any selections and entries will be lost Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 85 This builder is fully reentrant too This means that during the development cycle you can call this builder as many times as needed without loosing any of the settings which have already been defined If you use a Picklist Control on a form it might look similar to this Kunde ALFKI Alfreds Futterkiste The user can call the Picklist by e clicking on the command button next the Picklist Input Field normally a three dot caption Icon e doubleclicking in the Picklist Input Field or the Description or e pressing the Function Key F9 Si Customer Address Nedko Jordanov 16 Park Street Varna From the Picklist Dialog there are like in any VFX Power Grid features like incremental search with autosort sorting by doubleclicking on the column header change column width
183. er with the customer list a version list is downloaded The purpose of this version list is to handle application update dependent on the program version currently installed at the customer side Both lists can be edited from VFX 11 0 menu under Activation Manage Application Updates option t VFX Manage Application Update MAIN PJX Versions Customers Application Version Application UpdateURL www mwvupdatesite mwvApplication hppVversion201 zip www mwvupdatesite myApplication hppVersion250 zip X Add Row Delete Row In the column Application Version is entered the application version number In the column Application Update URL is the link to the file that need to be downloaded in order to update that particular application version At customer side the actualization process executes in two steps In the first step is executed a download script that downloads the customer list and the version list The name of the file containing the customer list is UpdateCustomer vfx The version list file is named UpdateVersion vfx The download script for these both files is in the field UpdateApp in the table Vfxsys dbf In the second step after both files are downloaded and decrypted it is checked whether the user is entitled to update application The download link for the updated application version according his current application version is obtained from the file UpdateVersion vfx 18 29 VFP Toolbox for developers
184. erTolnstall property Usually this installation does not need user interaction The report will be passed to the Postscript driver and the result is saved into a file Then the Ghostscript transforms this postscript file into a PDF file 18 27 CEmail class This class gives the developer the ability to send e mails just by passing a few parameters to the method Send Email Report In addition to this to the e mails can be attached additional report exported files in PDF format The AddAttachment method can be called as many times as needed The alias name of your data table or view name of the created file formatting report name and optional expression to be used as FOR clause should be passed Then the method Send Email Reports method must be called All PDF files will be created and attached Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 163 to the created e mail Also the files which you have previously created and passed to the AddAttachment method without report name and alias name parameters will be attached 18 28 Application update The possibilities for the application update at the customer side over the Internet were extended The developer can define a list of the customers who are entitled to download updated application versions and to install it This customer list is stored in a coded file on the web server and is downloaded before the real actualization into the customer s PC and is checked Togeth
185. eration may tat MSG_ASK_FOR_PICK Wrong Input OODo you want to call the pick list Input is not valid MSG ASK TO EXIT Do you wart to quit the application Do you want to quit th MSG ASK TO SAVE Do you want to save this record Do you want to save 1 MSG AT at at MSG_ATTENTION Attention Attention MSG_AUDIT Audit Trail Audit Trail N MSG_BACKUPSUCCESSFULCOMPLE Backup successful completed Backup successful cc vw lt gt 32 Question mark iew VFX Defin Tip Also if you do not create multilingual applications you can use the VFX Messagebox Builder 13 2 VFX Message Editor The values of all VFX used constants are located in the free table Vfxmsg dbf For each language exists a memo field containing the text With the VFX Message editor these texts can be edited The VFX Message Editor is the central place to manage and translate all messages and other language specific text elements such as captions tooltip texts and status bar messages From within the VFX Message Editor you can create all the needed include files Usertxt h and Usermsg h To call the VFX Message Editor select menu option Form Message Editor in the VFX Menu t VFX Message Editor HER Record List Message id MSG_APPEND Text Append data to English German French Italian Spanish Bulgarial Greek Czech Dutch Portugue Russian User Fin Daten
186. erlying view must have exactly one parameter which must correspond to the parent key A Parent form can call several different Child forms A Child form can serve again as Parent for other Child forms Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 94 11 2 1 Preparing the Parent Form In the Parent form with the help of the form builder must be selected the following options Has More Options sets the property More on T Has Child Form and Auto Sync Child Form sets the property lAutoSynChildForm on T The form builder generates automatically template code into OnMore and OnSetChildData methods The code of these methods must be manually adapted afterwards The Child form is invoked in the method OnMore If the user wants to see the available options to the current data record there are different possibilities e User can press the function key F6 e User can select option Other in the Edit menu e User can click on the More button in the standard toolbar Depending on the code in the method OnMore the user will see a dialog which looks similar to the following Available Functions Open Items Additionals Children Calling the OnMore method with the parameter tnPassThrough is very useful if you want to start a form directly on the passed number You can use this technique in order to start a form from the OnMore method on a button in a toolbar If there is
187. erties Legend direction Side Legends 3 Full Stacked Bars Y Bar shape Horizontal 3 Vertic Top Right Report Rectangular Vertical Values in shapes vixGDIGraph is Show percentages Logo file name picture to be added in Triangle Legend alignment le lefttop corner ofthe graph Default Change color on mouse over BITMAP DESKTOP PNG Between Bars 15 B Centered v Show ToolTips Bars properties Bar shape Determines the shape of bar shown in chart Rectangular Cilynderical or Triangular Between Bars Determines the distance in pixels between bars Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 139 Legend direction Determines the direction of the legend that stays inside the bars shapes Horizontal Vertical from top to bottom Vertical 2 from bottom to top Legend alignment Determines the alignment of the legend that stays inside the bars shapes Default or centered Chart Type Points and Lines Properties V Side Legends Em une caps 3 VerticTopRiont x Report Name u Values in shapes vixGDIGraph 3 C Show percentages Logo file name picture to be added in Unique Shape comer ofihe graph B Change color on mouse over BITMAP DESKTOP PNG 2 7 Show ToolTips Depth 20 shadow
188. es The names and alias names for cursors can be freely changed in the data environment In the column Filter can be entered a valid logical expression to be applied as filter expression It corresponds to the Filter property of the Cursor object The columns Parent Alias and Rel Expression give you the chance to build relationship between cursors in the dataenvironment After selecting the alias in Parent Alias column you can choose the field which will maintain the relationship from the drop down list in Rel Expression column or enter your own relational expression Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 56 Defined relations are maintained by oRelationMgr object an instance of the class cRelationMgr VFX Data Environment Builder Aliases Indexes Alias caorders Expression Sort Order customerid ASCENDING 3 orderdate ASCENDING orderid orderid ASCENDING E lt For CursorAdapter objects the only way to build relationship is to create temporary indexes at run time Developer can define necessary indexes on Indexes page VFX framework takes care to create necessary index files at run time and to establish relationships which are defined on Aliases page For Cursor objects based on a table or view indexes are created in advance and here in builder they are displayed read only Here can be managed only indexes that will be created for CursorAdapter objec
189. es last option in the right click menu when editing a PRG and then in the dialog Compile before saving This guarantees that you have always recompiled PRG s as described later on in this guide Changes in include files don t go through Make a change in the file which includes the Include file quit Visual FoxPro delete the compiled FXP s restart select the correct project directory rebuild your project Tip Try also the CLEAR PROGRAM command which clears all compiled programs from memory If you make changes in an include file which affect a form make sure to open the form and save it otherwise the changes in the include file may not affect the form If your include file changes do still not go through make sure to delete all FXP files and rebuild all again Important Working folder Make sure that the current Directory is the Directory of the Project you are working with Try this CD NOTE You should better use the VFX Application Manager to open and switch projects Created forms are based on the library in another directory rather than on the expected library of my application This is only a problem if you work simultaneously on different projects or on different versions of the same project To solve incorrect links temporarily rename the directory of your project and open all of your forms Open all Forms and Classes and locate the correct library from your application when necessary and select save Incremental S
190. es not exist Application checks for the table Vfxpath dbf This table must be located in same folder where the executable program file is When this table has exactly one data row will be used data path stored there If the table contains more than one row when the application starts a Client Selection dialog is invoked for choosing desired database Client Selection Northwind 21 Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 188 22 8 Updating the user s database 22 8 1 VFP Databases usage VFX includes procedures to automatically update the database at customers side The tables which should be updated will be copied without data in the Update folder under the Data folder On next start VFX Application finds out presence of the tables in the Update folder and updates the database Free tables can also be updated in this way too On application start the database in the data folder is updated Using this approach to the database can be added new tables new fields in tables new Indexes and new views Also fields and tables that are no more used are deleted in this way Finally all files from the Update folder 22 8 2 SQL Server Database usage The Metadata Wizard helps you to prepare metadata definition of your currently used database structure The Metadata can be used for database update at customer s side t Metadata Wizard MAIN pjx Use Database connecti
191. esses Opt Tools 1 15 2 Tools 3 Tools 4 Pressing Alt Underline letter selects the tab All hot keys used with standard menu can also be used with Ribbon Bar Ctrl C Ctrl PgUp etc Except this in Ribbon bar there are an additive set of Short Keys similar to Office2007 They are shown when ALT H is pressed as shown in the picture 7 5 e 7 s Se9u t R T U v Venelinars Fantastic Pizzas iia Home Edit View Tools Help Additive Menu 2 English KY Undo Cut 4 Edit E X Delete p t Requery B Other Save L New N F B Past y 1 Copy Record Edit 1 Edit 2 Edit 3 Edit 4 Edit 5 These Short Keys works only when they are visible Pressing some of the shown keys will execute the click of the menu item or quick item and will hide all Short Keys labels They can also be hiden with ESC button The main library used for realization of Ribbon Bar is vfxRibbon vcx Used pictures are saved in RIBBONBAR folder New folder in BITMAP folder A class is added to VfxAppl vcx which is subclassed in Appl vcx Class cRibbonTbrTabMenu cAppRibbonTbrTabMenu Inherit tbrTabMenu class of vfxRibbon vcx Class cRibbonBarStartMenu cAppRibbonBarStartMenu Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 171 Inherit cStartMenuDialogClass of vfxRibbon vcx This is the f
192. et 4899 Use default port Advanced settings Connect through host Now the customer s PC can be found in the Internet through the Subdomain name The Supporter needs to create only one entry for the remote support of all customer computers After establishing successful connection the customer s PC can be operated in the Radmin Viewer s window exactly like the own PC Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 216 28 COM Server COM Server is a server component designated to work as web service executing select commands or command scripts Along with the command or script to be executed the Execute method receives as parameters domain username and password Das COM Server Objekt wird ohne Parameter instanziiert 28 1 Die COM Server Klasse 28 1 1 Methoden Execute tcSelectCmd tlScript tnResultType tlReturnErrorArray tcResultObjectName tcDataXML tcPath tlTransaction tcUserName tcPassword tcDomainName executes a select query or script and returns the result as an XML string Array or Variable Parameter tcSelectCmd Zeichenkette mit dem Select Befehl oder dem auszuf hrenden Skript tlScript when the passed tcSelectCmd will be run isung ExecScript function when this parameter is F the content of tcSelectCmd is considered to be a single command tnResultType Typ des R ckgabewertes 0 or F XML Zeichenkette 1 Array 2 Variable t
193. ey loMenu goProgram oMenuBar cntTabMenu AddMenuItem lcTabDescription A lcKeyLabel ALT A Adds the control in aKeyExprs array This array is used from ProcessHotKey method and envoke the Click event of tab when lcKeyLabel ALT A is pressed This cntTabMenu AddItemToKeyExprsArray loMenu lcKeyLabel LoMenu cmdMenultem ToolTipText This is an example of User tab Index number of ne tab InTabIndex This cntTabMenu pgfPopups PageCount Adds the first popup group loPopupl goProgram oMenuBar cntTabMenu AddPopup Messages lnTabIndex Determine the number of columns in the first popup loPopupl nColumns 2 Deretmine the width of popup The columns in the popup has the same width The two columns will have width 150 loPopupl Width 300 Adds the first item loItem loPopupl AddPopupItem Message A NORM A This cntTabMenu AddItemToKeyExprsArray loItem CTRL A loItem cPicture email bmp loItem cDisabledPicture emaildis bmp loItem cSkipForExp TYPE _Screen ActiveForm Left loItem Alignment 0 Used as KEY ID of the menu item loItem cItemKey MSGi loItem ToolTipText Displays in message box CTRL A BINDEVENT loItem Execute goProgram oMenuBar onItemExecute Adds the second item loItem loPopupl AddPopupItem Message B NORM B This cntTabMenu AddItemToKeyExprsArray loItem CTRL B Left loItem Alignment 0 Used as KEY ID
194. ferences not considered in this document Strong type casting Variable assignments String considerations Case sensitivity Unspecified FROM clause Cross join TOP n PERCENT Cursors Built in SQL functions except mentioned above Date arithmetic DATEADD day 1 GETDATEO gt CURRENT DATE 1 day DATEADD month 1 GETDATEO gt CURRENT DATE 1 month DATEADD year 1 GETDATEO gt CURRENT DATE 1 year XML processing Temporary tables Stored procedures User defined functions Triggers Transaction logging Administrative issues 23 8 VFP SQL Server and DB2 UDB data types VFP data type SQL Server data DB2 UDB data type Range of values type CHAR n CHAR m CHAR n 1 lt m lt 8000 1 lt n lt 254 VARCHAR k VARCHAR m VARCHAR n 1 lt m lt 8000 1 lt n lt 32762 1 lt k lt 254 LONG VARCHAR n if n lt 32700 bytes MEMO TEXT CLOB 2GB if n lt 2 GB TINYINT SMALLINT 32768 to 32767 SMALLINT SMALLINT 32768 to 32767 INT INT INT ey ae 237 INTEGER INTEGER 1 Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 194 BIGINT BIGINT DECIMAL p S DEC p s DEC p s 10741 to 10 DECIMAL p s DECIMAL p s 1 pts lt 31 NUMERIC q NUMERIC p s NUM p s _ mt NUMERIC p s 10741 to 10
195. fxsys dbf in the memo field dyndns so that the registration information on the customer s PC is not readable The encryption is made with the password cConfigPassword This password should be assigned to the property cConfigPassword of the application object cFoxAppl class in Appl vcx The edition of the DynDNS registration information is available through the menu Data Manage Vfxsys dbf in the VFX menu The content of the field dyndns is composed by four lines DynDNS User name DynDNS Password Subdomain Name Password for accessing Radmin on customer s PC 27 3 Subdomain registration Thanks to the organization Dynamic DNS Network Services it is possible to be registered sub domains free of charge Every developer should register a dynamic DNA at http www dyndns org services dyndns A user name a password and an E mail address are necessary for creating an account with DynDNS The Subdomain name can be chosen on your wish It can be selected from among large number of Domain names Example myCompany dnsalias com In this example myCompany is the selected Subdomain Name Dnsalias com is the existing DynDNS Domain Name Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 214 Atthe Subdomain registration an account with user s name and password must be created The account can be configured with the login information The login data can also be set at the URL above The IP address associated to th
196. g N Den Teufel sp rt das V lkchen nie und wenn er sie beim Kragen h tte gcCaracters N abcca while i lt datalength gcCaracters 2 begin if charindex substring gcCaracters i 1 left gcCaracters i 1 0 select counter counter dbo OCCURS 2 substring gcCaracters i 1 gcString select i i 1 end select counter Anzeige 5 30 5 PADL PADR PADC Gibt aus einem Ausdruck eine Zeichenfolge zur ck die links rechts oder auf beiden Seiten bis zu einer angegebenen L nge mit Leerzeichen oder Zeichen aufgef llt ist 30 5 1 Syntax PADL eExpression nResultSize cPadCharacter PADR eExpression nResultSize cPadCharacter PADC eExpression nResultSize cPadCharacter 30 5 2 Parameter eExpression Gibt den aufzufiillenden Ausdruck an Bei diesem Ausdruck kann es sich um jeden Ausdruckstyp mit Ausnahme eines logischen Ausdrucks bzw einer W hrung eines Objekt oder eines Bildfeldes handeln nResultSize Gibt die Gesamtzahl der Zeichen im Ausdruck nach dem Auff llen an cPadCharacter Gibt den Wert an der zum Auff llen verwendet werden soll Dieser Wert wird so oft wiederholt bis der Ausdruck auf die angegebene Anzahl an Zeichen aufgef llt ist Wenn Sie cPadCharacter nicht angeben werden zum Auff llen Leerzeichen ASCII Zeichen 32 verwendet 30 5 3 R ckgabewert Nvarchar 4000 30 5 4 Hinweise Mit PADLO wird ein Ausdruck links mit PADR rec
197. ge 89 Properties nParentID ID key value from Vfxpdef dbf table Methods Addnewcode this method is executed when the end user adds a new value in the pick list table If it is needed to perform additional processing the code should be placed in this method For cComboPicklist class it is possible to define two different code snippets In Vfxpdeftable in ProcCode memo field and in Vfxplist table in ProcCode memo field The code in Vfxpdef ProcCode table is common for the cComboPicklist and is executed every time when the selected item of the Combobox is changed The code in Vfxplist ProcCode table is specific for the particular list item and is executed only when this item is selected from the list For every entry in Vfxplist dbf table you can define if this is an active entry or not Using this approach you do not need to delete entries which will not be used in the future and thus to cause orphan records in your database When the field will not be used anymore just set the values in its Active field to F VFX Builders Combo Pick List E3 Field Assistant Pick Definition Code MyList Code Text Key Parent s Ask For Save Fields Always on Top Can Insert parentid Description My first pick llist Style Dropdown List s die ate checked value ins date ins usr Pick List u edt_usr Description Active Proc Code overid 0 0 0 qvae 0 parentcode 2 Eo pe
198. gger functions are placed in all tables e audit insert tracks the insertion of new data record e audit update tracks all changes e audit delete tracks the deletion of data record An Audit Trigger can be linked with a RI Trigger with a logical AND ri delete parent AND audit delete Audit Trail One To Tree Record has been updated by Uwe Habermann at 09 28 03 08 10 04 PM DESCR dgdfgdfghgjghifghgf gt gt gt test EDT DATE 08 25 03 gt gt gt 09 28 03 EDT USR vania gt gt gt Uwe Haberm Record has been updated by rosen at 27 08 03 14 34 20 PARENTCODE gt gt gt POT Record has been updated by rosen at 27 08 03 14 33 50 PARENTCODE P0007 gt gt gt 7 Record has been updated by vania at 09 26 03 02 04 37 PM PARENTCODE 0007 gt gt gt P0007 Record has been updated by vania at 08 26 03 02 04 21 PM PARENTCODE gt gt gt p0007 On a button in the standard Toolbar can be viewed the activity log for the current data record 18 11 Askform The Ask form corresponds to a Message box however it has an extended functionality The Captions of the three maximum command buttons can be passed as parameters In addition it is possible to be specified a timeout for the message box When the timeout is reached without user action is returned a value which corresponds to pressing the default button Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 130 Askcapt
199. h dem ersten Zeichenausdruck ohne dabei f r die beiden Ausdr cke die Gro Kleinschreibung Gro oder Kleinbuchstaben zu ber cksichtigen Soll bei einem Suchvorgang die Gro Kleinschreibung ber cksichtigt werden verwenden Sie die AT Funktion gibt eine ganze Zahl zur ck die die Position angibt an der das erste Zeichen des gesuchten Zeichenausdrucks gefunden wurde Wird der jeweilige Zeichenausdruck nicht gefunden gibt ATC den Wert 0 zur ck Siehe auch AT 30 2 5 Beispiel declare gcString nvarchar 4000 gcFindString nvarchar 4000 select gcString N Johann Wolfgang von Goethe 1749 1832 gcFindString select dbo ATC G gcFindString gcString default Anzeige 17 case insensitive 30 3 Gibt f r eine Zeichenfolge die numerische Position zur ck ab der der Ausdruck das letzte Mal u erst rechts in einer anderen Zeichenfolge vorkommt 30 3 1 Syntax RAT cSearchExpression cExpressionSearched nOccurrence 30 3 2 Parameter cSearchExpression Gibt den Zeichenausdruck an nach dem cExpressionSearched sucht Der Ausdruck kann von beliebiger Gr e sein cExpressionSearched Gibt den Zeichenausdruck an den durchsucht Der Ausdruck kann von beliebiger Gr e sein nOccurrence Gibt an nach welchem Vorkommen von links nach rechts von cSearchExpression cExpressionSearched sucht Standardm ig sucht RAT
200. hat controls the download process The variable or property will be automatically checked cCancelDownload F The download operation will continue cCancelDownload T The download operation will be canceled Return Value 0 The download completed successfully Get PS Printers nPrinterType cPrinterNames nPrinterNamesLength Return names of all installed post script printer drivers An example for implementation of this function can be found in the class cCreatePDF in the method CheckPSPrinter nLocation Printer location to be searched 1 Search for local printers 2 Search for network printers 3 Search for both network and local printers cPrinterNames Contains names of all installed postscript printer drivers in a comma separated list nPrinterNamesLength Length of the returned string Return Value 0 The operation completed successfully Add Printer cPrinterName cPrinterPort Automatically installs a printer driver An example for implementation of this function can be found in the class cCreatePDF in the method CheckPSPrinter cPrinterName Name of the printer driver that will be installed cPrinterPort Port the printer driver that will be installed Return Value 0 The operation completed successfully Encrypt cStringForEncrypting cPassword Encrypts a string with a password An example for implementation of this function can be found in the class cDunConnectiom cmdOk in
201. hat helps the user to build a valid ODBC connection string When DSN will be used additionally can also be specified username and password to be used while establishing connection If you do not provide username and password for the DSN and the connection requires authentication a login screen will pop up asking user to enter username and password The file Config vfx corresponds to the table Vfxpath dbf known from previously VFX versions All fields included in Vfxpath dbf table are also included in Config vfx file In the file can be defined several entries which access different types of datasource Thus a user of the application can decide by the application start whether he wants to work with a VFP database or with different server databases Through the encryption of Config vfx file for the VFX application is attained a security that was not achieved before Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 186 By analogy with Vfxpath dbf developer can add own defined fields to Config vfx file and use these fields later at run time The button Add Column invokes a dialog window where you can specify name and type of the field to be added Config Field Field Name Field Type Character Field Width Decimal 22 5 Switching between DBC and SQL Server When a VFX 11 0 application is so constructed that the data access is accomplished exclusively through CursorAdapter classes it is
202. he class CBaseDataAccess The new cBaseDataAccess class is based on VFP CursorAdapter class providing VFX developers with extended data access functionality The class cBaseDataAccess uses common application settings and allows you to develop applications which can be easily ported to different data sources The data access settings for the class cBaseDataAccess are saved in Config vfx file Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 184 When an instance of the class cBaseDataAcess is loaded its properties are set accordingly the correspondent goProgram properties The property goProgram cDataSourceType is used as DataSourceType for the newly created object If NATIVE DataSourceType is used the class uses the database path and database name referred by goProgram cDataDir and goProgram cMainDataBase properties For all other values of DataSourceT ype to obtain DataSource value is called GetConnection method of the connection manager object The object is specified in cConnMgrName property In the class library Appl vcx is placed the class cAppDataAcess which is an instance of the class cBaseDataAcess The developer should place and additional specific settings for application data access in this class cAppDataAcess Properties cConnMgrName The name of the object which should be used as a connection manager object This connection manager object is used as a DataSource for the class cBaseDataAccess By default th
203. he only problems appear with following data types as far as their correspondent types are incompatible VFP MS SQL DB2 UDB LOGICAL BIT CHAR 1 bit data GENERAL IMAGE BLOB When trying to convert a column with data type CHAR 1 bit data to VFP data type L using the conversion feature in CursorAdapter class by setting Use cursor schema T and placing L as data type in the CursorSchema on CursorFill execution is raised the following error Type conversion required by the DataType property for field lt field name gt is invalid For more detailed information see http msdn microsoft com library default asp url library en us dv_foxhelp9 html c101845f d0a1 4f86 b 1ba 225929032da6 asp 23 2 SQL language syntax and semantics 23 2 1 Column and table aliases In same way as in VFP and SQL Server DB2 UDB syntax uses the AS keyword to define column aliases and table correlation names as shown below SELECT d deptno AS DepartmentNo e empno AS EmployeeNo e firstnme lastname AS EmployeeName FROM department AS d INNER JOIN employ AS ON d deptno e workdept Column names and table names containing spaces are enclosed in 077 23 2 2 Functions Some often used functions have same names in VFP SQL Server and DB 2 UDB UPPER LEFT RIGHT LTRIM RTRIM 23 2 3 Strings processing In difference of VFP and SQL Server string cannot be concatenated using
204. here return lInitOk The VFX function getArg checks the parameter character string and divides it into its parts The parts are separated by semicolon Look at the example When we call the Contact form for a certain company the passed parameter can have the following parts COMP 1234567890 Contacts for company ISYS CONT COMP ID UPPER CONT COMP ID 1234567890 The separated parts of this character string are stored in the already existing form properties before they can be used within the entire form Let s see the form properties which hold the information from the passed parameter character string tcArg VFX Form properi Description Example Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 96 cCalledBy This character string indicates from which form this form was called COMP The value of the field from the main table primary key in the Parent 1234568890 table Title of the child form Here is a meaningful tip for the parent to which data Contacts for company ISYS row corresponds cFixFieldName The name of the field in the Child table which defines the 1 n relation This CONT_COMP_ID field obtains the value indicated above if a new data record is added foreign keys in the Child table The at best Rushmore optimized Filter expression in order to show the UPPER CONT_COMP_ID data records that correspond the criteria of the parent table 1234568890 For very large data sets
205. highest scale pass the logical value F false MinNumberScaleLegends If Scale is calculated automatically then this value is used in that automatic computation as it attempts to find a nice value when displaying the legends The actual number of scale legends created will be between this value and twice this value Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 152 MinValue The lowest value that will be displayed on the vertical axis If automatically calculated this value will always be lower than all the values in the chart To set it to automatic MinScale calculation just set this property to the logical False F Multichart Determines if more than one kind of chart is allowed to run at the same time GDIGraph supports partially mixing some types of charts in the same canvas You can create a chart combining simple bars lines and shapes at the same time MultichartMargin Determines if there will be a margin at the beginning and at the end of the chart To be used when a Bar chart is not present in order to obtain a better effect oBmp The GdiPlusX bitmap object from GDIGraph ImageCanvas The use is recommended for advanced users It allows you to manipulate directly the Chart image surface for example for saving an image in a specific ImageFormat applying special effects after rendering sending to the clipboard etc Important This is for users that are familiarized with GdiPlu
206. hts und mit PADCO auf beiden Seiten aufgef llt 30 5 5 Beispiel declare gcString nvarchar 4000 select gcString Mephistopheles select dbo PADL gcString 40 default Anzeige Mephistopheles select dbo PADL QG gcString 40 Anzeigen Mephistopheles select dbo PADR G gcString 40 Anzeige Mephistopheles select dbo PADC gcString 40 Anzeige Mephistopheles 30 6 CHRTRAN Jedes Zeichen in einem Zeichenausdruck das einem Zeichen in einem zweiten Zeichenausdruck entspricht wird durch das entsprechende Zeichen eines dritten Zeichenausdrucks ersetzt 30 6 1 Syntax CHRTRAN cSearchedExpression cSearchExpression cReplacementExpression 30 6 2 Parameter cSearchedExpression Gibt den Ausdruck an in dem Zeichen ersetzt G cSearchExpression Gibt den Ausdruck mit den Zeichen an nach denen CHRTRAN in cSearchedExpression sucht Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 226 cReplacementExpression Gibt den Ausdruck mit den Ersetzungszeichen an 30 6 3 R ckgabewert Nvarchar 4000 30 6 4 Hinweise Wird ein Zeichen aus cSearchExpression in cSearchedExpression gefunden wird es in cSearchedExpression durch das Zeichen in cReplacementExpression ersetzt dessen Position in cReplacementExpression seiner Position in cSearchExpression entspricht
207. ibt GETWORDNUM 0 das dritte Wort zur ck wenn cString drei oder mehr W rter enth lt cDelimiters Gibt ein oder mehrere optionale Zeichen an die verwendet werden um die W rter in cString zu trennen Die Standardtrennzeichen sind Leerzeichen Tabulator und Wagenr cklaufzeichen Beachten Sie dass GETWORDCOUNT jedes der Zeichen in cDelimiters als Trennzeichen verwendet und nicht die ganze Zeichenkette als einzelnes Trennzeichen Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 229 30 10 3 R ckgabewert Nvarchar 4000 30 10 4 Hinweise Gibt das Wort an der Position zur ck die von nIndex in der Zielzeichenfolge cString angegeben wurde Wenn cString weniger W rter als die in nIndex angegebene Anzahl enth lt gibt GETWORDNUM eine leere Zeichenfolge zur ck Siehe auch GETWORDCOUNT GETALLWORDS 30 10 5 Beispiel declare cString nvarchar 4000 set cString N Wer immer strebend sich bem ht Den k nnen wir erl sen select dbo GETWORDNUM cString 7 default Anzeige k nnen 30 11 GETALLWORDSY F gt die W rter aus einer Zeichenkette in eine Tabelle ein 30 11 31 Syntax GETALLWORDS cString cDelimiters 30 11 2 Parameter cString nvarchar 4000 Spezifiziert die Zeichenkette deren W rter in die Tabelle GETALLWORDS eingesetzt werden cDelimiters Gibt ein oder mehrere Zeichen an durch die Zeichengruppen in cString getrennt werden sollen Die Standardtre
208. ick Edit or to use Ctrl Shif Click A good way to check whether you are on the right object is to have a look at the property sheet s current object The VFX Picklist Builder loads and shows the following dialog Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 82 uds CPickField Builder Pick Field Update Work on View Options Pick Dialog Caption Maintenence Form Kundenauswahl Pick Table Name Pick Table Index Tag customer customer_i CPickField txtField ControlS ource CPickField txtDesc ControlS ource orders customer_id customer company name Return Field Name Code Use STR for Num Fields Return Field Name Description customer_id company_name Format Input Mask Status Bar Text RR Kund innen Nr des Bestellers The following options are available on the page Pick Field Pick Dialog Caption Enter the caption for the picklist form in which the user can select the value he wants to pick Maintenance Form If the user doesn t find the desired record in the picklist form you might want to offer the user the ability to directly call the data maintenance form view mode or directly insert mode for the table currently being picked from Enter the name or the data manipulation form which will be called if the user clicks on the Edit command button on the picklist form Pick Table Name Select the name of the table or the v
209. id v Control Source caorderdetails productid Output Mask 999999999 C Read Only Page Count Enter how many Child Grid Pages your form will have For most of the OneToMany Forms one child grid page will be enough if you have more child tables you might want to spread them over multiple pages Depending on the number of pages you select you will see in the tab dialog on the form builder a Dialog simulating these Pages If you setup two Edit Pages two tabs will appear if you select three you will see three and so on Page Title Enter the caption for the child grid page you currently selected If you want to enter the caption for the second Page you click the second page tab and you can enter the caption for it VFX Form Builder will instantly reflect your entry on the tab captions of the corresponding page Child Table Select the record source for your child grid Attention This is very important to set if you don t set this property your form will not work correctly Justified Tab Mark this option if your tabs should be justified otherwise they will be variable in the width and will not fill out the pageframe width Inplace Editing Set this option if you want to enter data in your child grid which is usually what you want Ins Canc Check this option if you want to have the possibility to add new records with Ctrl Ins and to delete records wi
210. ie or doughnut slices on mouse click over the legend shapes PieEnhancedDrawing For Pie and Doughnut charts Enables the enhancing drawing mode when all edges are drawn separately providing a better effect when transparencies are applied to the chart The default value for this property is TRUE and it provides a quicker drawing of the shapes PieGradCenterAngle The angle used to determine the center point for the gradient brush assigning the point where the destination color will reach its maximum intensity Use this property together with PieGradCenterDistance property to determine the exact location where the gradient destination color will be in the pie or doughnut shape PieForceCircle Forces the Pie or doughnut shapes to be circular with the same width and height independent from the width or height of the GDIGraph container Applicable only to Pie and Doughnut charts PieGradCenterDistance The distance in percentage used to determine the center point for the gradient brush assigning the point where the destination color will reach its maximum intensity The value 0 zero represents the center of the pie The value represents the external border Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 153 Use this property together with PieGradCenterAngle property to determine the exact location where the gradient destination color will be in the pie or doughnut shape PieShowPercent Shows the perce
211. ields with global settings At run time values of all fields of Vfxsys dbf table are available as properties of the global object goSystem 18 2 Active Desktop The Active Desktop gives a professional look to the applications On the otherwise empty screen are placed icons and options By moving the mouse over the pictures is displays the associated menu below the pictures In the menus there are underlined menu options similar to hyperlinks in the Internet Explorer that can be simply clicked and an action is started In most cases as action will be started a form The class of the Active Desktop is in the class library Appl vcx and according to the wish of the developer be extended with any controls Parent Parent form wich acts as parent form in a linked child scenario plus more Child The same child form just called directly why not Item Item table shows the cTableForm class very handy OneToMany OneToMany form with parent gt child almost a classic OneToMany2 OneToMany form itern gt child you are flexible arentt you ParentTree Parent Tree form shows the cTreeView class OneToTree Shows the cTreeViewOneToMany class The Active Desktop can be used in addition to or in place of the Open Dialog forms 18 3 More Functions Through a form property More the button More functions in the standard toolbar can be activated In the Click method of this button is called the OnMore method of the active form This
212. ies E mail subject E mail header E mail Footer E mail Footer On right mouse click on Toolbox windows and choosing Customize Toolbox categories and items can be added edited and deleted Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 123 Customize Toolbox Categories mp add Category X jRemove Category al Category Properties gt E mail subject E mail header 9 show selected items only 2 E mail footer Item Name Item Text Your order information Your order information on Northwind Requested offer Requested offer from Northwind Item Properties Item name Your order information Help text Your order information text to be places as e mail subject Your order information on Northwind Fi Evaluate using text merge For every category be specified Category name and Help text For Items can be entered Item name Help text and Item text Category names and Item names are shown The correspondent Help text is displayed in an Editbox in the lower part ofthe Toolbox window as description for the active item The Item text is placed in the destination control at the cursor position Using the buttons the user can change the display sequence of the categories in the Toolbox window Items can be move within category using and button 17 13 Treeview The class cTreeView class is now
213. iew you want to validate and or pick the value from Here you can select from all tables or views you entered in the data environment Pick Table Index Tag Select the name of the Index tag will be used for validation of the user input CPickField txtField ControlSource Select the control source for the input text field CPickField txtDesc ControlSource Select the control source of the description field of the picklist field Make sure that you set a correct relation to the table you are selecting this control source from otherwise this control will not refresh correctly when you move the record in your main form Return Field Name Code Enter the name of the field from the picklist table or view you want to get the value from Do not enter any alias since the pick table will be opened with a random alias Return Field Name Description Defines which field from the picklist will be used to get the description of the selected record Do not enter any alias since the pick table will be opened with a random alias Format The VFX Pickfield Builder takes this property from the database container Input Mask The VFX Pickfield Builder takes this property from the database container Status Bar Text The VFX Pickfield Builder takes this property from the database container The following options are available on the page Update Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 83 VFX CPickField Builder Pick
214. ilder can be started from the VFX menu In the builder dialog can be added as many forms as needed Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 97 Jm x Form Designer parent scx Parent ag C33 6 2 Paget List Parent ID ttParentid Overid TXTFIELD E mesc Description btDescr Parentcode ttParel VFX Parent Child Builder Parent Form frmParent Child Form Parentfield Fix Field Value Child field Fix Field Name Caption for child form Text for open for 9 In the column Child Form is entered the name of child form or the child form can be chosen using the Open button In the column Parent Field Fix Field Value is entered the name of Id field in the parent alias The value of this field will be passed to child form when the form is called and on every the record pointer move in the Parent form In the column Child field Fix Field Name is entered the name of the field in the child alias which is foreign key to the parent alias Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 98 11 3 VFX Document Management Builder The new class cDocumentManagement is designated to maintain all kind of documents i e Word Excel Powerpoint related to application data The cDocumentManagement class is a container that manages child records rela
215. iles The structural and nonstructural cdx files can contain multiple indexes which have names or tags that identify them while the standalone idx file contains only a single index SQL Server uses a B tree data structure to store clustered and non clustered indexes However non clustered indexes are not ordered physically according to the index keys and the leaf nodes consist of index rows rather than data pages DB2 UDB creates indexes in a separate data structure that replicates the keys values A B tree data structure is used to store indexes To maintain the cluster factor of a clustered index or improve it dynamically as data is inserted into the associated table DB2 UDB attempts to insert new rows physically close to the rows with index key values in the same range In both SQL Server and DB2 UDB only one clustered index per table is permitted In a DB2 UDB non clustered index the NONCLUSTERED clause is assumed by default There is a small difference in syntax used to create the indexes In DB2 UDB the CLUSTERED clause proceeds the index definition VFP SQL Server DB2 UDB INDEX ON author_id CREATE CLUSTERED INDEX CREATE INDEX TAG author_id PK_author_id PK_author_id ASCENDING ON authors ON authors author_id ASC author_id ASC CLUSTER VFP indexed may be created based on any valid VFP expression Both in SQL Server and DB2 UDB indexes cannot include expressions It is possi
216. improvements to the user interface such as Docking Anchoring for forms enhanced support of graphics Autotext and many others and Format Z is back too And a lot of details have been fixed improved and extended in the new version A nice addendum we find in a new little property for grids Tip Rushmore Optimization in Grids A new property optimize is available for grids for the first time providing the long awaited Rushmore Optimization for the presentation of tables Now the grid is not slower than a BROWSE command any more PS If you ever happened to be obliged to use a filtered table within a grid set this new property to T the default value is of course F The actual list of improvements we naturally do not want to reproduce here fully in print but you can believe the final version of Visual FoxPro 9 0 to be considerably different from the Public Beta that has been available for a long time and it has become quite a bit larger 1 2 The Combination that makes it All in One As an object oriented development environment and as a relational database system Visual FoxPro 9 0 has become even more attractive for application development Now the framework Visual Extend enriches Visual FoxPro s toolset by those components essential for the quick development of applications known as RAD The first way this is being achieved consists in the supply of a large application frame with many important standard f
217. ing anie qd reb i 2 2 7 Database Tools atte RD D Rn OL bp TEE ERGO 2 2 8 Abo ut Dialo9 a aab aoi M e UH T edm 2 3 CREATING A FORM WITH THE VEX FORM WIZARD seen ene eene 17 2 4 VFX DATA ENVIRONMENT BUILDER 2 5 VFX FORM BUILDER 2 6 VFX CGRID BUILDER 24 xu re RR EROR WR De eU 3 20 EX MEE OMISIT 20 3 2 SPECIFICS OF APPLICATIONS CREATED USING VISUAL 20 33 KEY FEATURES EOR DEVELOPERS ees te toe rra s eto A P A E REED N FR cate 21 4 FEATURES rtu eot doin e eese n voa pe Vasa sede 24 41 VEX GEASS LIBRARIES N iiec 24 42 MEX WIZARDS AND BUIEDERS ee E E SER VEN RETE REN Neb ashe 24 4 3 VEX DEVELOPER PRODUCTIVITY TOOLS eese nene eennn 25 4 4 OTHER DEVELOPER TOOLS 25 45 Aah ae a 26 5 INSTALLATION sosisini aa 27 5 1 HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE 69 6 0000 001100001 27 22 256 27 5 3 REGISTRATION AND ACTIV
218. into your own applications In addition to the database maintenance VFX 11 0 includes a new tool for repairing corrupted data In the Database tools dialog form now is available additional option Repair Optionally can be repaired either the entire database on only selected tables When only the selected tables will be repaired additionally can be specified to repair only table headers or to delete corrupted records For repairing DBC container and DBF headers an empty database with same structure as the operational one is used When the executable file is built the structure of database is included in it using a generated program file created using Gendbc prg Later at run time an empty database is created using this program and is used for automatically repair of database container and DBF headers of the operational database If Delete corrupted records option is chosen all records with empty or duplicated primary key values will be deleted from tables 7 3 User List In every multi user application you must have a user list First of all you need to define who has access to your application which is the username and password and what the security level per user is The table in which user specific information is stored is the free table VFXUSR DBF CDX If you want to take advantage of features like long field names you have to add this table into the database container Users can delete their own records in VFX resource table if
219. ion This is a Demo demonstrating the usage ofthe askform function An example for implementation of the function Askform is in the form Parent scx in the demo application VFX90Test 18 12 Progress bar offers two different ways to indicate the progress of long lasted operations The simple variant realized with the form class cGaugeWin displays a bar that indicates the progress 2296 Gauge Demo 11 With the form Vfxmtr scx can be represented a progress bar by indicating the remaining execution time 50 00 Examples for the use of both progress indicators are in the form Parent scx of the demo application VFX90Test 18 13 Date selection 18 13 1 cPickDate class The class cPickDate contains a text box for entering a date as well as a button for calling a calendar control Date 6 1 1 2003 For the Textbox for date selection are available the following hotkeys l Next day Previous day Today The first day beginning of the current month The last day of the current month New Year s day End of the year Previous month Next month pma 2 9 15 lt For the calendar is used the Microsoft MonthView ActiveX control When creating a Setup for deploying the application this ActiveX control Mscomct2 ocx must be included also into the Setup VFP 9 provides a Merge module for this Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 131
220. ion Master T able frmOneT oT ree One To Tree Parent Edit Pages TreeView Or Fom Optiong Child Grid parame Linked Table Required Fie Report al 1 ID Field ParentlD Atwaye on Tor E Parent ID Field Name OverlD Node Text descr id Allow Node Rename ins date ins usr edt date edt usr overid parentcode ins_time Style 7 ywStylelinesPlusMinusPict w Appearance 1 cc3D Border Style 0 ccNone Indentation m 35 0000 Restore expand nodes status on load Load all Treeview nodes on form start The builder works similar to the VFX COneToMany Builder You can make your setting in the EditPage and FormOptions und Child Grid pages in the same way as for forms based on the class cOneToMany In addition to this you must make settings for the Treeview control in the page TreeViewOptions The settings that you need to make are same as in the VFX CTreeViewForm Builder 9 9 1 Databinding of the TreeView control IDFieldName Here you should fill the name of the primary key field in your main table ParentIDFieldName This property holds the name of the field where will be stored the Primary key value of the parent data record NodeText Here you can either fill the name of the field that holds a description text or an expression which will be evaluated and the result value will be used as NodeText in the
221. ions It is also rather time consuming to use these Classes and manually fill in the right Properties and Methods in the Property Sheet while developing new Applications all over again Visual Extend for Visual FoxPro fills exactly this gap by bringing a complete Application Development Framework to the Visual FoxPro Software Developer Community Thanks to the thought out modular design of Visual Extend every Software Developer can decide whether to use all ofthe Visual Extend Application Development Framework or to take only some parts of it for creating their own application The Object Orientation of Visual Extend allows the Developers to subclass existing Visual Extend classes and to customize and enhance further the development environment according their specific needs Visual Extend is not just a set of Foundation Class Library It s much more Visual Extend provides the Software Developer with a powerful Foundation Class Library with equally powerful Builders for a maximum of productivity gain Visual Extend includes the following components e Modular Microsoft Compliant Visual Extend Foundation Class Library with extensive Application Development Support e Visual Extend Wizards and fully reentrant Builders for Application Form Grid Childgrid Picklist PickTextbox and OneToMany Forms and much more other e Other Visual Extend Developer Productivity Tools like the Developer Menu VFX Task Pane VFX Base Class Switcher and Visual Obje
222. is F in the TreeView control are loaded only nodes at first level and nodes that are expanded when status of the control is restored Child nodes that are not visible when Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 76 form is loaded will not load at that time These nodes are loaded in the Treeview control when their parent node is expanded IRestoreTreeviewStatus When this property is set to T a list of expanded nodes is saved for currently logged user when the form is closed Next time when the form is loaded same nodes of the Treeview control are expanded to restore treeview status 9 8 2 Layout settings of the TreeView Control These settings are correspondent to the TreeView ActiveX control Style 0 tvwStyleText 1 tvwStylePictureText 2 tvwStylePlusMinusText 3 tvwStylePlusMinusPictureText 4 tvwStyleLinesText 5 tvwStyleLinesPictureText 6 tvwStyleLinesPlusMinusText 7 tvwStyleLinesPlusMinusPictureText Appearance 0 ccFlat 1 cc3D Border Style 0 ccNone 1 ccFixedSingle Indentation This property sets the width of the indentation of nodes in the TreeView control 9 9 VFX CTreeViewOneToMany Builder Main purpose of this class is to represent the data contained in a particular table parent table in a tree structure along with the powerful functionality that class gives the developers The TreeView structure gives the end user complete overview
223. is is goProgram oConnMgr cExecuteAfterCursorFill This property is aimed to contain code which needs to be executed after CursorFill method is executed Here can be placed code for any necessary data processing as well as code for creating indexes Using a property it is possible specify code to be executed when the object is created at run time Filter Filter expression to be applied on the retrieved data for the created cursor Order The index tag specified here will be used for the created cursor Index tag can be defined in the VFX Data Environment Builder Methods CreateIndexes The code in this method is generated by the VFX Data Environment Builder Here are placed command to build needed indexes for the created cursor This method is called immediately after CursorFill method 22 4 Managing data access using the file Config vfx When developing the application the choose DataSource used in the CursorAdapter Builder refers resources local for the developer s computer It is not always possible the users computers to use resources named in same way For instance the name of SQL Server instance on customer s network is always different than name of your local SQL Server running on your computer and used in development Even if on the development computer and on the customer computer a SQL server database should be used the name of the SQL server on both computers will be different Hence as a rule on the de
224. is passed for execution and tcResultObjectName is empty a temporary cursor name is generated and INTO CURSOR clause is appended to the eceuted command Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 217 e When tcDataXML is passed it is required to have MSXML 4 0 installed on the computer If MSXML 4 0 is not installed an error is logged and the execution is cancelled In such case an empty string is returned Wichtig Ein Array wird als Riickgabewert von einem Web Service nicht unterstiitzt Wenn der COM Server als Web Service eingesetzt wird ist es nicht m glich als Riickgabewert ein Array zu liefern Die COM Server Klasse besitzt drei versteckte Methoden Impersonate CheckRequiredComponents und LogError die hier nicht weiter erl utert werden sollen 28 2 Security 28 2 1 Execute Scripts When ExecScript is executed VFP writes the script as temporary program file This temporary file is created into Temp folder and thus the user account under which the script is executed must have appropriate rights on that folder This can be achieved in two different ways either administrator can assign necessary rights to the user account or a config fpw is created for the component redirecting temporary folder to a folder whara the user account is allowed to write files In the COMServer project file is included a config file for this purpose 28 2 2 Impersonation Die Methode Impersonate benutzt die API F
225. isual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 233 32 Aktualisierung von VFX Es ist sinnvoll VFX regelm ig zu aktualisieren damit immer der aktuelle Stand zur Verf gung steht VFX kann automatisch auf Aktualisierungen pr fen Dies kann im Dialog Update Settings eingestellt werden Wenn die Option Ask for download on startup gew hlt ist berpr ft VFX bei jedem ersten Start an jedem Tag ob ein aktualisierter Build zur Verf gung steht Falls ja wird gefragt ob der neue Build heruntergeladen und installiert werden soll Die berpr fung wird nicht durchgef hrt wenn keine Verbindung mit dem Internet besteht ber die Schaltfl che Check for updates now kann die berpr fung nach aktualisierten Builds jederzeit manuell gestartet werden VFX Update settings Choose an update type O Ask for download on startup Manually check Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 234 33 Summary As we saw VFX provides a complete development environment which does not leave any wishes open All important settings of VFX classes in particular of the form classes can be completed with reentrant builders Practically all properties and functions described in this article can be set without programming only by using the builder Even so it is practically to be able trough Hooks to intervene in each place in the program workflow As far as VFX source code is supplied and i
226. isual Extent website will be open and a license can be obtained online After payment processing you will receive an unlimited activation key per e mail Note that you cannot copy the VFX installation from one PC to another without requesting a new Activation Key Your Registration Key is based on your PC and is unique Every VFX user will have a distinct unique Registration Key and therefore needs to register online on our web site to get the Activation Key and to be able to work with the VFX Builders We hope that you appreciate the new Software based approach and welcome you to the next generation of VFX The very best VFX ever 5 4 Setup the Visual FoxPro Environment for VFX You must have Microsoft Visual FoxPro 9 0 properly installed before you can start working with VFX 11 0 Next you should ensure that the 11 0 Menu is automatically loaded each time when you start your Visual FoxPro 9 0 Start the application Vfxmnu app directly from Windows Explorer or from VFP command window The application Vfxmnu app is placed in Builder subfolder of your VFX installation We suggest the following way Add this line in the file CONFIG FPW in the VFP 9 0 folder NOTE If you do not have a file named CONFIG FPW just create an empty one with Notepad command do HOME vfx prg This row instructs that the program VFX PRG should be run when is started In the file VFX PRG create this file with Notepad and sa
227. ith your mouse and select builder Of course you could also select the grid object in the property sheet and select builder from within the property sheet The VFX Grid Builder loads and presents this Dialog VFX CGrid Builder Control Source customer customer customer id IL customer min order art Er __ customer discount Control Source customer customer_id __ customer company_name _ customer contact_name Output Mask 000 customer contact_title customer address Read Only eueinmer nihi Incremental Search Since the user interface is the same as the one used on the grid page of the form builder for a detailed description of all the options please refer to the description under the topic called The VFX CDataFormPage builder Fields Selected Control Type textbox Header Nummer Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 80 10 Builders and Wizards for Pick Fields 10 1 VFX CChildGrid Builder The Child Grid Builder allows you to enhance the functionality of your child grids Use this Builder to either customize some fields or to edit the method code OnPostInsert which will fire whenever a new child record has been inserted It s similar to the standard VFX data manipulation form where you have the same granularity of events OnPrelnsert e Onlnsert OnPostinsert In the OnPost
228. ive than ever before Page 146 Lines Chart Monochrome colors Last three year s graph Sales 2009 2008 XAxis Area Chart Solid colors Simple Bars Chart Random gradient colors Multiple Bars Chart Triangular bars basic gradient colors Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 147 3D Stacked Bars Gradient custom colors Stacked Area Custom gradient colors 3D Bars Chart Gradient colors using palette 5 cylinder bars Horizontal Simple Bars Chart Custom solid colors cylinder bars Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 148 Horizontal Multiple Bars Chart Custom gradient colors Horiz Stacked Bars Custom solid colors Horizontal Full Stacked Bars Chart Custom solid colors white background Last three year s graph Sales gt EX 2007 250 500 750 Full Stacked Area Chart with transparent solid colors Last three year s graph Sales B 200 2008 2007 5 YAxis XAxis Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 149 Properties aColors ReadOnly one dimensional array that stores information about the current colors for the chart Useful when working with random colors aCoord Bi dimensional array that stores information about the object that is under the mouse like X Y Width
229. jects to new versions and to new builds of Visual Extend e The Data Environment Builder integrated with the Form Wizard Builder makes the visual assembly of the data environment possible including the integration of the CA Builder the extended Form Builders have tabs for view parameters including input fields and requery buttons linked tables required fields and additional columns for the report display e The Parent Child Builder enables you to visually define all dependent child forms instead of the manual defining in the onMore method e Inthe Language Setup Builder you can activate the localization translation of the user interface at runtime so that the users can choose of their own e In The Customer list the developer may not only generate activation keys but also administer all the related customer data e Inthe Update management define new versions and grant the customers the matching download permissions e Inthe Configuration management you can now store as many definitions as you please put all VFX tables onto the backend server and add your own columns to the definition which are stored encrypted too e The CursorAdapter Wizard automatically generates cursor adaptor classes for all tables within a database container in a library you choose e The AuditTrigger Wizard automatically generates all triggers for the audit trail for single tables or all tables of a database container for tracking
230. ked to the left of the screen This default can be changed at any time by the developer to meet the application specific needs Following Office Compatible Standards VFX applications have a user specific Recently Used File List where the last selections appear and are only one click away from being selected again The number of entries in the list is individual customizable for every user in User management dialog The File Exit menu option conforms to the Office Compatible principles too Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 36 7 1 2 Edit Menu SEE View Favorites Tool Edit Ctri E C New Ctri N E Copy Record Delete Ctrl D r Find Ctrl F Other FB Here are placed all Data Manipulation Functions which apply to the currently selected record as well as the possibility to call the Find and Other Function forms Some menu options might be disabled depending on the mode of the active form which can be either in Edit mode oForm nFormStatus 1 e Insert mode oForm nFormStatus 2 or e View Mode oForm nFormStatus 0 For detailed information regarding this functionality please refer to the chapter Discussion of the VFX Data Manipulation Form later in this document 7 1 3 View Menu Favorites Tools Window Hel Toolbars Next Page Ctri PaDn 4 Previous Page Ctrl PgUp Ctrl Home Next CtrltDn Arrow o Previous Ctrl UpArrow Bott
231. l be called from CreateZipArchive every time when Zip file that should be created already exist before a file would be added to archive after a file has been added to archive after an archive has been successfully created when an archive cannot be created there are no files to be added to the archive cCurrentOperatedFile Name of the file that is processed at the moment nState Status 1 The file cArchiveFullPathName already exists 2 Adding cCurrentOperatedFile to the archive started 3 The file cCurrentOperatedFile were added to the archive Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 209 4 File cCurrentOperatedFile cannot be added to the archive 5 Archive creation completed successfully 6 The archive cannot be created 7 No files or folders to be added to the archive nAllFilesSize Total size of all files which will be added to archive nZIPedFilesSize Total size of files added to archive so far nArchiveCurrentSize Current size of the archive tnCompressionLevel The ZIP algorithm uses different compression levels The acceptable values are through 9 Default compression level 0 No compression 1 Fastest execution 6 Default compression 9 Best compression The values not listed here allow more precise selection and thus are a compromise between speed and compression level The standard compression can be reached alte
232. l captions tooltiptext and Status Bar messages generating unique constants and putting them into the Vfxmsg dbf table the master table for all include files After this process you can use the VFX message editor described later in this documentation to translate the text in the different languages To call the VFX LangSetup Builder first open the form for which you want to generate or analyze the captions tooltip texts and status bar messages We could say all texts which are applicable for the translation Then select the following option Form LangSetup Builder in the VFX menu VFX LangSetup Builder Press BUILD to start the LangSetup Builder v C IooTipTet Status Bar C Run Time Localization C Overwrite Code Mark the Checkboxes correspondent to the desired options Click on the button Build to start the generation of the code for the LangSetup method After generation look at the code that were generated for the LangSetup Method If you marked the Overwrite Code Checkbox the generated code will be written in the LangSetup Method of the currently open form in design mode The caption codes will be put into the VFX message table Vfxmsg dbf where you can edit and translate them into other languages Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 93 VFX LangSetup Builder Object WIZARD HEADER 17 12 04 22 20 33 thisForm Caption FRMKLINDEN thisf
233. l tree structure When a particular node in the TreeView is clicked the record pointer is moved to the corresponding data row in the main table The user can view and modify the data on the right part in the form Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 75 With the VFX CTreeViewForm builder you can rapidly create and key up a form based on cTreeViewForm class and set all necessary properties VFX CTreeViewForm Builder Form Name Caption Master T able frmParenttree ParentTree Parent Edit Pages TreeView Optic Form Options View paramete Linked Tables Required Field Report Field Assistant Table ID Field Name ParentlD Parent v Parent ID Field Name OverlD Fields Always on Node Text descr 1 parentid a descr 1 date checked value ins_date ins_ust edt_date edt_usr overid parentcode ins_time C Allow Node Rename Style 7 tvwStyleLinesPlusMinusPicti Appearance 1 cc3D v Border Style 0 ccNone v Indentation 35 0000 Restore expand nodes status on load Load all Treeview nodes on form start The builder works similar to the VFX CDataFormPage builder You can make your setting in the EditPage and FormOptions pages in the same way as in VFX CdataFormPage builder In addition to this you can make your setting for the TreeView co
234. lReturnErrorArray when this parameter is T in case of error the method Execute returns an error array instead of expected result tcResultObjectName Name des Ergebnisobjekts Cursor Array oder Variable tcDataXML local cursors sent to the service The content of this string is transformed to cursors before excuting command or script and is available to be used in them It is possible to include several cursor in this XML string tcPath Zus tzliche Pfadangabe falls erforderlich tlTransaction if this parameter is T and also the parameter tlScript is T the script will be executed into transaction In case of error the transaction is rolled back tcUserName Benutzername f r die Impersonate Anmeldung tcPassword Kennwort f r die Impersonate Anmeldung tcDomainName Name der Domain f r die Impersonate Anmeldung R ckgabewert XML string array or variable containing the resultant cursor An empty string is returned in case of error if tlReturnErrorArray parameter is F An error may occurred but during impersonation or during the execution If an error occurred during the execution the error information is logged in a text file ErrorLog txt in current folder Note that is the component works as web service current folder is Windows System32 If tlReturnErrorArray is T an array created with AERROR function will be returned Bemerkungen e When tlScript is T the parameter tcResultObjectName is required If a single command
235. lar menu element in the menu structure can be changed using drag and drop operation For this purpose is used 4way button at the left part of all pads and bars In some cases moving the elements is restricted a pad element can not become a bar element and a bar element cannot become a pad element In addition it is not possible to move a bar in its child popup Other properties of the menu elements can be set in the Properties panel These are the font the foreground and background colors a message that will be displayed in the VFP status bar as well as constants that will be used when a multi lingual menu is developed changes will be displayed in the designer in the active element With the button ActionOnSelect the code that will be executed when the menu element is selected can be entered in an editor window Using the button SkipFor can be entered a logical expression When this expression evaluates to T this menu element cannot be selected The properties that are set are always valid for the active menu element By default newly created child elements obtain properties values of their parent Font properties can be changed by clicking Font button The Standard Windows Font Selection Dialog appears In this dialog you can select font name and font size for the element as well as the font style At any time can be displayed a preview for the menu using Preview button in the toolbar or by choosing the option Preview fro
236. lass is a underlying class for all created CursorAdapter objects used in a VFX application All handy features of VFX forms like incremental search in grids filter and print functionality are also available for forms that use CursorAdapter objects as datasource This functionality is implemented in same way as for forms using tables or views CursorAdapter object based on the class cBaseDataAccess uses a connection manager class which developers know from former VFX versions This ensures that all CursorAdapter objects will use one common data handler This approach not only optimizes usage of data access resources but also considers connections license policy so that no redundant connections to the datasource are created The connection specific information that will be used by the Connection Manager object is read from the file Config vfx Similar to the DBC where can be stored connection information for more than one connection in the file Config vfx can be stored information about several connections The connection can be created either to a DBC or to any remote data source using either a DSN entry or a connection string In order to protect the file Config vfx against unauthorized access it is password encrypted The password that is used for encryption is keyed up in the property goProgram cconfigpassword and in this way is included into the compiled EXE file Through additional entries in Config vfx file the application can connect to
237. lder structure in VFX folder File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back I 2 Search lie Folders Address C Program 9 v Go Norton AntiVirus X Folders x Name Size Type a 6 a bitmap File Folder bitmap File Folder C3 languages data File Folder co mover form File Folder toolbar help File Folder toolbox include File Folder Builder lib File Folder amp wi File Folder img program File Folder amp lang C9REGDATA File Folder lang report File Folder res config fpw FPW File lang E pihook VCT Microsoft Visual FoxPro Class Library pool E pjhook vex Microsoft Visual FoxPro Class Library a lang Ari FLL File C3 data vfx PJT Microsoft Visual FoxPro Project form vfx pjx Microsoft Visual FoxPro Project help vFxapprights dbf Microsoft Visual FoxPro Table include vFxclass dbf Microsoft Visual FoxPro Table S C lib vfxclass FPT Microsoft Visual FoxPro Table builder vFxhelp cdx Microsoft Visual FoxPro Index E menu vFxhelp dbf Microsoft Visual FoxPro Table program vfxhelp Fpt Microsoft Yisual FoxPro Table REGDATA vfxpath cdx Microsoft Yisual FoxPro Index report vfxpath dbF Microsoft Visual FoxPro Table lt The VFX folder serves as a central storage for all components and is a base for all Projects created with VFX Application wizard as described later in this
238. lity on Click and Refresh Remark Only CommandButtons from Form s toolbar are shown in Ribbon Toolbar Menu If the property cMenuForm is not empty the form menu is loaded as second group if the form has toolbar or as first group if the form has no toolbar It s visible when the form is Active Each menu item is shown as a Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 173 separate item in the tab If the menu is separate in sections in the tab separate groups will be created The Picture Caption and Skip for clauses are also kept As well the functionality on Select As in the Menu designer there is no possibility to add more than one picture if in the same path as the main picture is available disabled picture named lt name of picture gt dis lt extension of picture gt it will be used as Disabled picture in Ribbon Toolbar Menu tab Remark It s expected Form menu to content only one pad 21 2 LoadAdditiveTabMenues A new method LoadAdditiveTabMenues is added in cRibbonTbrTabMenu provided for users to write there code to Add theirs tabs and items This method is called after loading the main tabs and items in the menu So Users menu tabs will be added as last ones If the user wants to add a Menu tab and Items he must write in LoadAdditiveTabMenues method and in onSelectItem method It s also possible to create a new method instead of onSelectItem one and to bind the Execute event of
239. ls could be added appropriate labels With this the form is ready and can be saved t CAskViewArg Enter ID from to just numbers for the parentid you are looking for The parametrized view is based on the field parentid you know just a demo Parentid From Oo O Hint Enter 1 9999 to see some records Parentid To 0 x Now the form based on the class CAskViewArg must be called from the Data Manipulation Form This happens on the end of the nit Events do form Form for input of the View parameter with this It is also possible the form for input of the view parameters to be called again at run time If the call is made from a control for example from the Click Event of a button the call must look in this way do form Form for input of the View parameter with thisform This is all what you need to do to work with views All further is handled by VFX 22 7 Multi Client Support Usually VFX Application works with just one database as it was set in the VFX Application Wizard When needed it is possible to build client management feature Therefore the property cDataDir of the application object cFoxAppl in Appl vcx should be set to an empty string When the datapath is empty at run time the Application searches for a file Config vfx The usage of the file Config vfx is discussed above in the topic Managing data access using the file Config vfx When the file Config vfx do
240. m VMD menu When saving menu VMD creates automatically the needed include files for language dependant menus The subsequent steps after editing menus are not required Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 110 16 VFX Task Pane Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 111 17 Usage and Features for End Users The form that is created with the VFX Form Builder has lots of useful features The position of the form in on the workspace the size of the form using a resizer the size of the form can be changed by the user at run time the latest active page of the Pageframe as well as Grids Sort order Column width will be saved personally for every particular user When an user closes a form and then opens it again the form is displayed exactly same as when it was closed 17 1 CDataFormPage Form User Interface The default user interface for a standard data manipulation form is the following when it is not in edit or insert mode Customer rn Data List Customer ID 653 Postal Code 322323 First Name Robert Country USA Last Name McClain Contact Name Johan Organization Name Green Inc Contact Title Schneider Address 16 Park Street Phone Number 32438743893 City Edinburgh Fax Number 34433434 State Category ID 54544 Region York Note If you are in edit or insert mode the caption of the f
241. mFile 2 The Installation key is stored into a file and at same time is sent as an e mail attachment to the developer The name of the file must be defined in the property cParamFile The e mail address of the developer must be defined in the property cRegEMail 11 After invoking the registration dialog the installation key is stored in a file This file can be sent later to the developer The file name is defined in the property cParamFile 12 After invoking the registration dialog the installation key is stored in a file and is sent immediately as an e mail attachment to the developer The name of the file must be defined in the property cParamFile The e mail address of the developer must be defined in the property cRegEMail The installation key is a numeric value 10 digits long The end user can send the installation key to the developer by e mail or could enter it on a registration web page Form the VFX menu Activation Customer List is started the VFX Customers List dialog The developer uses the installation key in the VFX Create Activation Key wizard to create an activation key for the user Then the generated activation key it is sent to the user and the user can activate the application by entering the activation key in the registration form It is also possible just to store the activation key file in the same folder where the EXE file is placed On next start the application will read the activation key from the file
242. mer VFX versions Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 44 User Rights Viewlevel Insertlevel Copylevel Editlevel child item OneToMany oneto OneToMany 2 oneto2 Parent Tree parenttree One to Tree onetotree Parent Documents parentdocs Business Graph BUSINESSGR Parent2 parent2 Delayed delayed Audit Trail audit Parent The administrator has the user security level 1 and thus all rights A user who has the user security level 99 has the few rights In the form user rights can for each form can be specified which user security level is necessary in order user to be allowed to run the form to insert new data records to edit existing data records and to delete data records NOTE Users cannot view or alter other user accounts with a higher security level than their own Security levels starts with 1 Administrator and ends with 99 lowest security level Additionally you can define an access string for further customization of your security needs For additional security issues especially all the VFX form security features please refer to the VFX Technical Documentation When a particular user does not have rights to run a form the concerned form will not be initialized If user rights are not defined in the user rights dialog the properties values CanInsert and ICanDelete that were set within the VFX form Wizard are
243. mername Caption Customer Name i customers contactperson Format customers phone customers address Input Mask 2000000000000 0000000000000 Status Bar Customer Name AutoCompSource 4 AutoComplete 0 Does not support AutoComplete v Read Only Unique Field F Use DBC Definitions Overwrite Font DE Builder OK Apply The Form builder is fully reentrant This means that the builder be arbitrarily often called when the form s settings has to be changed It is also possible the form is to be edited on by hand with VFP and afterwards to be edited again with the Form Builder without losing or overriding the properties 2 6 VFX CGrid Builder When it is needed changes to be made for the Grid only it is not necessary to use the Form Builder The properties of the Grids can be changed with the VFX Grid Builder As all VFX builders the Grid Builder is reentrant too Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 19 2 7 Test The form can be started and tested directly from the form designer or from the project manager In the init method of all VFX forms it is checked whether the application object exists In case when it is missing the form was started directly from the project manager and VFX creates the environment independently in order to let the form run fully functi
244. n We would appreciate it if you would send us your translations of the VFX messages Vfxmsg dbf cdx fpt in another language that is still not supported by VFX so we could make them available to other developers as well Thank you Checklist for the creation of multilingual applications using VFX V Use the USERTXT H resp USERMSG H include files which are generated from the VFX Message Editor to manage and store all language specific user interface elements from your application The repository for messages as well as captions tooltip texts and status bar messages is the table VFXMSG DBF In this table you can find also all VFX messages and captions which have been translated already Y In your application define constants rather than the text strings directly ie use WAIT WINDOW Loc Text1 rather than WAIT WINDOW MyText Y Use USERDEF TXT include file for application specific constants which are the same for all languages for better organization of your localization work Y Use the VFX LangSetup Builder to create the VFX form method named LangSetup to place the localization code by adding your captions tooltip texts and so on into this method using define constants The VFX LangSetup Builder automatically generates the code for the LangSetup method and updates the VFXMSG DBF table with messages and captions Y Translate your text into the different languages using the VFX Message Editor The VFX Message Editor then gener
245. n DB2 UDB CREATE TABLE t2 AS SELECT tl FROM 23 2 8 ANSI joins Similar to and SQL Server the DB2 UDB syntax for joins is ANSI style with the operators INNER _ LEFT OUTER _ RIGHT OUTER _ FULL OUTER VFP and SQL Server display all NULL values at the beginning of the result set when the ORDER BY or GROUP BY clause is included in a SELECT statement In DB2 UDB NULL values of a column appear last when that column is ordered in ascending sequence and first when ordered in descending sequence Although DB2 UDB does not provide syntax for changing the sort order of NULL values there is a way to obtain similar results by using the COALESCE function to convert NULL to an empty string 23 2 9 Autoincrement The SQL Server IDENTITY property can be specified in the table definition to provide system generated values in sequence DB2 UDB also provides an IDENTITY attribute that can be specified in the table definition The syntax used in DB2 UDB differs from SQL Server and VFP VFP SQL Server DB2 UDB CREATE TABLE employee empid INT AUTOINC name VARCHAR 40 NOT NULL job VARCHAR 15 NOT NULL hire_date DATETIME NOT NULL department INT NULL basic salary DECIMAL 8 2 CREATE TABLE employee empid INT IDENTITY name VARCHAR 40 NOT NULL job VARCHAR 15 NOT NULL hire_date department INT NULL basic salary DECIMAL 8 2 DATETI
246. n ever before Page 206 25 Creating multilingual Applications using VFX VFX is well prepared for creation of multilingual applications You can choose between runtime localization and design time localization 25 1 Localizing at design time When creating a new VFX project can be chosen between different application languages In the new project are generated include files for the selected language accordingly If it is needed later to translate the application into another language for every form the VFX LangSetup Builder This Builder constructs an entry for every Caption of the form At run time the value of a constant is assigned to the Caption The constants can be edited with the VFX Message editor Then before compiling the application include files for the desired language are simply copied in the project folder and lets the application is built The interface elements occur in the following areas e User interface of the existing functionality in the Visual Extend class library and all dialogs e User interface of your own applications You don t have to worry about first point The user interface of the existing functionality in the Visual Extend class library and all dialogs exists in eight languages and you don t have to translate a single word to create an application in one of the supported languages If you need the Visual Extend class library in another language you can easily extend Vfxmsg dbf by your ow
247. n in Vfxctrl vcx On click it creates an excel file and Attach the file to an e mail which is created and send VFX send e mail dialog is used to take E mails adresses Subject and text for e mail The Excel file it s created with same columns as in Search grid except fields from related tables If the column is Calculated field and in the expression there is field from related table it s also not included The grid column headers captions are respected as well in Excel file Methods CreateFiledList Creates fields which will be exported based on grid SetColumnCaptions t cFileName Add column captions in xls file same as in grid columns The expected parameter it the xls file name Properties cExportedFields Internally used gt gt Contains a list of fields to be exported cExportedFieldsCaptions lt lt Internally used gt gt Select a list of exported fields captions Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 181 22 Data Handling 22 1 Data Handling conception One of the greatest innovations in VFX 11 0 is the completely new conception of the data access Don t worry existing applications are fully compatible with the new data access conception As till now it is possible to work further directly with tables or views on local or Remote data sources The new data access is rather an additional possibility to access various data sources VFX 11 0 supports the VFP class CursorAdap
248. n of the grid a System specific value can chosen In the Drop Down combo are listed all possible hardware parameters that can be used for creation the Installation key In addition to this additional string operations can be used for further processing on this value For example instead of the whole hard disk drive Serial number only the last four digits could be used for creating the Installation key In the Combobox in the first column HDD Factory Serial Number row should be chosen The correspondent VFX system variable is named HDDFactoryNumber and it is automatically filled in the second column of the Grid To use only the last 4 digits you need to write the following expression in this column RIGHT ALLTRIM HDDFactoryNumber 4 When one of the system specific values File Creation Date or Registry Key Value will be used must be specified additional parameters When the File Creation Date of a file will be used the name of the file must be entered When Windows Registry Key Value will be used must be specified the name the registry key These additional parameters are entered in the column Additional Data On the user s PC will be created an Installation key from the activation rule All parameters included in the Activation rule will be used If just one of these parameters of the PC changes the application registration becomes invalid and the user need to obtain a new activation key corresponding to the new hardware details In the gri
249. n the main toolbar JC Use this icon from the Visual FoxPro Form Control Toolbar and drop it on your toolbar as needed 18 23 2 Adding a toolbar to a Form The possibility to add a toolbar for a form is very user friendly The toolbar must be based on cToolbar class and saved into Appl vcx class library The name of the toolbar is entered in a property cToolbarClass of the form VFX invokes the toolbar automatically if the form is active and it hides again when another form becomes active Of course the state and the position of the toolbar are saved on a per user basis Usually in the Click method of the toolbar buttons is called a method of the active form For example Screen activeform myMethod For example to open a Child form using a button in the toolbar add into the toolbar a button based on the class cToolbarClass In the Click event of the button write this code _screen activeform onmore 1 This is all Since VFX guarantees the fact that the toolbar is visible only if the correspondent form is active we can be sure that _ screen activeform exists The OnMore method is called within this form and receives as parameter a passed value Thus the form is notified that the first array element of the OnMore method will be used without activating the OnMore Dialog Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 160 18 24 CWizard Class The class cWizard makes it possible to create as
250. n was paid to the fact that it must work both directly with VFP tables and also with local views and with remote views In particular Views cannot have any index keys VFX must also provide a temporary index file in each case in which an ordering is needed Views can be used as data source for every VFX Form type It also possible to base OneToMany forms or Parent Child constructions on views The usage of views is possible with Picklists too Thus an VFX application can be used as front end for example for a SQL server or other remote data sources In most cases Views are parameterized The parameters must be defined before querying the data of the view For entering the view parameter VFX provides the form class CAskViewArg The Data Manipulation Form is created as usual using the VFX Form Builder The property WorkOnView will be set to T For the view in the data environment the property noDataOnLoad will be set to T This means that by the loading of the form the view will be opened without querying data Now a form based on the class CAskViewArg will be created The controls which contain fields as ControlSource that will be used also as view parameters can be copied through the clipboard from the Data Manipulation Form on the form based on the class CAskViewArg In the property cviewparameter is specified Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 187 the name of the View parameter For the contro
251. n your Visual FoxPro menu From this menu you can call the VFX Application Wizard and other VFX wizards Tip If you have followed the installation instructions this menu is automatically loaded when you start The following VFX Wizards and Builders will help you to create professional Visual FoxPro Applications in record breaking time Application Wizard for the generation of anew Application Form Wizard for the generation of anew Form Form Builder including multi page forms reentrant Grid Builder reentrant Picklist Builder reentrant OneToMany Builder including multi page for parent and multi page for multiple child tables reentrant ChildGrid Builder reentrant Picklist Builder for Picklists within child grids reentrant 22 224244424 How to start If you followed the installation instructions you can call the VFX builders using the right mouse anytime when the corresponding object has been selected Automates the generation of the code for the VFX LangSetup method Great help for creation of a multilingual application How to start Either from the VFX Menu by selecting Form LangSetup Builder or by starting LANGBLDR APP Automates the generation of messagebox dialogs and the associated constants for the include files How to start Either from the VFX Menu by selecting Form Messagebox Builder or by starting MSGBLDR APP Automates the localization of messages and other captions as well as the generation
252. nach dem letzten Vorkommen von cSearchExpression nOccurrence 1 Wenn nOccurrence gleich 2 ist sucht RAT nach dem vorletzten Vorkommen usw 30 3 3 R ckgabewert Smallint 30 3 4 Hinweise RATO die Umkehrfunktion zu durchsucht den Zeichenausdruck in cExpressionSearched von rechts nach links nach dem letzten Auftreten der in cSearchExpression angegebenen Zeichenfolge Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 224 gibt eine ganze Zahl zur ck die die Position des ersten Zeichens von cSearchExpression in cExpressionSearched angibt RAT gibt 0 zur ck wenn cSearchExpression nicht in cExpressionSearched gefunden wird oder wenn nOccurrence gr er ist als die Anzahl des Auftretens von cSearchExpression in cExpressionSearched Die mit RAT ausgef hrte Suche ber cksichtigt Gro und Kleinschreibung Siehe auch ATCO 30 3 5 Beispiel declare gcString nvarchar 4000 gcFindString nvarchar 4000 select gcString N Alles Verg ngliche Ist nur ein Gleichnis Das Unzul ngliche Hier wirds Ereignis Das Unbeschreibliche Hier ist es getan Das Ewig Weibliche Zieht uns hinan Faust II Vers 12104ff Chorus mysticus gcFindString Das select dbo RAT gcFindString gcString 2 Anzeige 94 case sensitive 30 4 OCCURS OCCURS2 Gibt den Wert zuriick wie oft ein Zeichenausdruck in einem anderen Zeichenausdruck vorkommt 3
253. nding page Justified Tab Check this option if your tabs should be justified otherwise they will be variable in the length and will not fill the whole width of your form For every page defined through the Page Count option you can select the following options Fields Selected Here you see all fields you selected for the currently selected edit page To select fields use the Field Assistant Window which is a separate form that offers all fields currently available in the data environment Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 58 Control Type Define which control type you want to use for every selected field All control types defined in VFX are available for usage NOTE To use your own classes make sure to add them field by field in the DBC as display class library Caption Caption for the selected field The default will be read from the database container Format Format property for the selected field The default will be read from the database container Input Mask Input Mask property for the selected field The default will be read from the database container Status Bar Status Bar Message used for this field The default will be read from the database container property comment resp if empty the caption Read only If a control will be used for display information only check this checkbox AutoCompSource Name of table that will be used for AutoComplete function It is
254. nds to be used in vertical scale tn caleNumber 0 corresponds to the highest scale legend 1 returns the value to be used in determining the width of the scale legends GetScaleValue tnScaleNumber Returns the value for the N th tick mark on the vertical axis tnScaleNumber 0 corresponds to the highest tick mark on the axis It is then increment by 1 for all the tick marks on the axis SaveChartProperties Used in conjuction with GetChartProperties method Saves a copy of the current properties for a chart so that they can be compared with later changes Subsequent call to GetChartProperties 3 then shows only those properties changed since SaveToFile tcFile tnQuality Saves the current chart to a file in the image format compatible with Gdi Bmp Png Jpeg Gif Tiff and Emf tcFile tnQuality where tcFile character the destination file name Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 157 Make sure to add the extension otherwise the chart will be saved in PNG format tnQuality numeric determines the image quality to be used when a JPEG file is saved From 0 low quality to 100 best quality For full control while saving or for using some specific encoders you can access the oBmp property of GDIGraph and use the GdiPlusX commands available for the bitmap object Just send the file name as a parameter and GDIGraph will save the current chart based on the file extension
255. nged by the developer It is possible to suppress the Splashscreen After displaying the Splashscreen the main window is created and login form is invoked By default each user of a VFX application Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 15 must be logged in with user name and password It is possible to skip the login form and to log the user automatically using the Windows login name 2 2 1 Usage After the login the VFX application is used similarly like Office applications Users who are familiar with the usage of Word or Excel can practically immediately work productively with a VFX application 2 2 2 Standard toolbar Many of the buttons on the toolbar are identical in their function with those from MS Office products 2 2 3 Open Dialog By default forms are started using the Open Dialog The Open Dialog appears in Windows XP layout The information about the forms that are shown in Open Dialog is located in the table Vfxfopen dbf Open x Simple Parent Child Item OneToMany OneToMany 2 Parent Tree One to Tree Parent Documents Business Graph More Parent2 Delayed Audit Trail Outlook Report Selection Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 16 2 2 4 Forms Customers mn Editi List Customers 1 Customer Name Alfreds Futterkiste Address Obere Str 57 floor 3 Contact Person Maria Anders
256. nnsnnnen 233 33 SUMMARY de 234 33 1 YOUR FEEDBACK IS IMPORTANT FOR tenerent 234 Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 10 1 Introduction Rainer Becker Welcome to the new version 11 0 of Visual Extend which we are particularly proud of This one is the biggest update produced for this well known framework so far That marketing phrase of course begins to become a little boring with its repetitions both for Visual FoxPro and Visual Extend but nevertheless the statement actually hits the nail on the head in many areas of both products Let us start with Visual FoxPro 9 0 1 1 Based on Visual FoxPro 9 0 Visual Extend 11 0 is based on Visual FoxPro 9 0 Both new versions are available for purchase since the beginning of 2005 Besides the fact that Visual Extend 11 0 needs Visual FoxPro 9 0 as a prerequisite there are many more reasons to take a closer look at the newest version of Visual FoxPro and to buy it Among other features Visual FoxPro 9 0 provides e Substantial extensions in the area of the database engine especially as regards SQL syntax and the fall of many of Visual FoxPro s limitations e feature much demanded and yearned for in many years particularly in countries of German language has finally arrived The totally new built report designer and a fundamental reworking of the report execution with convincing results e Diverse
257. nnzeichen sind Leerzeichen Tabulator und Wagenriicklaufzeichen Beachten Sie dass GETWORDCOUNT jedes der Zeichen in cDelimiters als Trennzeichen verwendet und nicht die ganze Zeichenkette als einzelnes Trennzeichen 30 11 3 R ckgabewert Tabelle GETALLWORDS WORDNUM smallint WORD nvarchar 4000 STARTOFWORD smallint LENGTHOFWORD smallint 30 11 4 Hinweise GETWORDCOUNT geht standardm ig davon aus dass W rter durch Leerzeichen oder Tabstopps getrennt werden Wenn Sie als Trennzeichen andere Zeichen angeben ignoriert diese Funktion Leerzeichen und Tabstopps und verwendet nur die angegebenen Zeichen Siehe auch GETWORDNUM GETWORDCOUNT 30 11 5 Beispiel declare cString nvarchar 4000 set cString N Wo fass ich dich unendliche Natur Euch Br ste wo Ihr Quellen alles Lebens select from dbo GETALLWORDS cString default select from dbo GETALLWORDS cString 30 12 PROPER Gibt f r einen Zeichenausdruck eine Zeichenfolge zur ck deren W rter kleingeschrieben sind aber jeweils mit einem Gro buchstaben beginnen 30 12 1 Syntax PROPER cExpression Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 230 30 12 2 Parameter cExpression Gibt den Zeichenausdruck an von dem eine Zeichenfolge zur ckgibt deren W rter kleingeschrieben sind aber jeweils mit einem Gro buchstaben beginnen 30 12 3 R ckgabewert Nvarchar 4000 30 12 4 Hinw
258. ntages on each slice instead of values when the property ShowValuesOnShapes is set to true PieLegendDistance For Pie and Doughnut charts the distance in percentage starting from the center of the pie or doughnut where the shape legends will be drawn 0 01 Center of the pie 1 External border of the pie PointShapeWidth For Point and Plain Line charts determines the width of the pen that will draw the shapes QualityCompositing Specifies the quality level to use during compositing Value Name Description 0 Default Default quality 1 HighSpeed High speed low quality 2 HighOuality High quality low speed compositing 3 GammaCorrected Gamma correction is used 4 AssumeLinear Assume linear values QualitySmoothing Specifies whether smoothing antialiasing is applied to lines and curves and the edges of filled areas 0 Default Specifies no antialiasing HighSpeed Specifies no antialiasing HighQuality Specifies antialiased rendering None Specifies no antialiasing A AntiAlias Specifies antialiased rendering QualityTextRenderingHint Specifies the quality of text rendering Each character is drawn using its glyph bitmap with the system default 0 SystemDefault rendering hint The text will be drawn using whatever font smoothing settings the user has selected for the system Each character is drawn using its glyph bitmap Hinting is used to improve character appearance on stems and curvature me Singl
259. ntent Comma separated List of field names from the main data cursor defined by the SourceAlias property that stores the main legends of the charts that are shown in the side legends The side legends will be shown only if the property ShowSideLegend is set to TRUE T cShapeContent Comma separated List of shapes that will be shown for the current chart row Applies to Point charts The use of this property is not obligatory because automatically the value is set based on the current chart row GDICharts brings 11 predefined shapes 1 closed circle 2 closed square 3 closed triangle 4 plus sign 5 star 6 square with plus sign inside 7 open square 8 open circle with dot inside 9 lightning 10 man 11 dot It is possible to use your own shapes too Having some basic Gdi skills you can create your own xfcGrphicsPath object like shown below Create a custom GdiPlusX shape This shape will be used only when the chart is selected to points WITH Screen System Drawing as xfcDrawing LOCAL loPath as xfcGraphicsPath loPath Drawing2D GraphicsPath New loPath StartFigure LOCAL laPoints 4 laPoints 1 Point New 3 0 laPoints 2 Point New 0 3 laPoints 3 Point New 3 6 laPoints 4 Point New 6 3 Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 156 loPath AddPolygon laPoints ENDWITH Fields 3 5 loPath You can play wi
260. ntrol in the page TreeViewOptions There are two types of settings for the TreeView control that you need to set 9 8 1 Databinding of the TreeView control IDFieldName Here you should fill the name of the primary key field in your main table ParentIDFieldName This property holds the name of the field where will be stored the Primary key value of the parent data record NodeText Here you can either fill the name of the field that holds a description text or an expression which will be evaluated and the result value will be used as NodeText in the tree structure When a field name is used the developer can allow the end user to edit the description text directly into the TreeView control This also depends of the AllowNodeRename property If AllowNodeRename is set to T the user can edit labels in the TreeView control and this will automatically update the corresponding data field in the main table AllowNodeRename This property defines if the user is allowed to edit description text in the TreeView control Editing the description in the TreeView control is allowed only when the Node Text is based on single table field The content of the corresponding data field will be automatically be updated according new description entered in the TreeView control Other properties of cTreeview class ILoadAllTreeviewNodes if this property is set to T all nodes are loaded in the TreeView control when form loads When the property value
261. o Kleinschreibung beim Parameter cExpressionSought angepasst der ersetzt wird 30 7 3 R ckgabewert Nvarchar 4000 30 7 4 Hinweise Sie k nnen angeben wo die Ersetzung beginnen und wie oft diese durchgef hrt werden soll STRTRAN gibt die Ergebniszeichenfolge zur ck Geben Sie den Wert 1 f r optionale Parameter ein die bersprungen werden sollen Gleiches gilt wenn Sie nur die Einstellung f r nFlags angeben wollen Siehe auch replace CHRTRAN 30 7 5 Beispiel select dbo STRTRAN ABCDFF XYZ 1 1 0 Anzeige XYZDEF select dbo STRTRAN ABCDEF default 1 1 0 Anzeige DEF select dbo STRTRAN ABCDEFABCGHJabcQWE default 2 1 0 Anzeige ABCDEFGHJabcQWE select dbo STRTRAN ABCDEFABCGHJabcQWE default 2 1 1 Anzeige ABCDEFGHJQWE select dbo STRTRAN ABCDEFABCGHJabcQWE XYZ 2 1 1 Anzeige ABCDEFXYZGHJabcQWE select dbo STRTRAN ABCDEFABCGHJabcQWE XYZ 2 3 1 Anzeige ABCDEFXYZGHJXYZQWE select dbo STRTRAN ABCDEFABCGHJabcQWE XYZ 2 1 2 Anzeige ABCDEFXYZGHJabcQWE select dbo STRTRAN ABCDEFABCGHJabcQWE XYZ 2 3 2 Anzeige ABCDEFXYZGHJabcQWE select dbo STRTRAN ABCDEFABCGHJabcQWE xyZ 2 1 2 Anzeige ABCDEFXYZGHJabcQWE select dbo STRTRAN ABCDEFABCGHJabcQWE XYZ 2 3 2 Anzeige ABCDEFXYZGHJabcQWE select dbo STRTRAN ABCDEFAbcCGHJAbCcQWE Aab xyZ 2 1 2
262. oItem Execute goProgram oMenuBar onItemExecute Adds the second item loItem loPopup2 AddPopupItem Wait window X NORM X This cntTabMenu AddItemToKeyExprsArray loItem CTRL X Right loItem Alignment 1 Used as KEY ID of the menu item loItem cItemKey WW2 LoItem ToolTipText Displays Wait window X CTRL X BINDEVENT loltem Execute goProgram oMenuBar onItemExecute Code in onSelectItem Appl vcx cAppRibbonTbrTabMenu DODEFAULT PRIVATE paUserSource AEVENTS paUserSource 0 lcItemKey paUserSource l cItemKey DO CASE CASE lcItemKey MSG1 MESSAGEBOX 1 Stop 0 16 This Caption CASE lcItemKey MSG2 MESSAGEBOX 2 Question 0 32 This Caption CASE lcItemKey MSG3 MESSAGEBOX 3 Exclamation 0 48 This Caption CASE lcItemKey MSG4 MESSAGEBOX 4 Information 0 64 This Caption CASE lcItemKey WW1 WAIT WINDOW w CASE lcItemKey WW2 WAIT WINDOW X ENDCASE This Refresh 21 1 New method of cRibbonTbrTabMenu class LoadFormsBarToRibbonBar In Ribbon bar is added the possibility to load Form s Toolbar and Menu If the property cToolbarClass is not empty the form s toolbar is loaded as first group in an additive tab in Ribbon Toolbar Menu It s visible when the form is Active Each button from toolbar is shown as a separate item in the tab The Picture DisabledPicture Caption are also kept As well the functiona
263. of the associated include files How to start Either from the VFX Menu by selecting Form Message Editor or by starting MSGEDIT APP Creates professional menus using all options available in VFP Using the visual VFX Menu designer it is possible to key up your menu much more detailed than using VFX Menu designer How to start The VFX Menu designer is started when you open a menu for edition in VFP Project manager Creates Internet applications with forms with same appearance and same functionality corresponding to the forms of your VFX application How to start From the VFX Menu by selecting AFP VFX Wizard Project Documenting PDM EXE The Project Documenting wizard generates an extensive technical documentation for your VFX project in HTML format How to start From the VFX Menu by selecting Project Project Documenting All VFX Form Grid and Picklist Builders are fully reentrant This means that during the Development cycle you can call them as many times as needed without losing any of the settings which have already been defined In Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 25 addition changes done after the original generation of your forms within Visual FoxPro will be read by the Builders next time you call them Because of the very open approach of the VFX builders advanced users might find it useful that the code the builders use is located in a dbf file VFX90 LIB BUI
264. of the hierarchical data relations contained in the particular table Here is an example for a form based on cTreeViewOneToMany class One To Tree Parent 7 Parent 103 Parent 5 Parent ID 101 Overid P0108 Parent 108 Parent 10 l Description Parent 101 ParentCode P0101 Pal AN Date if Ins Usr Uwe Edt Date 09 11 2004 1 AN I 1 Value 0 00 ins Date 01 18 2001 Edt Usr MIRA Parent 201 Parent 204 Parent 105 Parent 117 Child Description Value CDescription Parent 122 Parent 124 Parent 136 Parent 143 Parent 167 Parent 174 Parent 175 Darant 109 This class is based on class cOneToMany vfxform vcx and contains a Treeview control based cTreeView class vfxappl vcx The class combines the functionality of cOneToMany and the advanced data presentation in a hierarchical tree structure When a particular node in the TreeView control is chosen the record pointer is moved to the corresponding data row in the main table On the right part in the form the user can view and modify the corresponding data Additionally in the lower part of the form can be edited related child tables Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 77 With the VFX CTreeViewOneToMany Builder you can quick create a form based on the class cTreeViewOneToMany and set all necessary properties VFX CTreeViewOneToMany Builder Form Name Capt
265. of the menu item loltem cItemKey MSG2 LoItem ToolTipText Displays in message box CTRL B BINDEVENT loItem Execute goProgram oMenuBar onItemExecute Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 172 Adds the Third item LoItem loPopupl1 AddPopuplItem Message NORM C This cntTabMenu AddItemToKeyExprsArray loltem CTRL C Left loItem Alignment 0 Used as KEY ID of the menu item loItem cItemKey MSG3 loItem ToolTipText Displays in message box CTRL C BINDEVENT loltem Execute goProgram oMenuBar onItemExecute Adds the Fourth item loItem loPopupl1 AddPopuplItem Message D NORM D This cntTabMenu AddItemToKeyExprsArray loItem CTRL D Left LoItem Alignment 0 Used as KEY ID of the menu item loItem cItemKey MSG4 LoItem ToolTipText Displays D in message box CTRL D BINDEVENT loItem Execute goProgram oMenuBar onItemExecute Adds the second popup group 2 goProgram oMenuBar cntTabMenu AddPopup Wait Windows lnTabIndex LoPopup2 nColumns 1 loPopup2 Width 200 Adds the first item loItem loPopup2 AddPopupItem Wait window W NORM W This cntTabMenu AddItemToKeyExprsArray loItem CTRL W Right loItem Alignment 1 Used as KEY ID of the menu item LoItem cItemKey WWI1 loItem ToolTipText Displays Wait window W CTRL W BINDEVENT l
266. ogram fxp and Menu fxp under the application folder should be deleted You should include the file VFX H into your forms if you use constants in your forms 18 18 OLE drag amp drop In VFX applications OLE drag amp drop is available in three different ways By default in Grids OLE drag amp drop is enabled The entire content of a grid can be copied for example to Excel with one mouse click When needed it is also possible to switch OLE drag amp drop for particular controls By default this feature is switched off and can be set using the VFX Application Builder into the property nOLEenableDrag of the application object nOLEenableDrag 1 amp amp 0 use form setting default 1 enable 2 disable Further it is possible to copy the data of all controls of a Page in a Pageframe into another OLE drag amp drop capable application This feature is also switched off by default and can be enabled if necessary using the VFX Application Builder changing the property nPageOLEdragdrop of the Application object nPageOLEdragdrop 1 amp amp 0 use form setting default 1 enable 2 disable 18 19 Hooks VFX offers direct intervene within all important methods through Hooks As example let s look at the OnInsert method of a form The OnInsert method is called if a new data record is to be added First the method OnPrelnsert is called Only if this method passes back T as a return value a data record will be ad
267. olBox Login IP addresses Tools 1 Tools 2 Tools 3 Tools 4 The page frames lower part of Ribbon Bar can be hiden by pressing Minimize the Ribbon from right menu BHP EABBE BB 2 Ss kB BEI RRBA AXEURBBSO 0 A 29 Home Edit View Tools Help Additive Menu Tab Minimize the Ribbon 1 v User List Users Status 2 Database System Locks i Print Screen Manage Config vfx Backup Cor User Groups Login Audit Manage PickLists Modify Report Cus User Rights System Errors ToolBox Login IP addresses Opt Tools 1 Tools 2 Tools 3 Tools 4 Checking Minimize the Ribbon will hide the lower part as shown in the picture K 5 5 RB2 SX BO RRA AXEUBHBSOO9 IE Venelinars Fantastic Pizzas EEE Home Edit View Tools Help Additive Menu Tab 5 English Clicking on the tab will show the lower part and give opportunity to select an item Leaving the shown part with the mouse will automatically hide it The right menu gives also a possibility to hide Quick Access Bar as shown in the picture Venelinars Fantastic Pizzas Ex Home Edit View Tools Help Additive Menu Tab English v User List Users Status 2 Database System Locks Print Screen Manage Config vfx Backup Cor User Groups Login Audit Manage PickLists Modify Report User Rights System Errors ToolBox Login IP addr
268. ols the CA property SendUpdates Manage config vfx The menu entry in the application menu is available only for end users with user level 1 XP open dialog on Terminal Server The auto hide function of the XP open dialog is not active when the application is running as a terminal server client The option Auto hide XP open dialog in Customize dialog is also disabled Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 176 Class switcher When switching between classes and one or both are containers besides the property values of the containers the following properties of their main textboxes are transferred ControlSource InputMask Format and StatusBarText Help file For every form a help file can be specified different from the main help file The file s name without path should be put in the form s cFormHelpFile property It is opened from the same location as the main help file goProgram cHelpFile cDateTime class A cDateTime control can use as a control source either a field from a cursor or a variable property On Init of the control the type of the control source is determined and it s property nControlSourceMode set accordingly 1 Default for field 2 for variable property This property is regarded when the value is saved to the control source with Replace or direct assigning Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 177 Onetomany Optimierung In one
269. om Ctrl End Here you can customize your Toolbar as well as toggle the pages in a multi tab page dialog or simply navigate through the current set of records in a data manipulation form For detailed information please refer to the Discussion of the VFX Data Manipulation Form chapter later in this Document Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 37 7 1 4 Favorites Menu Favorites Tools Window Help Addto Favorites This is the VFX Favorites menu The first option is to add the currently selected record to the favorite menu second is to manage the favorites At the bottom all currently available favorites grouped by form are displayed as additional menu options at runtime 7 1 5 Tools Menu Window Help Debug User List User Groups User Rights Login 2 Database Audit Trail System Errors System Locks J Print Screen x Manage Manage PickLists ToolBox Backup Customize Options For further detailed information regarding the features described above please refer to the chapter User List User Rights Login Database Tools Audit Trail System Errors System Locks Print Screen and Options Dialog later in this documentation 7 1 6 Windows Menu window Help T Cascade EZ Arrange All 1 Customers 2 Orders If you have multiple windows open you will see their form captions in the Windows menu Visual Extend
270. on will be used to set goProgram InstallationDate and all the rest of the user rights will be created according to the activation key If the INI file does not exist then it is assumed that this is the first run of a newly installed application To verify if this is really first application start additional will be checked if the FirstInstall txt exists If the file exists it is considered that the application is really started for first time Then the installation date will be stored into the INI file and the FirstInstall txt will be deleted If an unfair user tries to re activate the application by deleting the INI file application will be terminated if FirstInstall txt does not exists This enhanced protection ensures a higher security level However the developer must not forget to include the file FirstInstall txt in the application installation files and to set it to be placed into the Windows folder When the user wants to activate the installed application he must send his installation key to the developer The installation key can be sent to the developer using three different ways The desired method can be set using the property nRegWay 0 Installation key is displayed in a dialog window The user can copy the key and paste it in another application for example in an e mail message 1 Installation key is stored into a file Later this file can be send to the developer The name of the file must be defined in the property cPara
271. onally Also the main toolbar is instantiated and can be used for the operation of the form Of course it is also possible the project to be started by the main program Vfxmain prg The form can be started then from the Open Dialog Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 20 3 Introduction 3 1 Overview Visual Extend requires a Visual FoxPro version wit at least same version number as Visual Extend that you have To use Visual Extend 11 0 is needed Visual FoxPro 9 0 Visual Extend 11 0 holds out a comprehensive development environment for software developers working with Microsoft Visual FoxPro 9 0 Visual Extend includes Builders which assist the Software Developer in their daily work and dramatically speed up the software development process without scarifying any of the Visual FoxPro features With Visual Extend Visual FoxPro becomes a real Rapid Application Development Tool for both Desktop and Client Server Database Application Development Visual FoxPro is an outstanding Software Development Environment Thanks to its Object Orientation and OLE Capabilities the Software Developer s dream of easy code reuse of either personally developed or third party modules becomes true However starting to develop your own Software Development Environment in Visual FoxPro from scratch is a major undertaking Not only because it s difficult to develop a solid Class Library as a Foundation Class for all Applicat
272. only one option in the OnMore method the assigned form is opened without this dialog to appear 11 2 2 Preparing the Child Form Additionally in the Child form with the form builder on the page Options the VFX developer must select the option Is Child Form or to set manually to T the form property ChildForm When you call a form pass the necessary parameters to the nit method of this form Since the passed parameters are not automatically visible for other methods of the same form the VFX form stores the necessary parameters in special properties Here is the code of the nit method which the VFX Form Builder produces as example for your needs lparameters tcArg local lInitOk if empty tcArg if getArgCount tcArg lt gt 0 this cCalledBy upper getArg tcArg this cFixFieldValue strtran getArg tcArg 2 this Caption this cFixFieldName strtran getArg tcArg 4 1 2 getArg tcArg 3 4 5 this cFilterExpr upper getArg tcArg this lPutInLastFile f Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 95 Ckckckck ckckckckckckckckckck ck KK ck ck ck ckckckckck ckckckckckckck HH ck HH ckck ck ckckckckckckckckck ck HH ck ck ck HH KH KK KHK HH KH k ko KH Set who has called you if this cCalledBy lt CalledBy gt Ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck KKK ck ck ck ck KKK KEK ck ck ck ck ck ck KH KH AH ck KH ck KKK ck AH KH ck oko AH ck ck ck A
273. ons Select SQL Server Server Name local dg Use Trusted Connection User Name Password Click on next to proceed Alternatively you can pick out the connection among the connections to a SQL server created in a VFP database or the SQL server can be manually selected Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 189 VFX Metadata Wizard MAIN PJX Database name test Connection name Click on finish to proceed The Metadata Wizard creates a table Datadict dbf This is a free table where the structure of the SQL Server database along with constraints user defined data types rules views and stored procedures is stored The wizard scans existing connections in the active project and retrieves data structures for every one of them Later when the table Datadict dbf is deployed to end users the data structure update will use it and again scanning existing connections will update user s database structures 22 9 Index files ensures optimum use of existing index keys For the incremental search in VFX power Grids VFX automatically considers all existing index keys of the opened table An index key with UPPER clause is expected for character fields For date fields is expected an index key with DTOS clause If VFX does not find a suitable index key a temporary index file is created This index file is deleted as soon as the form is closed Fur
274. operation For this purpose is used or CONCAT SELECT d deptno AS DepartmentNo e empno AS EmployeeNo e firstnme lastname AS EmployeeName FROM department AS d INNER JOIN employ AS ON d deptno e workdept 23 2 4 Datetime processing functions VFP SOL Server DB2 UDB YEAR DATETIME DATEPART year YEAR CURRENT DATE GETDATE QUARTER DATETIME DATEPART quarter QUARTER CURRENT DATE GETDATE MONTH DATETIME DATEPART month MONTH CURRENT DATE GETDATE DATEPART dayofyear DAY OFYEAR CURRENT GETDATE DATE DAY DATETIME DATEPART day GETDATE DAY CURRENT DATE WEEK DATETIME DATEPART week WEEK CURRENT TIME Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 191 GETDATE DOW DATETIME DATEPART weekday DAYOFWEEK CURRENT GETDATE DATE HOUR DATETIME DATEPART hour HOUR CURRENT IME GETDATE MINUTE DATETIME DATEPART minute MINUTE CURREN TIME GETDATE DATEPART second SECOND CURREN TIME GETDATE DATEPART millisecond MICROSECOND CURRENT GETDATE TIMESTAMP 23 2 5
275. operty is set to T the end user administrator can make global customization and in turn enable or disable customization for all other users The checkbox Allow User Customization is used to control whether other users are allowed make their own environment setting If this property is set to F the checkbox Allow User Customization is not visible and applications environment cannot be customized If the end user administrator disables user customization option the settings defined under Administrator s account become global settings for all users of the application 7 3 1 Currently logged users 11 0 keeps track of logged users in a table with possibility to block users from login more than once at a time The property of goProgram object lAllowMultipleLogin controls the behavior of the application when at login time appears that the user is already logged in the system When this property has a value T users can login more than once at a time Default value is T goProgram lAllowMultipleLogin T For every user is kept the IP address of the workstation where he logged in After user logs out IP address field is cleared Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 42 Users with administrator rights can see currently logged under menu Tools Users Status IP address and login time are displayed The column last login time always shows the last date and time when user had logged in even if the
276. opying it For a new created project the application protection through product activation can be switched on in VFX Application Wizard on Page 3 Options by marking the Checkbox Enable product activation Later this setting can be changed in VFX Application Builder The property goProgramm lUseActivation must be set to T in order to enable product activation When the property goProgramm lUseActivation is set to F the application will not be protected using product activation For every application can be defined up to 32 different end user rights Every right can be activated independently of the other rights 24 1 List of used terms System specific value A System specific value for example the serial number of a hardware component or the creation date of a particular file or a value of an entry in the Windows Registry Both the used file name and the used Windows Registry key name should be predefined by the developer Activation rule For every application can be defined an unique activation rule This rule consist of consists of a number of system specific values which combination unique identifies a particular PC Also text proceeding functions can be used when defining Activation rule Installation key This is the character string that contains information about the PC gathered using the activation rule The Installation key is by the developer to prepare an Activation key for the concrete user Activation key
277. or not At 5 page Colors and background properties can be set Data Style Legends Axes Colors Background Scales Margins Quality Color Type Brush Type Main Color 255 000 000 Chart Grad Level 10 10 se gt Basic colors 5 Solid Brush BackColor 128 128 128 Gradient Direction Custom colors GradientBrush BackColor 2 192 192 192 Top to Bottom precem cm Transparency 0 255 255 lt E Invert gradient col Gradient Type Gradient colors cones Palette 1 Sigma Bell Triangular Gradient Position 0 6 Colors Background Properties Color Type Determines used type of color Brush Type Determines the type of brush used to fill the chart BackColor Determines the main RGB color for the current chart For the case of a Gradient background this willl be the starting color for the gradient BackColor2 Determines the secondary RGB color for the background of the current chart This is the ending color for the gradient Transparency 0 255 Determines the transparency level of the background of the chart Chart Grad Level 10 10 Used when working in Gradient Brush mode determines the destination gradient color increasing the original color to white or reducing to black 10 destination color is black 0 solid color 10 destination color is white Gradient Direction Determines the direc
278. or the case of plain line chart having Depth 0 shows rounded caps in each line intersection point LineCapsShape Determines the enumerated shape to be used in all the intersections of all lines for plain line charts having Depth 0 The list of the enumerated shapes available is listed in the cShapeContent property The default value is zero that means that each line will have a different shape Margin Specifies the global margin width left without any drawing in the GDIGraph control It is a blank space in pixels left in the 4 edges of the control Top Bottom Left and Right MarginBottom Specifies the bottom margin left without any drawing in the GDIGraph control It is a blank space in pixels left in the bottom side of the control MarginLeft Specifies the left margin left without any drawing in the GDIGraph control It is a blank space in pixels in the left side of the control MarginRight Specifies the right margin left without any drawing in the GDIGraph control It is a blank space in pixels left in the right side of the control MarginTop Specifies the top margin left without any drawing in the GDIGraph control It is a blank space in pixels left in the top side of the control MaxValue The highest value that will be displayed on the vertical axis If automatically calculated this value will always be higher than all the values in the chart To let GDIGraph calculate automatically the value for the
279. or to white or reducing to black 10 destination color is black 0 solid color 10 destination color is white GradientPosition Determines the location where the gradient destination color will be in the shape Numeric a value from 0 through 1 that specifies where along any radial from the center of the path to the path s boundary the center color will be at its highest intensity A value of 0 5 the default places the highest intensity at the center of the path GradientShapeDirection If using gradient brushes Property BrushType 2 determines the direction of the gradient colors as described below 0 horizontal 1 vertical 2 diagonal 1 3 diagonal 2 GradientType 0 SigmaBell default gradient brush that changes color starting from the center of the path outward to the path s boundary The transition from one color to another is based on a bell shaped curve 1 Triangular gradient with a center color and a linear falloff to each surrounding color LegendHideWhenNull Determines if the associated side legend will be shown if the current value is NULL LegendPosition Determines the Side Legend position relative to the chart 0 No Legend 1 Vertical Top Left 2 Vertical Bottom Left 3 Vertical Top Right 4 Vertical Bottom Right 5 Horiz Top Left 6 Horiz Top Center 7 Horiz Top Right 8 Horiz Bottom Left 9 Horiz Bottom Center 10 Horiz Bottom Right LineCaps F
280. ore functions for the Active from Audit Trail Opens the Audit Trail form for the current data record in the active form Screenshot Prints the screen content Edit Record Ctrl E Switches the form into Edit mode Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 39 Delete Record Ctrl D Search Record Ctrl F First Record Ctrl Home Previous Record Ctrl Up Arrow Next Record Ctrl Dawn Arrow Last Record Ctrl End User Refresh Help F1 Login Close ESC Deletes the current record in the active form Filters the data in the active form according given criteria Moves the record pointer to the first record of current table or view Moves the record pointer to the previous record of current table or view Moves the record pointer to the next record of current table or view Moves the record pointer to the last record of current table or view Example for an application specific button Refreshes the view for active form based on entered parameters for data selection Calls the context sensitive Help Allows another user to login while the application is running Closes active form Besides the standard toolbar VFX also offers the possibility to define toolbars which are associated to particular forms All you have to do is set up the toolbar and set the VFX form property cToolbarClass to the name of the desired toolbar VFX handles the rest for you automatically NOTE For a detailed technical des
281. orm MessageBox Builder in the VFX Menu t VFX Messagebox Builder ME Record List Message id MSG_ASK_DELETE Do you want to delete this record English German Erench Italian Spanish Bulgaria Greek Czech Dutch Portugue Russian User Fin Soll dieser Datensatz gel scht werden Style 4 Yes and No buttons v 32 Question mark v view VFX Define 2 Click on the button New to create new Messagebox Then enter in the field Message id a meaningful name for the Messagebox In the Pageframe you can enter the text for each necessary language In the row Style select desired type of the Messagebox You can chose among different icons and buttons By clicking on the button Test it The Messagebox will be displayed in preview Copy in the clipboard the code created by VFX Messagebox Builder with the button Copy code to clipboard Then you can paste this code from the clipboard in every part of your code For every entry the VFX Messagebox Builder adds a new data record in the table Vfxmsg dbf Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 101 On the page List you have an overview of all existing data records t VFX Messagebox Builder List Sort Text Original Text MSG_ASK_DELETE Do you want to delete this record Do you want to delete J MSG ASK FOR IDX This operation will take a long time OOVVould you continue This op
282. orm Jblmsgempty Caption CAP LBLTHEREARENOITEMSTOSHOWWINTHIS VIE thisform pafpageframe page1 Caption PAGE1 thisform pgfpageframe page1 Iblcustomerid Caption CAP LBLCLISTOMERID thisform pafpageframe page1 Iblcustomername Caption CAP_LBLCUSTOMERNAME thisform pqfpagetrame pagel Ibladdress Caption CAP_LBLADDRESS thisform pqfpagetrame pagel blcontactperson Caption CAP_LBLCONTACTPERSON thisform pgfpageframe pagel Iblphone Caption CAP_LBLPHONE thisform pafpageframe page2 Caption CAP LIST thisform pgfpageframe page2 grdgrid column Header1 Caption CAP_CUSTOMERID thisform pgfpageframe padge2 grdarid column2 Header1 Caption CAP_CUSTOMERNAME thisform pgfpageframe page2 grdgrid column3 Header1 Caption CAP_ADDRESS thicform nnfnanaframa nana ardearid enolimn Haadard Carntion CAD DHARE _ ToolTipfet Status Bar C Run Time Localization C Overwrite Code In the Include File VFX h the constant _LANG_SETUP defines whether the LangSetup method will be executed or not In the LangSetup Method will be checked whether this constant exists and only if it exists the code in this method will be executed This is made for speed optimization of the native forms DEFINE _LANG_SETUP SIS In the Include File Vfxdef h the ID Language constant defines the current language of your application define ID LANGUAGE ENG The first time you create your application using the VFX
283. orm changes and the toolbar controls are automatically synchronized NOTE For input of large data you can directly call Ctrl N while already in insert mode This allows incomparable fast data input for multiple records For the same handling optimization reason the table navigation keys are available also while in edit or insert mode Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 112 Depending on the setting of the application class property nAutoEdit resp the form property lAutoEdit the user can start typing and the form switches to the edit mode like shown here Edit Customer Customer ID 653 First Name Robert Country USA Last Name McClain Contact Name Johan Organization Green Inc Contact Title Schneider Address 16 Park Street Phone Number 32438743893 Edinburgh Fax Number 34433434 State N r Category ID 54544 Region Ney York Note The buttons in the toolbar as well as the menu entries will be activated corresponding to the form s status 17 2 Gradient Backgrounds for VFX forms and page frames In vfxCtrl vcx is added the class cGradBackGround In this class is encapsulated the functionality which creates gradient backgrounds for a form or page object Properties AutoStart If set to F the cGradBackground class will not start until the user calls the Update method Default value is T BackColor1 Numeric
284. orm shown from Main circle button Here is loaded file menu in the left site and file submenues on right or Recent files Methods ShowRecentlItems Load recent items from goProgram aLastForm array New method of cFoxAppl ShowRibbonBarMenu Shows Ribbon Bar Menu Example A method LoadAdditiveTabMenues in cRibbonTbrTabMenu provides users to write there code to add theirs tabs and items This method is called after loading the main tabs and items in the menu So Users menu tabs will be added as last ones If the user wants to add a Menu tab and Items he must write in LoadAdditiveTabMenues method and in onSelectItem method It s also possible to create a new method instead of onSelectItem one and to bind the Execute event of menu items to the new method In onSelectItem method can be used cItemKey properties of menu items to identify the elements This is some example code which adds a menu tab of the type 7 Es 93m X BAXEUBOO IE Venelinars Fantastic Pizzas c sese Home Edit View Tools Help Additive Menu Tab 22 English v Message A MesaeD 00000 Wait window W Displays D in message box CTRL D Wait window X Message Messages Wait Windows Appl vcx cAppRibbonTbrTabMenu The code LoadAdditiveTabMenues An example for additive tab menues lcTabDescription lt Additive Menu Tab Adds a menu tab with Caption lcTabDescription HotK
285. page Chart Type and other Style properties depending on chart type can be set fi VEX GDI Graph Builder Data Style Legends Colors Background Scales Margins Quality Chart Type Pie and Doughnut Properties 7 Side Legends 2 Doughnut DoughnutRatio 0 50 v Enhanced drawing Vertic Top Right Report Name Detach Pixels 30 31 Values in shapes vixGDIGraph E Anticlockwise Angle o WI Allo ide ellipse Show percentages Logo file name picture to be added in S Distance 0 0 _ lefttop corner ofthe graph Show p age values Legend o7 ej Change color on mouse over BITMAPIDESKTOP PNG Distance F Show ToolTips Detach on legend click Force Circle Depth 20 Shadow Style properties Chart Type Select the type of chart to be drawn 1 Pie 2 Doughnut 3 Full stacked bars 4 Point 5 Lines 6 Area 7 Simple Bars 8 Multiple Bars 9 Stacked Bars 10 Stacked Area 11 3D Bars 12 Horizontal Simple Bars 13 Horizontal Multiple Bars 14 Horizontal Stacked Bars 15 Horizontal Full Stacked Bars 16 Full stacked area For all chart types can be set Side Legend Determines if the side legend will be shown Legend Position Determines the Side Legend position relative to the chart 0 No Legend 1 Vertical Top Left 2 Vertical Bottom Left
286. pecially with the one to many relations where you have a given parent record and multiple child records A good example for a parent child relation is the Order Parent table and Items Child table situation of any order and invoicing system If you don t want to assure the referential integrity RI manually using VFX methods like OnPostDelete it s good practice to generate the RI code in the database container before you generate one to many forms If you don t do this you will have to write manually the code for the deletion of parent records which have child records and in the case where you allow the change of key fields even the update code as well Start the VFX Form wizard from VFX menu and create a form based on cOneToMany class Setup the data environment of the form you want to create The VFX Form Builder automatically picks up this information while creating the one to many form The VFX OneToMany Form Builder assists you in generating sophisticated one to many forms with almost no coding If you setup the one to many relation from the parent table to the child table in the case of multiple child tables which all depend from the same parent table you might have more than one child table each linked with the parent table through a relation you can generate one to many forms as easy as standard data manipulation forms IMPORTANT Remember to define the InitialSelectedAlias property and the one to many rel
287. r VFX versions e Buttons for adding and deleting child records are now enabled only if the form is in Edit or in Insert mode e The child part now can contain also other controls than cChildGrid which can be placed similar to parent edit page e The Edit pages in child part of one to many VFX forms can be created using builder in same way as you create edit page in parent part of form CChildGrid class which is implemented in all one to many VFX forms is now expanded with several new functions e When the child alias is based on a view or CursorAdapter cursor the cChildGrid class allows using incremental search for columns e Clicking on empty area of the cChildGrid class adds a new child record Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 79 9 11 VFX CGrid Builder Although the VFX Form Builder already generates a Grid Page you may have the need to make modifications only on a grid The VFX Grid Builder automates the creation of full featured grids The resulting VFX Power Grids are powerful yet simple to use and do not have any performance penalties You will find the features of the power grids extremely useful The incremental search the user specific save and restore of column layout changes column size and sort order will be appreciated by the users of your applications To call the VFX Grid Builder select the last page in your form and select the Grid Control To call the Builder right click w
288. r a page in the pageframe to define background color 17 11 Dockable Forms 11 0 supports dockable forms Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 122 List Child ID 12 Parent 188 E Parent 188 Description Child 12 Value 2 Item 11 11 Item 11 The docking behavior of forms is controlled by goProgram nDockable property of the application object If this property is set to 1 for every particular form are used its own settings When goProgram nDockable contains a value greater than 1 this value is assigned to Dockable property of all forms NOTE When the WindowType of the form is set to Modal the value of the property goProgram nDockable is not applied to the form Generally modal forms cannot be docked The dock status and the dock position of a particular form is saved for every user in the resource table Vfxres dbf 17 12 VFP Toolbox for end users The useful toolbox functionality of VFP 9 is extended to end users too The toolbox is fully integrated into 11 0 and adjusted to VFX specifics Users can define specific text that can be easily dropped down into text boxes and edit boxes in forms Dragging an item from the toolbox dropping it into a Textbox or Editbox controls in a form will place the item text at the cursor position Similar to VFP toolbox text items are grouped into categor
289. r name for the connection cPassword Password for the connection Return Value T The Dial Up connection entry was created successfully F The Dial Up connection entry cannot be created CheckInetConn cCheckURL cDUNConnName nHWnd This function checks whether a connection with Internet exists For this purpose will be made an attempt to access an URL in the Internet An example for implementation of this function can be found in the class cDownload in the method CheckInterneCconnection cCheckURL This URL will be checked to ascertain that a connection with Internet exist cDUNConnName Using this Dial Up connection entry will be established a connection if necessary nHWnd Handle of the calling window Return Value 0 A connection with the Internet exists The connection establishment operation was canceled by the user 2 No connection with Internet 3 An error occurred 24 The Dial Up connection entry named cDUNConnName does not exist Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 213 27 Remote support In VFX 11 0 is integrated the viewer part of the remote control program Radmin End users can start the remote control by choosing Help Remote control from the main menu The remote control is carried out through the Internet 27 1 How does the Remote control work How does the Remote control work A connection using the IP protocol using port 48
290. re too The properties of the Application object that are in particular important for the control of the application must be defined here FileMnuName In this property will be entered the name of the menu pad File The name might not correspondent to the displayed caption The name of the pad File that is set in the Vfxmenu vmx will be used The name must be known from the Application object as far as at run time to this menu pad are added entries correspondent to the latest used forms Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 53 nAppOnErrorBehavior This property controls the behavior of the application in case of error 0 Run time error will be ignored 1 An error message will be displayed Default Program Error Error 10 Method FRMTREE REFRESHSELECTEDTREEYIEWNODE 15 Syntax error IIDValue EVALUATECALLTRIM This cWorkAlias ALLTRIM ThisForm oTreeview IDFieldName 2 After a message is displayed the execution of the application will be terminated Program Error x Fatal Error Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 54 9 VFX Builders and Wizards for Forms 9 1 VFX Form Wizard As in former VFX versions the VFX Form Wizard should be used to create a new form The user interface of the VFX Form Wizard was already discussed in the chapter Quick overview As an extension to the behavior of VFX 8 0 Builde
291. re generated and then can be run under http localhost myFolder frm FormName afp In case of error The error which appears if a form is seriously changed and then immediately the Builder is run is Error loading form after leaving the login dialog This is caused the resource file which must be deleted first with the user s management in the running program Run your application log in and then go under user s management on the page Editing There you can click the button Delete settings 29 1 Vfxafpmeta dbf description The table has following fields ckey Contains the class names cdesc A short description cmemo The content for instance the HTML code Iparam T means this is a parameter for input control ICode T means that the content of cmemo will be passed through execscript nvers The actual version number There are 5 parameters Outputpath The path which must be given by the first start of the Wizards Prefix The Prefix which is placed in the beginning of every form name Default frm _ Postfix The suffix which is appended to the form name Extension The extension of the generated files Default AFP Postfixexec the sufix for the EXEC files which contain the code to process the inputs Every used class in the form is presented with two records Most simply this can be explained with the Pageframe which consists of Pageframe and page Within a Pageframe can
292. re productive than ever before Page 61 column with the CGrid property nMaxRec you can define when you want to have a message to pop up before a temporary index will be generated 9 4 3 Form Options The following options are available on the page Form Options VFX CDataFormPage Builder Form Name Caption tmParentD ocs ParentDocs Edit Pages Grid Page Form Options View parameters Linked Tables Required Fields Report Report Name C Is Child Form Can E dit Save Restore Positions Has More Functions Can Insert C Add SpeedBar Control Has Linked Child Form Can Copy Auto Sync Child Form Can Delete Put In Last File Menu Multi Instance Put In Window Menu Close with ESC Key C Use DBC Definitions Overwrite Font Report Name Here you can select a report name Whenever the user selects print or preview this report will be selected and printed respectively previewed All this without the need to write code in the method onPrint When this property is left empty VFX searches for a report that has same name as the form Is Child Form If the form you are currently creating will be called from another form this form acts as a child form NOTE Please don t mix this up with the later described One To Many Form where you can have the parent and the child table processed on the same form we are talking about this scenario Forml gt calls Form2 whereas Forml could b
293. red in the text box control CPickAlternate txtField ControlSource The Controlsource of the text box control This field will come from the Picklist table CPickAlternate txtDesc ControlSource The name of the description field After successful validation its value will be displayed in the description field This field is also from the Picklist table Return Field Name Code The name of the field which value from the selection table will be shown to the user Usually this field name corresponds to the name which is filled into txtField ControlSource Here should be entered only the field name without the table name The value of this field must be of character type If it is necessary convert the value with TRANSFORM into a character type Return Field Name Description The name of the description text field which will be returned back from the Picklist table An expression can also be returned The value is displayed in the description field The Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 87 value must be of character type If it is necessary convert the value with TRANSFORM into a character type Return Field Name Internal Key The name of the field from the Picklist table which contains the primary key The relationship from the main table to the Picklist table in the data environment is maintained trought this field Control Source Internal Key The name of the field from th
294. registration Encrypt password for hardware parameters Object name for HTTP registration Store activation data to vixini Filename for registration number key t t Activation key validity in days Email to send registration number to an email de Activation key type 1 Long activation key vixregister Name for the Register form Time limited activation key Start date of activation keys Web service Web Service name vixregservice Web Service link Web Service Register method name RegisterCustomer E Save settings for future use Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 50 Error processing 1 show error message Startup Application Behavior Application Behavior 2 Activation Error Handling Eat OLE Drag amp Drop Grids indexes Paths Misc Author Log error details 2 Full detailed information Web Service ErrorReport method ReceiveErrorinfo Name of application Company Save settings for future use Show century in date fields Null is valid value 0 Use Control Settings Century for rollover 19 Always ask prior any save operation 1 Enabled Year for rollover 4
295. registration key to the customer computer The registration key can be transferred by the Supporter to the customer s computer through the Radmin connection Beside the remote control Radmin offers the chance for file transfer 27 5 The remote control from the point Supporters The customer should begin the remote control connection only after consultation with the Supporter The remote support application allows unlimited access to the customer s PC and thus is a considerable security risk for the customers Hence the access to the customer s PC should be protected by a password It is not very likely that a waiting Radmin server is found quickly in a dynamically assigned IP address in the Internet by hackers In addition the access to the customer s PC is protected by a password for accessing the customer s PC which must be given while establishing the connecting by the Supporter Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 215 In the Remote administrator Viewer is created an entry for the application Support Remote Administrator Connection Mode View Help gt 7 4 5 compter Mrs RemoteSupport myCompany homeip net default Buwe default Full control In the properties of the Remote entry the Subdomain name is entered in the field IP address New Connection Name of entry Remotes upport IP address or DNS name Port myCompany homeip n
296. ring getrennt werden sollen Die Standardtrennzeichen sind Leerzeichen Tabulator und Wagenr cklaufzeichen Beachten Sie dass GETWORDCOUNT jedes der Zeichen in cDelimiters als Trennzeichen verwendet und nicht die ganze Zeichenkette als einzelnes Trennzeichen 30 9 3 R ckgabewert Smallint 30 9 4 Hinweise GETWORDCOUNT geht standardm ig davon aus dass W rter durch Leerzeichen oder Tabstopps getrennt werden Wenn Sie als Trennzeichen andere Zeichen angeben ignoriert diese Funktion Leerzeichen und Tabstopps und verwendet nur die angegebenen Zeichen Siehe auch GETWORDNUM GETALLWORDS 30 9 5 Beispiel declare cString nvarchar 4000 set cString N Werd ich zum Augenblicke sagen Verweile doch Du bist so sch n Dann magst du mich in Fesseln schlagen dann will ich gern zugrunde gehn Wenn Sie als Zielzeichenfolge f r GETWORDCOUNT cString verwenden erhalten Sie folgende Ergebnisse select dbo GETWORDCOUNT cString default Anzeige 34 W rter getrennt duch Leerzeichen select dbo GETWORDCOUNT cString Anzeige 2 Zeichnfolgen abgegrenzt mit 30 10 GETWORDNUM Gibt ein angegebenes Wort aus einer Zeichenfolge zur ck 30 10 1 Syntax GETWORDNUM GcString nIndex cDelimiters 30 10 2 Parameter cString Gibt die Zeichenfolge zur ck die ausgewertet werden soll GnIndex Gibt die Indexposition des zur ckzugebenden Worts an Wenn beispielsweise nIndex auf 3 gesetzt ist g
297. rnatively with the value 1 or with the value 6 tlRecurseSubfolders When the value of this parameter is set to T the subfolders are included in the archive recursively The files corresponding to the file mask tcFileMask are also searched in subfolder If the value of this parameter is F files being in subfolders are not processed tcPassword Here must be passes a password if the archive should be protected If no password protection is required an empty string must be passed For the password are allowed all characters except CHR 0 Return Value 0 Cancel archiving operation The files will be added to archive 2 Continue archiving operation ExtractZipArchive tcExtractFilesFolder tcFileMask tcArchiveFullPathName tcFeedBackFunction tcPassword Extracts files from Zip Archive file An example for the implementation of this function can be found in the class cArchive in the method cExtractForArchive tcExtractFilesFolder Folder where files extracted from archive will be stored tcFileMask Names of the files to be extracted Multiple file names can be specified in a semicolon separated list Meta characters can be used tcArchiveFullPathName File pathname for the Zip archive tcFeedBackFunction Name of a function or a method which will be called from ExtractZipArchive for progress FeedBack tcFeedBackFunction cCurrentOperatedFile nState nAllFilesSize nZIPedFilesSize nArchiveCurrentSi
298. roperty cMainToolbar in the application class CFoxAppl in Appl vcx You could use the CAppToolBar or CAppNavBar toolbar class to develop most of your office compatible applications But of course you can create also other toolbars All you have to do is create a new class which inherits the CToolbar class or even the CAppToolBar or CAppNavBar class Select New while in the project manager on the class tab or on any class library object you will see the following Dialog New Class Class Name CMyToolbar BasedOn Toolbar Cancel From Store In d vfx8test appl vox Class Name Enter the name of the new class Assume we name it CMyToolbar Based On Click the ellipsis button and in the following Open Dialog select the Class cAppToolBar or cAppNavBar from the VFX Class Library Appl vcx Suchen in LIB Q 3 e m Class Name EN activedesktop appl vcx vfxoffce vcx seg rea vfxapplvex El vfxrep vcx Een vxckrl vex vfxtools vcx vFxfavor vcx vFxForm vcx vFxobj vex Application Main ToolBar with Class Library Nagivation Button Dateityp Visual Class Library vex Abbrechen From The reference to the VFX Library File called Appl vcx will automatically be displayed Store In If your application specific library file does not yet exist just type in the full path and name otherwise pick it u
299. rs now after creating a form in Form designer the VFX Form Builder will be automatically started The VFX Form Builder includes the new VFX Data Environment Builder The developer is led by the builder step by step starting with the choice of an appropriate form class up to the running form 9 2 VFX Form Builder The VFX Form Builders support all new form s properties of VFX 11 0 The Form Builder of VFX 11 0 were wholly remade and large number of features were included Additionally now it is possible to key up functionality that were only manually editable in VFP before On new pages of the Form builder can be defined view parameters related tables required fields and fields to be used in reports The greatest new feature here is the first step of the Form Builders dialog which shows a Data Environment Builder 9 3 VFX Dataenvironment Builder The VFX Form builder now give developers opportunity to set data environment along with building form layout Tables views or predefined CursorAdapter classes can be added to dataenvironment and new CursorAdapter classes can be created too It is possible to set order and filter of data to define used indexes and to define relationship between objects in data environment Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 55 On page Aliases can be added tables existing CursorAdapter classes as well as creating new Cursor Adapter objects
300. sX In order to draw in the Chart canvas you ll need to use the GdiPlusX drawing commands such as DrawImage GdiPlusX support is not in the scope of this help file oGfx The GdiPlusX graphics object from GDIGraph ImageCanvas The use is recommended for advanced users allows you to add drawings directly to the Chart surface PieCompensateAngles Recalculates the needed angles adjusting for a better visualisation when the pie has an important difference between width and height Set this to false to force circular shapes Applicable only to Pie and Doughnut charts PieDetachAnimationSteps The quantity of steps that a slice of a pie or doughnut will take till full detachment This is to be used for animation purposes The recommended and default setting for this property is 3 steps That means that when you detach a slice of doughnut or pie interactively the slice detached will appear in 3 different positions till it reaches the final definitive position Notice that the whole chart image will be redrawn on each step So if you increase too much this value it may take a long and undesirable time till the slice is completely detached PieDetachPixels For Pie and Doughnut charts the quantity of pixels that slices will detach from the center of the doughnut or pie PieDetachSliceOnClick Allows the detachment of pie or doughnut slices on mouse click over the shapes PieDetachSliceOnLegendClick Allows the detachment of p
301. ses shows a list of all tables and fields for every table When you navigate trought the table list in the left grid in the dialog in the right grid is displayed the list of fields for correspondent table By default fields which are primary key for the table are marked as key fields for the crated CursorAdapter class other fields by default are marked as updateable fields You can change these preset values accordingly As a result the Wizard creates one CursorAdapter class corresponding to every table in the chosen database For generated classes are filled following properties CursorSchema Tables SelectCmd KeyFieldList UpdatableFieldList and UpdateNameList 22 3 Data access with CursorAdapter Builders of VFX 11 0 use CursorAdapter objects in the Dataenvironment CursorAdapter objects can be used in Dataenvironment in same way as local or remove views are used In all VFX Builders and Wizards CursorAdapter objects can be used as datasource CursorAdapter objects can be used as datasource also in Picklists VFX 11 0 includes a CursorAdapter class which ensures the base functionality needed to access application s data This is the class cBaseDataAccess placed in the class library Vfxctrl vcx This class should be used as an underlying class for all CursorAdapter objects used in the application It ensures that the whole application uses one common data connection and does not create unnecessary connections 22 3 1 T
302. setting background of all forms and form s pageframes 0 use Form s settings 1 Horizontal 2 Vertical 3 Diagonal TopLeft gt BottomRight 4 BottomLeft gt TopRight If nGradientMode is not 0 all forms and pages will be colored using nBackColor1 and nBackColor2 For these purpose a new properties and methods are added to cFormVFXBase to control this behavior For forms BackColor property is used as start color Properties Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 113 nBackColor2 RGB value of the destination color of the gradient background nGradientMode Gradient type 0 Do not use gradient colors 1 Horizontal 2 Vertical 3 Diagonal TopLeft gt BottomRight 4 BottomLeft gt TopRight Methods SetBackColor Sets the background of the form or form s pageframes These properties can be set in all Form builders on Form Options page Backgrounds for pages can also be set from Form builders in tabs Edit pages Grid page Children For each page background is generated a line of code on PageFrame s Init like This SetPageBackColor tnPageNo tnBackColorl tnBackColor2 tnGradientMode This is backword compatible with Page s back color functionality Just added destination color and gradient mode 17 3 The VFX Power Grid In all columns in a grid an incremental searching is enabled by default Also doubleclicking on any column header is a grid automatically sorts it
303. sing the ellipsis button GetFile Dialog Now you have to modify your toolbar class Do this using the Visual Class Designer Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 159 Add a Custom button Visual Extend offers predefined buttons for the easy creation of toolbars Drag the class cToolbarbutton from the VFX class Vfxctrl vcx onto your toolbar and adapt the following properties and methods of the newly added command button Click Event Add the command which you want to execute whenever this command button will be clicked Assume we want to run a Customer form In this case we place the code goProgram RunForm CUSTOMER into the Click event Picture Select a BMP or ICO file to be used on your toolbar command button Make sure to place the desired code into the Refresh Event of every toolbar icon or the toolbar directly for proper refresh of your icons If you call a modal form VFX will automatically disable all toolbar icons but it s up to you to reactivate the toolbar icons again This could happen with the following code in the refresh event this enabled this parent cmdopen enabled The above code would automatically synchronize the toolbar icon with the state of the file Open toolbar icon which will always be synchronized with the actual state of the application Add a Separator Start with a separator which separates the last standard Icon from the first application specific o
304. sistants The user will be led step by step through the process A good example for the use of the class cWizard is contained in the VFX Wizards itself The VFX Metadata Wizard is based on the class cWizard VFX Metadata Wizard MAIN pjx Use Database connections Select SQL Server Server Name local Use Trusted Connection User Name Password Click on nextto proceed 18 25 CDownload class This class allows you to download files from the Internet If necessary the downloaded files can be run and further actions can be performed In particular in this way can be performed application installation from the Internet The class can be used for many different purposes through passing different execution macros to ExecMacro method Macros are character strings that contain consecutive commands defined in the macro language User defined macros be developed An example can be found in the field Install GS in the table Vfxsys dbf With this macro the Ghostscript application is downloaded from the Internet and installed The class uses the Internet site URL stored into the goProgram cConnectionCheckURL property to check if there is an existing Internet connection If necessary a Dial Up connection will be automatically established When there are no dial up network entries a new entry will be created The connection information can be predefined by the developer If necessar
305. st Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 119 17 8 Sending Fax Another feature for report output is the ability to send generated report as a fax When the user chooses Fax option for report output the fax number should be entered in the textbox The report is sent to a fax printer and the specified number is automatically used for that without need of any additional actions by the end user VFX 11 0 uses the fax application FRITZ fax by and Winfax by Symantec VFX 11 0 recognizes when one of these fax applications is installed When a fax application is found it is used for report output to the corresponding fax printer driver Grid Report Options Advanced Title Font Delayed Courier New v Times New Roma Details Title Font Details Font Times New Roma v 8 BI B Courier New Print O Print Portrait O Preview Landscape O e mail Fax Page number on first page O Save As Date Time Cancel The fax number is passed to the fax application directly by the VFX application The end user will not meet the fax application dialogs When a particular form uses an individual report file the end user can enter the fax number in an additional dialog Please enter the fax number Fax Number Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Pag
306. stInsert code is that you might have the situation where you have a combined key or other situations where you have to replace more than one field in the child table When a single field key is used the generated code in the example is correct and you need only to remove comment characters in the beginning of the lines 10 2 VFX CPickField Builder VFX contains several classes for Picklists A Picklist consists of a text field a button and a read only text field In the text field can be entered a value When leaving the field it is checked whether the entered value is contained in the table with the picklist values If no a Picklist form is started for selection In the Picklist form the user can select the desired data record In a read only text field can be displayed further information from the picklist table When needed the user can be allowed to insert new data records in the picklist table All properties of the Picklist control can be set with the VFX CPickField Builder All this without entering a single line of code or text in the property sheet of the picklist container control manually To call the VFX Picklist Builder be sure to select the picklist container control on the form right click and select Builder from the context menu NOTE To select a control which is on a Page within a Pageframe within a Form you have to get used to the Visual FoxPro way of accessing controls in a container hierarchy Click RightCl
307. stomer where customer_id trim this txtField Value Use View Alternatively you can use a select command or a view for validation of the user input When you use a view enter the name of the view here The where clause of the view must ensure that at most one value will be selected Use SQL Pass Through When you check this checkbox the select command contained in the view will be used from the VFX and trought SQL Pass Through will be sent to the remote datasource Pick Dialog Class Here can be used your user defined class for the selection list control Please note that this class must be inherited from the CPickField class On the page Options are available the following options VFX CPickField Builder Pick Field Update Work on View Options C User Refresh Code C Auto Skip C Hide Code Auto Pick C Is a Key Field User Refresh Code Sometimes you need to have custom code in the Refresh method of the picklist container Auto Skip Check this option if you want to automatically tab to the next field after selecting a value from the picklist This sets the cPickField property UseTab to T Auto Pick Check this option if you want to automatically call the picklist when the user enters a wrong value This sets the cPickField property lAutoPick to T Hide Code Check this option if you want to hide the code field in the picklist This sets the cPickField property IHideCode to T The user cannot ent
308. stopped In this case the value of ResultOnError has to be F If the execution of the script can continue regardless of the fact that window did not appeared the passed value will be 7 SearchedString String that will be searched in form s captions Closes the top level window In advance using C command must be ensured that the desired window is at top level K nKeyCodel nKeyCode2 Places the listed key codes into the Windows keyboard buffer U URL From this internet address will be downloaded a file The downloaded file will not be run regardless of the InNoRun parameter s value Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 162 18 25 2 Example Explanations for the Ghostscript Installation macro D ftp mirror cs wisc edu pub mirrors ghost AF PL gs8 1 1 gs81 1w32 exe Downloads the file gs811w32 exe from the Internet and runs it afterwards 30 F F F WinZip Self Extractor gs811w32 exe Waits until window with caption WinZip Self Extractor gs811w32 exe appears K 43 Sends the key code Enter to the active window This will start the files extraction 60 F F F AFPL Ghostscript Setup Waits until a window with caption AFPL Ghostscript Setup appears 43 Sends the key code Enter to the active window This will start the GhostScript installation 240 F F F AFPL Ghostscript Setup Log Waits while th
309. t is developed with VFP itself the developer has unlimited freedom to make own extensions or adaptations that are needed The performance of VFX applications is so good as it can be for pure VFP applications The nesting level is not deep Most classes have only 1 to 2 maximally however 4 nesting levels behind them In order to accelerate further loading of extensive forms can be used Delayed Instantiation This is also supported by VFX with easy handled functions The applications created with VFX provides to the developer with a very professional look and an Office compatible user interface With all this VFX offers an unrivalled cost performance ratio It offers to every developer a rich source of ideas and numerous complete problem solutions 33 1 Your feedback is important for us Your feedback is highly appreciated Mail us your feedback to visualextend dfpug de or visit our VFX Newsgroup at news news dfpug de Thanks to all VFX customers for the great feedback provided so far VFX 11 0 More productive than ever before
310. t start of the application and activation information will be saved Default value is VFX ini The name of a file where will be saved the Installation key Depending of the value of the property nRegWay this file can be sent by e mail or processed in other ways cRegMail In this property should be stored the E mail address of the developer where the file containing the installation key will be sent if the value of the property nRegWay is 2 cRegFileName Here can be entered the name of a file that the application installation will create The creation date of this file will be used to determine installation datetime If this property is left blank system datetime at the first start of the application will be used nRegWay In this property can be specifies how the developer will receive the Installation key 0 The Installation key will be displayed in Dialog and the user can copy the Installation key and paste it in another application 1 The Installation key will be stored into a file The user can send this file to the developer later The name of the file should be entered in the property cParamFile 2 The Installation key will be stored into a file and sent to the developer as an e mail attachment The name of the file should be entered in the property cParamFile The e mail address of the developer should be entered in the property cRegEMail Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive tha
311. tMode If using gradient background having the property BackColor2 specified determines the direction of the gradient colors as follows 0 horizontal 1 vertical 2 diagonal 1 3 diagonal 2 BarLegendDirection Numeric the direction from the legend that stays inside the bars shapes 0 Horizontal default 1 Vertical from top to bottom 2 Vertical 2 from bottom to top BarsPerScale Determines which of the tick marks on the vertical axis show legends A value of 1 means every tick mark 2 means every other one etc BarsSpaceBetween For bars chart the distance in pixels between bars BarType For bars charts the type of bar shown in chart 0 Rectangular shaped bars 1 Cilyndrical shaped bars 2 Triangular shaped bars BrushType Type of brush used to fill the chart 1 Solid Colors 2 Gradient Colors converts the colors using a scale of gradients 3 Monochrome Hatch brush draws in black and white using hatch brushes to distinguish between the shapes cAddLogoFileName File name of logo image If not empty a logo will be printed on left top corner of chart ChangeColorOnMouse Determines if a shape color will be changed when the mouse is passed over it Use the property SelectedShapeColor to customize the color of the shape under the mouse ChartsCount The number of Value sources This is one of the most important properties to be set ChartsCount will receive the quan
312. tances be disabled 2 2 5 User s management In VFX is included a user administration Here are placed a form for editing the user data a form for defining the user rights a management of user s groups as well as a login screen After the successful login of the user is created a global object named goUser For all fields of the current user data record from the table Vfxusr dbf corresponding to the currently logged user are added properties of the object goUser The name of the property correspondent to the field name in the table Vfxusr dbf It is possible in each place in the program to check the value of properties of this global object in order to decide whether a user may perform a certain action So can for example be restricted the selection of a menu option which opens a form or disable the editing of a field on a data manipulation form 2 2 6 Error tracking When a run time error is raised the error is displayed in a Messagebox In addition the error is logged in a table At this point are saved the name of the current user date time and the status of all opened tables as well as the Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 17 list of memory variables Further application s behavior when a run time error is raised can be set through the properties of the application object 2 2 7 Database Tools Under the menu option Tools Database is invoked a form with a Mover Dialog
313. ted forms using the VFX Builders Use the Visual FoxPro Environment whenever you want without loosing the reentrance feature of the VFX Builders as long as you add remove all controls using the VFX builders Builders for Standard Forms including Parent Child Form technique Calling and Called By Builder for Power Grids Builder for all your Picklist needs Builders for classical as well as advanced OneToMany Forms including Pageframe for the Parent and another Pageframe for multiple Childs tables all on one Form All Builders get the Field Descriptions and other properties automatically from the Dataenvironment Form Builders will automatically size any Textbox Controls according underlying Field Length Use the VFX Form Builders with own VFX based form and control classes Run forms directly from form designer Toolbar Navigation or Navigation Buttons on form as well as Buttonbar into a Form Messagebox Builder Task Pane Applications Manager Easy subclassing of the application class and setup of the environment class Easy setup of application specific main toolbars Linked Parent Child forms techniques The complete Application Development Framework covers already all user interface elements in Bulgarian Czech Dutch English French Finnish German Greek Italian Portuguese Russian and Spanish Start a new Application in the language of your choice without need of translating a single word of the Visual Extend Application Dev
314. ted to current record of main table It allows the end user to open related documents and also to send them as attachment in an e mail Form Designer parentdocs scx ParentDocs Page1 Page List Folder Description VFX Document Management Builder Doc Table parentdocs Filter Expression DocT able Key parentkey Parent T able Parent Default Document Folder DATA Parent Table Key parentid v J File Name Field parentdocs filename Y Picture Preview Form Name Folder Name Field parentdocs filedirectory w vfsPicture File Description Field parentdocs filedescr v Open Pictures in a Form The class can be added to the existing forms Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 99 12 Builders and Wizards for Data Handling 12 1 VFX CursorAdapter Wizard The VFX CursorAdapter Wizard creates one CursorAdapter class for every table that is included in the database Using these generated CursorAdapter objects can be accessed data from a form for example The CursorAdapter Wizard can access any type of data source used in VFX and use it as a foundation for generation of CursorAdapter classes Later the generated CursorAdapter classes can be edited with VFP CursorAdapter Builder In partic
315. ter for data access The VFP class CursorAdapter can be considered as a small revolution in the data access from VFP applications So far the data access in VFP and VFX always worked with the help of aDBC Experienced programmers could also access data by SQL Pass Through but here we will not discuss this detailed The data access through a DBC is well known for us and it is trustworthy and reliable However the data access through a DBC has also a few disadvantages A DBC is nothing else than a table The file extension is changed by DBF in DBC because it concerns a special table In the DBC is kept information about the database structure and the integrity as well as information about connections if working with Remote datasource Users could manipulate the DBC data Connection information about the Remote data source including user name and password is kept as a clear text and is fully readable if the DBC is opened for example with Excel The idea to work without DBC has two general reasons The connection information must be protected against unauthorized access and modification The application can very easy be ported from a DBC data source to a remote data source Exactly these goals can be achieved by using the CursorAdapter class CursorAdapter objects can be added to the Dataenvironment in same way as tables or views CursorAdapter class can be inherited and VFX provides the class cBaseDataAccess from the class library Vfxctrl vcx This c
316. th Ctrl Del from the child grid The other options are the same like in the VFX CDataFormPage builder on the grid page Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 73 9 7 VEX COneToManyPageFrame Builder The new class cOmeToManyPageframe gives the developers the chance to place on different pages of one Pageframe both parent and child data This class combines features of cDataFormPage and cOneToMany form classes When active page of the pageframe control is of type Parent navigation buttons work for the alias cWorkAlias If the active page is of Child type navigation is applied on the child table On Child pages you can place either child grid or edit controls COneToManyPageF rame Builder Form Name Caption Master Table Edit Pages Grid Page Form Options View parameters Linked Tables Required Fields Report Page Count Page Title 2 C Reorder elements cm Right Label Alignment Edit Page T Justified Tab Page Picture Page BackColor C Add Column To Labels CS Pagel Page2 Fields List Control Type dee Caption Parent ID Parent parentcode Format 19 ee Pano Er erg Status Bar Parent ID amp utoCompSource AutoComplete C Read Only C Use DBC Definitions Overwrite Font In addition to all other setting which the developer keys up in forms b
317. th the above sample changing the coordinates of the points and even add more lines by changing the size of the array and adding new destination points cShowValuesOnShapeContent Comma separated List of Logical values determines if values will be drawn in the determined shape Useful when you don t want to call the attention to a specific line The shape legends will be shown only if the property ShowValuesOnShapes is set to TRUE Methods and Events AfterChart This is an event that occurs immediately after the chart is drawn but still before the image object is updated Use this when you want to draw something specific in your chart In order to draw in the Chart canvas you ll need to use the GdiPlusX drawing commands such as DrawImage If the property cAddLogoFileName is not empty VFX automatically will print the picture in top left corner of the chart You can use this feature to print watermark or your company s logo in the graph ChangeColor tnRGB tnLevel Method that returns a darker or brighter version of the original color Most recommended to obtain some destination gradient values tnRGB Numeric the source RGB color value tnLevel Numeric from 100 to 100 where zero means no change Negative values mean darker colors and positive brighter colors This function is used internally to calculate the destination colors for the gradients but can be used by you when you need a full control over some colors Cli
318. the default tooltip is exibited Use this event in order to customize the text that is to be shown in the tooltips onltemClick called when an Item from ContextMenu is selected onPrint Print review chart Pass t as parameter for preview otherwise print 2 PDF 1 Email Executes onPrint method of the conained form LangSetup Called when language is changed and application uses Runtime localization Available only for cGDIGrapfCustom class 18 23 Toolbars 18 23 1 Use the Main Toolbar you like It s a good practice to create a new class library file for your application or company specific needs We prepared this for you and called it Appl vcx To make your live as easy as possible we already created two classes within this Appl vcx cAppToolBar and cAppNavBar The first is the standard toolbar and the second is one which you may use if you do not want to have the navigation and other buttons on the form CAppToolBar 9 BH CAppToolBar will be used if you are working with the VFX forms with the navigation and other buttons on the form Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 158 CAppNavBar D ePwWs S Ba x 0 Bes CAppNavBar will be used if you are working with the VFX forms without the navigation and other buttons on the form To switch from one main toolbar to another is needed to change the values of the p
319. the method Click cStringForEncripting String to be encrypted cPassword Password to be used for encryption Return Value Encrypted string Decrypt cStringForDecripting cPassword Decrypting a string with a password An example for implementation of this function can be found in the class cDunConnectiom cmdOk in the method Init cStringForDecripting String to be decrypted cPassword Password to be used for decryption Return Value Decrypted string GetAxControlSize nhWnd nWidth nHeight Retunes the size of an ActiveX Control An example for implementation of this function can be found in the class cCalendar in the method Resize nhWnd Handle of the Active X control nWidth Width of Active X control nHeight Height of Active X control Return Value Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 212 The size of the Active X control was successfully determined F The size of the Active X control cannot be determined SetModemConnection cConnectionName cPhoneNumber cUserName cPassword Creates a Dial Up connection entry An example for implementation of this function can be found in the class cDownload in the method EstablishDUNConnection For successful execution of this function a modem driver must be installed cConnectionName Name of the connection that will be created cPhoneNumber The phone number that will be dialed cUserName Use
320. the shapes are dynamic having each one a different value and origin it is possible to know what value each shape contains and in to which column and row it is associated in the data cursor Using the properties below you can obtain all the information that you need about the current shape Property Name Type Description the index number to be used in the aCoord property index to obtain more info about CurrIndex Numeric the current shape if no shape was selected the value of this property is zero CurrValue Numeric the value of the shape CurrLegend Character the associated legend CurrRecno Numeric the the row value from the Source alias cursor CurrColumn Numeric the column number from the Source alias cursor CurrObjType Character the type of object Pie Rect or Legend ShowAxis For Bars Lines Area or Point charts defines if the X and Y axys will be drawn Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 155 ShowLineZero Determines if the background line for the zero scale will be shown or not ShowAxis2Tics For Bars Lines Area or Point charts determines if the legend axis axis2 will show tic marks on each legend ShowScale Determines if the scale in the Axis will be shown ShowSideLegend Determines if the side legend will be shown ShowTips true tips are shown when user moves the mouse over the chart shapes ShowValuesOnShapes Determines if the sourc
321. thermore the index file is deleted if the form changes into edit mode or into insert mode as well as by deleting data records That is meaningful because if temporary index files are opened running transactions for example as used in the RI code would lead to VFP run time error VFP does not permit temporary index files if you work with transactions When transactions are used in a form after the data manipulation the former valid index keys can be set again if it is necessary For the user it seems that the selected sorting sequence remains the same You can set this in Application Builder by marking Recreate temporary index files after editing option If in a form and in any code called from it no transactions in the used tables are invoked and also no RI code is placed you can set in VFX Application Builder not to delete temporary index files during the data manipulation For this mark the following options Disable clearing indexes when editing data Disable clearing indexes when inserting records resp Disable clearing indexes when deleting records Temporary index files are deleted every time when a form is closed Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 190 23 DB2 Application programming considerations 23 1 Data types conversion considerations The automatic type s conversion used by Cursor adapter classes helps to overcome differences between almost all data types in VFP and DB 2 T
322. they want to start over with new settings or if they are switching from a larger display resolution to a smaller or simply if they aren t satisfied anymore with their user preferences for forms grids sort orders and Picklists To clear the VFX resource table click on the command button called Clear resource VFX 11 0 provides new advanced features for managing application users Now the administrator can reset the resources for all users with the button Reset all users For every user the administrator can specify that the password must be changed with the next login The administrator can also setup that a particular user is not allowed to change his password Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 41 User List Edit List User name Password User Level ADMIN 1 User Access Administrator E mail B Show Forms first in Form Size Number of Last File Entries O Edit Mode 0 0 2 4 2 List Mode CI Change password at NEXT login Allow user to change password v Allow User Customization BEL SEE User Group gt It is also possible now to give users better flexibility in setting environment By setting to T the property lAlowUserCustomization of goProgram object the developer can allow end users to define their own global environment goProgram lAllowUserCustomization T When this pr
323. tion CASE lcItemKey MSG3 MESSAGEBOX 3 Exclamation 0 48 This Caption CASE lcItemKey MSG4 MESSAGEBOX 4 Information 0 64 This Caption CASE lcItemKey WW1 WAIT WINDOW w CASE lcItemKey WW2 WAIT WINDOW X ENDCASE This Refresh Add also this code In Appl vcx cFoxApp Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 175 Method ShowRibbonBarMenu IF DODEFAULT This oMenuBar LoadAdditiveTabMenues ELSE RETURN F ENDIF 21 3 cXPOpenCombo Class cXPOpenCombo vfxappl vcx Added methods EnableCombo enables this combo and fills its list DisableCombo disables this combo and makes it Visible F ItemExecute executes the currently selected item run a form command Added properties nUserLevel this combo box is used when the user level is below this value Properties cFoxApp oXPOpenCombo vfxappl vcx Fields vfxfopen dbf TbrCboSort N 2 With the new user interface changes it is possible to replace the XP open dialog in a VFX application with a combo box in the main toolbar For this purpose the class cXPOpenCombo can be used An object of this class can be placed in cAppNavBar app vcx If it is present in the main toolbar on application startup a reference to it is added in goProgram oXPOpenCombo This combo box can be used instead of XP open dialog for user levels below a certain value or all user levels For this purpose the object
324. tion of the gradient Invert gradient colors Determines if the gradient start and destination colors will be inverted Gradient Type Determines the type of gradient between Sigma Bell gradient brush that changes color starting from the center of the path outward to the path s boundary The transition from one color to another is based on a bell shaped curve Triangular gradient with a center color and a linear falloff to each surrounding color Gradient Position Determines the location where the gradient destination color will be in the shape Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 143 At 6 page Scales and Margins properties can be set Kf VFX GDI Graph Builder l l Data Style Legends Aes Colors Background Scales Margins Quality Global Margin 4 V Show Scales Top Margin Scale Value 0 Horizontal bars per legend 2H Bottom Margin OF Scale Min Value F 0 Minimum Nr of Y Axis legend 5 Left Margin 0 Scale Max Value F Right Margin 0E Scale Divider 1 7 Automatic scale formatting Cancel Scales Margins properties Global Margin Determines the global margin width left without any drawing in the GDIGraph control It is a blank space in pixels left in the 4 edges of the control Top Bottom Left and Right Top Margin Determines the top margin left without any drawing in the GDIGraph control It is a blank space in pixels left in the top side
325. tions in VFX fll has been enlarged to receive driver name as a parameter when retrieving available servers and databases An identifier that does not comply with the rules for the format of regular identifiers for instance table and field names containing spaces must always be delimited ee In SQL Server delimited identifiers can be quoted 4 or bracketed To work independent on QUOTED IDENTIFIER setting always uses bracketed identifiers when working with SQL Server database DB2 UDB uses only quoted identifiers In VFX the database type is determined based on used driver type and appropriate delimiters are used Generated autoincrement value in DB2 UDB can be retrieved using the function IDENTITY VAL LOCALX The InsertCmdRefreshCmd is generated cBaseDataAccess GetInsertRefreshCmd depending on database source type Strings cannot be concatenated with operation see Strings processing below When connected to the database as a specific user only objects that belong to this user or to his schema are accessible However SQLTABLES function which is used by builders returns a list of all tables in the database regardless of the schema they belong to Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 198 24 Application Protection using Activation Key The main purpose of using product activation is to prevent unauthorized use of the application on unregistered computers just by c
326. tity of columns of data in your cursor For example if you plan to have a line chart containing 3 lines or a MultiBars with 3 bars the value to be passed is 3 Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 150 ChartRow For Pie Doughnut SingleBars charts determines which row will be used to create the chart for the case when more than one sequence of data is passed This is interesting to be used when you pass to GDIGraph various columns of data and want to allow the users to switch directly between the data ChartSum For Pie Doughnut and SingleBars charts returns the sum for the current column of data when the readonly SingleData property is true ChartType Determines the type of chart to be drawn 1 Pie 2 Doughnut 3 Full stacked bars 4 Point 5 Lines 6 Area 7 Simple Bars 8 Multiple Bars 9 Stacked Bars 10 Stacked Area 11 3D Bars 12 Horizontal Simple Bars 13 Horizontal Multiple Bars 14 Horizontal Stacked Bars 15 Horizontal Full Stacked Bars 16 Full stacked area ColorType 0 Basic Colors Basic colors will be used based in an internal list of colors available 1 Custom default For Single data charts such as pies doughnuts and single bars horizontal or vertical a specific field or column must be added to the main cursor containing the RGB values for each color This field name must be passed to FieldColor proper
327. to the application A final message shows that your new application has been successfully prepared NOTE Since you may want to start working on your new project immediately the VFX Application Wizard has automatically set the default directory to the home directory of your new project To start the application from the project manager locate the main program VFXMAIN PRG and select Run Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 35 7 Discussion of the Generated VFX Application After a successful application generation using the VFX Application Wizard you have a running Application with everything new Application needs from the beginning Starting from the Menu the Standard Toolbar User Management System Options Database Tools System Error Tracking System Locking Tools as well as an About Dialog 7 1 Office Compatible User Interface VFX creates applications which are ready to pass the Office Compatible Certification 7 1 1 File Menu Edit View Favorites T gr Open 56 Close I Page Setup amp Print Ctrl P amp Preview e mail gt Fax Save As gt 1 ParentDocs 2 Parent 3 System Errors 4 Parent2 The complexity of the menus is reduced using the standard File Open dialog The user will open a form always through a common Open Dialog for which VFX makes a suggestion for the layout By default the Open Dialog is displayed in Windows XP style doc
328. tomany forms containing child pages incremental search on grid page is very slow sometimes due to repeated calls to CursorRefresh of child cursor adapters To speed this up a new feature is added in cdataformvfxbase class Property nRecordMoveRefreshtimeout Interval of timer in miliseconds which refreshes cursors There is also a property of goProgram with the same name If goProgram nRecordMoveRefreshtimeout is not empty the property of the form is overridden with the value of the property of goprogram If there is a value different from 0 in the form s nRecordMoveRefreshtimeout property in Init of the form a timer is created The timer s Timer event is bound to a new form method called OnRecordMoveRefresh The OnRecordMoveRefresh method contains all the code which so far was placed in OnRecordMove method The idea is if the user is typing something in the grid after each entered symbol OnRecordMove gets called In OnRecordMove method if the current active page is the grid page the timer is reset If the user has stopped typing the timer s interval will have elapsed and the Timer event will call OnRecordMoveRefresh method In OnRecordMoveRefresh the timer s Interval is set to 0 If the form has no timer set OnRecordMove directly calls OnRecordMoveRefresh All the code which so far was placed in OnRecordMove method should be moved to OnRecordMoveRefresh to ensure proper execution when using nRecordMoveRefreshtimeout property of the form
329. ts at run time For every defined index must be entered values for Tag Expression and Sort order If a filtered index need to be made in the column Filter is entered the filter expression Clicking on the button Next brings the next step of the VFX Form Builder 9 4 VFX CDataFormPage Builder To call the VFX Form Builder put the mouse on the white Background of the form click the right mouse button and select builder The VFX Form Builder loads and shows an user friendly Dialog 9 4 1 Edit Pages In VFX Form Builder on page Edit Pages can be keyed up all new form s properties of VFX 11 0 like Background picture or Back color for pages in a pageframe control linked tables and required fields as well as the properties related to AutoComplete Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 57 When the checkbox Add colon to labels is marked a colon char will be appended at the end of all labels VFX CDataFormPage Builder Form Name Caption ftmParent Parent Veen Edit Pages Grid Page Form Options View parameters Linked Tables Required Fields Report m Page Count Page Title Page Picture Page BackColor EI m Reorder elements Right Label Alignment Justified Tab Add colon to labels Pagel Fields List iss Control Type ckeyfield Parent descr Caption Parent ID Parent checked Parent value
330. ty durinGDIGraph initialization In case of other chart types the custom colors need to be passed directly through the Fields collection which is created internally using cColorContent property 2 Random colors 3 Scale of Gradients Colors will be defined starting from the main color that is defined in Fields 1 Color or first color in cColorContent property A gradient starting from the main color ending at almost white cReportName Report name used to print graph CurrIndex CurrLegend CurrValue CurrRecord CurrColumn CurrObjType When any mouse event is fired 6 properties are populated in order to inform about the current chart and the shape that was clicked Using these properties you can obtain all the information that you need about the current shape CurrIndex the index number to be used in the aCoord property to obtain more info about the current shape If no shape was selected the value of this property is 0 zero CurrValue the value of the shape CurrLegend the associated legend CurrRecno the RECNO the row value from the Source alias cursor CurrColumn the column number from the Source alias cursor CurrObjType the type of object Pie Rect or Legend Depth Control the depth effect 3D level of chart Use the value 0 zero for plain charts DonutRatio Applicable to doughnut charts the width of the doughnut related to its size 0 01 full slice 0 99 thin
331. uilders for other form classes in cOneToManyPageframe form builder it is necessary to define for every page if it will be of Parent type and will show data from parent table or it will be of Child type and will display data from child table s If the page is of Child type additionally should be specified if it is an edit page or a grid page Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 74 9 8 VFX CTreeViewForm Builder Main purpose of this class is to represent the data contained in a particular table Parent table in a tree structure The tree view structure gives the end user complete overview of the hierarchical data relations contained in the table Here is an example t ParentTree Parent 103 2 Parent 5 Parent 108 Parent ID 101 Parent 203 Description Parent 101 Date Parentcode 0101 kolokolokolo Parent 201 Parent 204 Parent 105 Parent 139 dgsgsdgsdgdg 8888 Edt Usr Edt Date 08 11 2004 12 Parent 117 ZZ Parent 133 Overid 108 Parent 108 Parent 122 Parent 128 shfsklahflkahglka Parent 124 Parent 2 Value Ins Usr Ins Date 01 18 2001 The class is based on cDataFormPage Vfxform vcx and contains a TreeView control cTreeView Vfxappl vcx It combines the functionality of cDataFormPage and the advanced data presentation in a hierarchica
332. ular it is necessary to take into consideration which parameters is it meaningful to be used for the CursorAdapter classes By default these CursorAdapter classes are based on cAppDataAcess class and are saved into Appl vcx class library However in the Wizard it is possible to be changed underlying class and target class library Wizard leads the developer through three steps 12 1 1 Choosing the Datasource VFX Cursor Adapter Wizard APPLICATION 8 PJX O Native ODBC Use DSN DSN Northwind v User Name Password Generate SQL Connection String Server Name v Use Trusted Connection User Name Password O Use connection string Click on next to proceed Cancel Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 100 13 VFX Builders and Wizards for Product Activation 13 1 VFX Messagebox Builder A useful tool for the creation of Messageboxes in different languages is the VFX Messagebox Builder The texts of the Messagebox are stored in the table Vfxmsg dbf The command for the invoking the Messagebox is copied into the clipboard and can be pasted from there to the own program source code As parameter is passed not the text but a constant The Include files with the values of the constants in the desired language are created with the VFX Message editor To call the VFX Messagebox Builder select the menu option F
333. unctions for your application like e g Administration of users groups access rights Data backup and restore Database maintenance and repair Error log locking user and changes log Favorites Customize and Options Info box Sorting and Searching in the grid Filtering via dialogue Report output incl output as PDF Fax etc PS We underlined only the end user features new and for the first time available in Visual Extend 11 0 Everything else and a lot more has already been available in VFX for a long time Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 11 Read more about the numerous functions of the generated application which are prepared and ready to use for you in chapter 3 2 Properties of applications generated with Visual Extend The second way consists in the supply of a comparatively small set of base classes mainly in the areas of forms grids and lookups of various flavors And the appropriate huge builders come with it working together like the tools of a multi function Swiss army knife enabling the developer to configure these classes fast Read more about the many classes prepared for you and about the related builders in chapter 3 3 Features for developers The package is supplemented and rounded off by administrative functions for software developers and for small and medium sized software companies for example e Database and application updating e Activation key an
334. unktion LogonUser die spezielle Privilegien des Prozesses erfordert der diese Methode aufruft F r Windows 2000 Der Prozess der LogonUser aufruft muss das Privileg SE_TCB_NAME besitzen Wenn der aufrufende Prozess dieses Privileg nicht besitzt f hrt die Ausf hrung von LogonUser zu einem Fehler und GetLastError liefert den R ckgabewert ERROR_PRIVILEGE_NOT_HELD In einigen F llen muss der Prozess der LogonUser aufruft auch das Privileg SE CHANGE NOTIFY NAME besitzen sonst f hrt die Ausf hrung von LogonUser zu einem Fehler und GetLastError liefert den R ckgabewert ERROR ACCESS DENIED Dieses Privileg ist nicht erforderlich f r das lokale Systemkonto sowie f r Konten die Mitglied der Gruppe Administratoren sind Standardm ig ist das Privileg SE CHANGE NOTIFY NAME f r alle Benutzer aktiviert es kann aber von Administratoren deaktivert werden Weitere Informationen ber Privilegien k nnen hier nachgelesen werden http msdn microsoft com library default asp url library en us secauthz security privileges asp Das Privileg SE CHANGE NOTIFY NAME kann aktivert werden in dem man dem Benutzer Security Settings Local Policies User Rights Assignment Act as part of the operating system eintr gt siehe auch http www derkeiler com Newsgroups microsoft public platformsdk security 2004 06 0106 html Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 218 Wenn die COM Server DLL als Web Service eingesetzt wird
335. ut the information for the Field Captions Format Input Mask and Display Class Library in the database container these captions will automatically be used by the VFX form and grid builders As we have already seen new project is generated with VFX Application Wizard This wizard can be started by clicking on the link icon in VFX Task Pane or from VFX 11 0 Menu 8 1 VFX Application Builder This dialog can be invoked at any time from the menu option Project Application Builder to edit settings of the application object NOTE Changes that are made using VFX Application Builder will be kept and used for next new generated project f VFX Application Builder Vfpizza Startup Application Behavior Application Behavior 2 Activation Error Handling Edit OLE Drag amp Drop Grids Indexes Paths Misc Author V Show splash screen Toolbar special effect 2 Hot tracking V Quit the application on unsuccessful relogon Add username to the application caption 1 username amp Y Main window be closed using the close button V XP Style open dialog Help file VFPizza CHM Automatic login Application Icon BITMAPIMAIN ICO Use Windows user name V Use runtime localization Intro form picture BITMAPIINTRO PNG yi Allow Multiple Login Desktop picture BITMAPIDESKTOP PNG OpenDialog on startup Main menu VFXMENU VMR em
336. v C Use DBC Definitions Overwrite Font The following options are available on the page Grid Page Use Grid Page Check this checkbox if you want a Search grid page on your form Grid Page Title Enter the caption for the last page in your form which normally will be a grid to display all records from within your table or view Grid Class Select the grid class you want to use or use the default which is the CGrid Class Fields Selected Here you see all fields you selected for the grid To select fields use the Field Assistant Window which is a separate form which offers all fields currently available in the data environment Calculated Fields Click this button to add whatever calculated field you want Control Type Define for all selected fields which control type you want to use Header Captions for the column headers of your grid VFX Form Builder will automatically take the captions from your database container Output Mask VFX Form Builder takes the input mask from the length of the field You can change the input mask to accommodate your particular needs Read only When a particular control will be used only for displaying information mark this checkbox Incremental Search Mark this checkbox if you want to make available the incremental search feature for the selected column Note that VFX creates a temporary IDX index file if there is no index tag available for this Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual Mo
337. value of 1 means every tick mark 2 means every other one etc Minimum Nr of Y Axis legend Determines if Scale is calculated automatically then this value is used in that automatic computation as it attempts to find a nice value when displaying the legends The actual number of scale legends created will be between this value and twice this value Automatic scale formatting Determines if Scale Legend will be automatically set Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 144 On the last page some Quality properties can be set Data Style Legends Axes Colors Background Scales Margins Quality SmooothingMode CompositingQuality TextRenderingHint Specifies Default Specifies the Default Specifies the 5 System Default whether niic quality levelto quality of text _ smoothing HighSpeed use during HighSpeed renderingused SingleBitPerPixelGridFit antialiasing is 9 HighQuality compositing 9 HighQuality by GDI SingleBitPerPixel er None GammaCorrected AntiAliasGridFit and curves an 2 the edges of gt AntiAlias AssumeLinear AntiAlias filled areas ClearTypeGridFit Quality Properties QualitySmoothing Specifies whether smoothing antialiasing is applied to lines and curves and the edges of filled areas Quality Compositing Specifies the quality level
338. ve it in VFP folder too add the following row Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 29 do C Program Files VFX90 Builder vfxmnu app We assume here that VFX is installed in folder C Program Files VFX90 Builder Adapt the path accordingly if necessary At first start of VFX Menu the following settings will be made automatically Builder points to the VFX Application Wizard named VFXBLDR APP in folder VFX90 BUILDER Searchpath VFX90 BUILDER will be added to the Searchpath At first start of VFP after VFX 11 0 installation the VFX 11 0 Task Pane will be incorporated into VFP Task Pane automatically Very Important Make sure that your current folder is always in the folder of your application Use the command cd in the command window to quickly verify where you are and change on the fly Even better use the VFX Task Pane for easy project switching without the need to manually change any folders If you are in a wrong folder Visual FoxPro might use other Include Files or Class Libraries than the ones you expect The best tool to switch from one project to another is to use the VFX 11 0 Task Pane You can open the Task Pane under the menu Tools Task Pane We recommend you to leave Task Pane to be started by VFP automatically To accomplish this choose the option Open the Task Pane Manager when Visual FoxPro starts in Task Pane Manager Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productiv
339. velopment computer and on the customer computer is necessary to use different connectivity data This is the reason at runtime not to use DataSource which were set at design time At run time cBaseDataAccess class uses the object goProgram oConnMgr an instance of class cConnectionMgr Settings for goProgram oConnMgr object in turn are read at run time from the file Config vfx provides an own connection manager class to establish a connection to the datasource This connection manager is instantiated as a Child object of the application object and is available through the reference goProgram oConnMgr at run time CursorAdapter objects based the class cBaseDataAccess use the object goProgram oConnMgr an instance of the class cConnectionMgr to establish a connection to the datasource The settings for the object goProgram oConnMgr are read from the file Config vfx In this file is kept the information about the datasource used by the application Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 185 The file Config vfx contains data encrypted for safety reasons that is used to connect to the customer database for example type of the datasource connection string and other The password for encoding the file is stored in the property goProgram cConfigPassword VFX developers should define this password themselves The file Config vfx can be created by the developer and deployed along with the application If
340. which defines whether the user can delete records in the current form or not Multi Instance This sets the form property IMultiInstance By default all of the forms you create with VFX be called multiple times so called multi instantiation This is a great feature all you have to remember when use multi instantiation is to set the form to private data session which is the default of all VFX forms However sometimes it is convenient to disable the feature of multi instantiation That s why we created the property MultiInstance Just set this property to F and the form can only be called once Close with ESC key This sets the form property CloseOnEsc which defines whether the user can close a form using the escape key or not Save Restore positions This sets the form property SavePosition which defines whether you want that all the position and other form settings are stored within the VEX Resource File Add Speedbar Control This adds a form toolbar similar to this Additionally there are four new pages in VFX Form Builder for keying up new properties of VFX form classes Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 63 9 4 4 View Parameters t VFX CDataFormPage Builder Form Name Caption frmParentDocs ParentDocs Edit Pages Grid Page Form Options View parameters Linked Tables Required Fields Parameter List R
341. will look like this goProgram SecurityRights RunDataForms 1 goProgram SecurityRights RunReports 0 goProgram SecurityRights EditData goProgram SecurityRights ViewData When the end user starts an application that requires activation and when the application is still not activated the installation key is automatically generated Depending of the value ofthe property nRegWay the generated Installation key is either shown in a form or a file that can be sent via e mail is created After the user has received the activation key he can enter it in the registration window or store the file containing the Activation key into the application folder This will activate the application Later when the user chooses menu option Help Register In this case the generated installation key is only shown in the form regardless of the value of the property nRegWay 24 5 cVFXActivation class properties cFirstInstall This property contains the name of a file Depending of the existence of this file the class decides whether the application is started for the first time If this property contains an empty string it is not Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 205 possible to be checked whether the application is started for first time The date of the start of the application will be saved in the INI file without further checks cINIFileName The name of the INI file where the date of firs
342. wn Application Optionally generated by the VFX message editor when type OTHER has been selected VFX h VFXMAIN PRG No Sets the _DEBUG_MODE _LANG_SETUP _DBCX and other core constant and includes the other Include Files Vfxdef h VFX H Yes Sets the ID_LANGUAGE constant and defines other not language specific VFX constants VfxGlobal h VFX H Yes Constants for fields from user list and options This file is used for backward compatibility with former VFX Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 133 versions Language Specific Messages used in VFX User Interface Used in the Office Classes Word Excel and Outlook Contains constants for the VFP Toolbox Language Specific Captions and Tooltip text used in VFX User Interface Constants for the VFP ReportListener class Vfxmsg h VFX H Yes Vfxoffce h VFX H No VfxToolbox h VFX H Yes VfxTxt h VFX H Yes _FrxCursor h VFX H Yes The application wizard generates most of the constants automatically when you create a new application You have to make changes in VFX h include file if you want to change the debugging mode and in VFXDef h include file if you want to change the current language In order to prepare Visual FoxPro for anew compiling you must make a change in the file s which include the Include files The command clear program in the command window deletes all compiled programs in main memory Additionally the files Pr
343. xmain prg to call the debugmode method with a true parameter to activate debug mode depending on _DEBUG_MODE constant setting ifdef _DEBUG_MODE goProgram DebugMode t Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 127 endif If you don t want Debug Mode code execution in the Include File VFX h comment the line where the _DEBUG_MODE Constant is defined DEFINE _DEBUG_MODE S 18 7 Delayed Instantiation The load time of a form essentially depends on the number of controls which must be loaded with the form But however not all controls of a form are immediately visible when a form is started If user works with a page frame first only the controls of a page are visible The controls of the others not visible at first pages do not have to be loaded at all Only first time when the user activates another page the controls present at this page must be loaded The Delayed Instantiation is supported by VFX by the very practical function AddPageDelay For this purpose all controls of a page frame must be saved in a container as a class To accomplish this in the VFP form designer mark all controls of the current page and select Save As Class option in the menu File The class should be stored in the class library Appl vcx This class library is available to the developer for storing own classes When saving as class VFP automatically fills a container with the selected controls The name of the cl
344. y in a dialog user can change the phone number to be dialed user name and password to access the network resources Properties LastErrorNo This property contains the number of the last error in case some were encountered It can be used to check what the reason for the latest raised error is LastErrorText When an error occurs the description text for the error is stored in this property Methods ExecMacro vcMacro InNoRun vcMacro Macro language script to be executed InNoRun When this property is set to T the downloaded file will not be run Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 161 18 25 1 Macro language commands D URL The downloaded file will be searched at this internet address This command automatically runs the downloaded file after successful download if InNoRun parameter is set to F C nTimeOut IPartial ITopLevelForm IResultOnError SearchedString Waits while the window with caption SearchedString appears nTimeOut Timeout in seconds when the expected form does not appear within this timeframe a timeout error will be generated IPartial when the value of this parameter is T it is enough to find searched string as a part of a window s caption When the value of the parameter is F this specifies that the window s caption must match exact searched string ITopLevelForm When the value of this parameter is T the string is
345. years Visual Extend belongs to the most efficient add in products of Visual FoxPro With Visual Extend abbreviated in the following text with VFX it is possible to create the skeleton for a fully functional Visual FoxPro application within a few minutes When a database for the developed application is already available it is easy within shortest time to create data manipulation forms with the builders of VFX We will learn the most important features of VFX which we will walk through during steps while creating an application Visual Extend requires a Visual FoxPro version wit at least same version number as Visual Extend that you have To use Visual Extend 11 0 you need Visual FoxPro 9 0 2 1 1 Installation After the installation of VFX it is helpful to integrate the VFX Menu into the standard Visual FoxPro Menu For this purpose in Config fpw file should be inserted a line Command DO lt VFX Installation path gt builder vfxmnu app 2 1 2 VFX Task Pane At first start of VFP after VFX 11 0 installation VFX 11 0 Task Pane will be automatically integrated into Visual FoxPro Task Pane FI Task Pane Manager VFX 11 0 ee vrx11 0 A VFX Community fa start 8 Community 7 Environment Manager Solution Samples 2 Refresh Options 2 Help Visual Extend 11 0 Project Description Folder Modified VFX100TRADERS PJX Vfx100traders C UWE VFX100DEMOS VFX100TRADERS 10 11 2008 11 4
346. ze This function or method will be called from ExtractZipArchive every time when Current file that would be extracted already exist Extraction of a file begins Extraction of a file ended A file cannot be extracted from the archive The extraction of all files completed successfully The extraction of all files did not complete successfully Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 210 cCurrentOperatedFile Name of the file extracted at the moment nState Status 1 File cCurrentOperatedFile already exist 2 Extraction of file cCurrentOperatedFile started 3 Extraction of file cCurrentOperatedFile finished 4 File cCurrentOperatedFile cannot extracted 5 Extraction operation completed successfully 6 Extraction operation did not complete successfully tcPassword Password for extraction from the archive If no password will be used an empty string must be passed Return Value 0 Cancel extraction operation 1 Continue extraction operation 2 Overate existing file with the file from archive 26 3 SQL Server GetSQLServers cServersString cEerrorString Enumerates all available SQL Servers Extracts files from Zip Archive An example for the implementation of this function can be found in the function TryConnecting in Vfxfunc prg cServersString String containing names of all available SQL Servers as a comma separated list cErrorString
347. zung beginnen soll Wenn Sie beispielsweise f r nStartOccurrence den Wert 4 angeben beginnt das Ersetzen beim vierten Auftreten von cExpressionSought in cSearched Die ersten drei aufgetretenen Ausdr cke werden nicht ge ndert Ohne Angabe von nStartOccurrence beginnt das Ersetzen standardm ig beim ersten Auftreten von cExpressionSought nNumberOfOccurrences Gibt an wie oft cExpressionSought ersetzt werden soll Wenn Sie nNumberOfOccurrences nicht angeben wird cExpressionSought bei jedem Auftreten ersetzt beginnend mit dem in nStartOccurrence angegebenen Auftreten GnFlags Gibt an ob bei der Suche die Gro Kleinschreibung ber cksichtigt werden soll und zwar entsprechend den Werten in der folgenden Liste Wert f r nFlags 0 Standardwert Beim Suchen wird die Gro Kleinschreibung ber cksichtigt das Ersetzen findet mit dem exakten cReplacement Text statt 1 Beim Suchen wird die Gro Kleinschreibung nicht ber cksichtigt das Ersetzen findet mit dem exakten cReplacement Text statt 2 Beim Suchen wird die Gro Kleinschreibung ber cksichtigt Die Gro Kleinschreibung beim Parameter cReplacement wird an die Gro Kleinschreibung beim Parameter cExpressionSought angepasst der ersetzt wird Visual Extend 9 0 User Manual More productive than ever before Page 227 3 Beim Suchen wird die Gro Kleinschreibung nicht ber cksichtigt Die Gro Kleinschreibung beim Parameter cReplacement wird an die Gr

VISUAL EXTEND 11.0

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents